Ramban · Revision

Revision Book रामबाण

हर Chapter के Quick Revision Points और Formula Sheet एक ही पेज पर। Exam से पहले की रात इसे पढ़िए।Every chapter's quick revision points and formula sheet on one page. Read it the night before the exam.

1. Basics of English Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

There are nine parts of speech; determiners and adjectives are separate in Modern English.नौ शब्द-भेद होते हैं; आधुनिक अंग्रेज़ी में निर्धारक और विशेषण अलग माने जाते हैं।
Noun = names. A pronoun replaces a noun when writing it is unnecessary or impossible. Both work as subject, object or complement.संज्ञा = नाम। सर्वनाम संज्ञा की जगह आता है जब उसे लिखना अनावश्यक या असंभव हो। दोनों कर्ता, कर्म या पूरक का काम करते हैं।
A determiner shows reference (a, the, my, this) or quantity (two, some, much); each, every, either and neither take a singular verb.निर्धारक संदर्भ (a, the, my, this) या मात्रा (two, some, much) बताता है; each, every, either और neither के साथ एकवचन क्रिया आती है।
A verb shows doing, happening, state of possession or state of being; every full sentence needs a finite verb.क्रिया करना, होना, स्वामित्व की अवस्था या होने की अवस्था दिखाती है; हर पूरे वाक्य में परिमित क्रिया होती है।
A finite verb changes with tense and number; a non-finite verb (infinitive, gerund, participle) does not, and works as noun, adjective etc.परिमित क्रिया काल और वचन से बदलती है; अपरिमित क्रिया (infinitive, gerund, participle) नहीं बदलती और संज्ञा, विशेषण आदि का काम करती है।
Adverbs answer How? where? when? how often?: manner, place, time and frequency.क्रियाविशेषण How? where? when? how often? का उत्तर देते हैं: रीति, स्थान, समय और आवृत्ति।
A preposition and its object make a prepositional phrase, which works as an adjective or an adverb.पूर्वसर्ग और उसका कर्म मिलकर prepositional phrase (पूर्वसर्गीय पदबंध) बनाते हैं, जो विशेषण या क्रियाविशेषण का काम करता है।
Conjunctions are co-ordinate (for, and, nor, but, or, yet, so) or sub-ordinate (when, after, before, why, because, as, whereas).समुच्चयबोधक co-ordinate (for, and, nor, but, or, yet, so) या sub-ordinate (आश्रित) (when, after, before, why, because, as, whereas) होते हैं।
Sentence = subject + verb (h.v + m.v) + object / complement / adverb. The predicate is everything apart from the subject.वाक्य = कर्ता + क्रिया (h.v + m.v) + कर्म / पूरक / क्रियाविशेषण। विधेय कर्ता के अलावा बाकी सब है।
A single object is always the direct object; an indirect object comes only with a direct object (He gave me a book).अकेला कर्म हमेशा प्रत्यक्ष कर्म होता है; अप्रत्यक्ष कर्म केवल प्रत्यक्ष कर्म के साथ आता है (He gave me a book)।
A subject complement follows a linking verb (you are intelligent); an object complement follows a complex transitive verb (He called me a liar).कर्ता-पूरक linking verb (योजक क्रिया) के बाद आता है (you are intelligent); कर्म-पूरक complex transitive verb (सकर्मक क्रिया) के बाद (He called me a liar)।
A phrase has no subject + verb of its own; a clause has. Phrases work as noun, adjective or adverb according to their head word.वाक्यांश का अपना कर्ता + क्रिया नहीं होती; उपवाक्य का होती है। वाक्यांश अपने मुख्य शब्द के अनुसार संज्ञा, विशेषण या क्रियाविशेषण का काम करते हैं।
Clauses are main, co-ordinate (independent) and sub-ordinate (dependent); a sub-ordinate clause works as an adjective, an adverb or a noun.उपवाक्य main, co-ordinate (स्वतंत्र) और sub-ordinate (आश्रित) (आश्रित) होते हैं; sub-ordinate उपवाक्य विशेषण, क्रियाविशेषण या संज्ञा का काम करता है।
By structure sentences are simple, complex, compound and compound-complex; by function they are assertive, interrogative, imperative, optative and exclamatory.बनावट से वाक्य simple, complex, compound और compound-complex (मिश्र-संयुक्त वाक्य) होते हैं; कार्य से assertive (विधानवाचक), interrogative (प्रश्नवाचक), imperative (आज्ञार्थक), optative (इच्छार्थक) और exclamatory (विस्मयबोधक)।
Imperative: V1 + obj, Don't + V1, Let's + V1, Let + obj + V1. Optative: May + sub + verb!, Long live …!. Exclamatory: What a …!, How …!Imperative (आज्ञार्थक): V1 + obj, Don't + V1, Let's + V1, Let + obj + V1। Optative (इच्छार्थक): May + sub + verb!, Long live …!। Exclamatory (विस्मयबोधक): What a …!, How …!

Parts of speech

Nine parts of speech: the table below gives the function and examples of each. (Some writers count eight, treating determiners as adjectives.) | Part of speech | Function | Examples | |---|---|---| | Noun | Words that name something | Ram, book, Mumbai, honesty | | Pronoun | Words used in place of a noun | I, we, you, they, he, she | | Adjective | Words that describe a noun or pronoun | good, tall, beautiful, red | | Determiner | Words that show the reference or quantity of a noun | a, the, my, this, two, some, an | | Verb | Words that show an action, event or state | go, teach, rain, is, seem | | Adverb | Words that give information about a verb, an adjective or another adverb | slowly, never, very, here | | Preposition | Words that join a noun or pronoun to the rest of the sentence | in, on, at, by, of | | Conjunction | Words that join words, phrases or clauses | and, but, or, because | | Interjection | Words that express a sudden feeling | Oh!, Wow!, Alas! |नौ शब्द-भेद: नीचे की तालिका में हर एक का कार्य और उदाहरण हैं। (कुछ लेखक निर्धारक को विशेषण मानकर आठ गिनते हैं।) | शब्द-भेद | काम (function) | उदाहरण | |---|---|---| | संज्ञा (Noun) | नाम बताने वाले शब्द | Ram, book, Mumbai, honesty | | सर्वनाम (Pronoun) | संज्ञा की जगह आने वाले शब्द | I, we, you, they, he, she | | विशेषण (Adjective) | संज्ञा या सर्वनाम की विशेषता बताने वाले शब्द | good, tall, beautiful, red | | निर्धारक (Determiner) | संज्ञा का संदर्भ (reference) या मात्रा (quantity) बताने वाले शब्द | a, the, my, this, two, some, an | | क्रिया (Verb) | कार्य, घटना या अवस्था बताने वाले शब्द | go, teach, rain, is, seem | | क्रियाविशेषण (Adverb) | क्रिया, विशेषण या दूसरे क्रियाविशेषण की जानकारी देने वाले शब्द | slowly, never, very, here | | पूर्वसर्ग (Preposition) | संज्ञा या सर्वनाम को वाक्य के बाकी हिस्से से जोड़ने वाले शब्द | in, on, at, by, of | | समुच्चयबोधक (Conjunction) | शब्दों, वाक्यांशों या उपवाक्यों को जोड़ने वाले शब्द | and, but, or, because | | विस्मयादिबोधक (Interjection) | अचानक उठे भाव को बताने वाले शब्द | Oh!, Wow!, Alas! |
Noun and pronoun are used as subject, object or complement. An adjective modifies a noun or noun equivalent.संज्ञा और सर्वनाम कर्ता, कर्म या पूरक की तरह प्रयोग होते हैं। विशेषण संज्ञा या संज्ञा-तुल्य को modify करता है।
Determiner of reference: a, an, the, my, your, this, that, these. Determiner of quantity: one, two, much, many, little, some, more, few. | Determiner type | Examples | |---|---| | Articles | a, an, the | | Possessives | my, our, your, his, her, their, its | | Demonstratives | this, that, these, those | | Distributives | each, every, either, neither | | Numbers | one, two, three… | | Quantifiers | some, many, much, few, little, a lot of, half | > A singular verb is used with each, every, either, neither.संदर्भ का निर्धारक: a, an, the, my, your, this, that, these। मात्रा का निर्धारक: one, two, much, many, little, some, more, few। | निर्धारक का प्रकार (Determiner type) | उदाहरण | |---|---| | Articles | a, an, the | | Possessives | my, our, your, his, her, their, its | | Demonstratives (निश्चयवाचक) | this, that, these, those | | Distributives | each, every, either, neither | | Numbers | one, two, three… | | Quantifiers (परिमाणवाचक) | some, many, much, few, little, a lot of, half | > Each, every, either, neither के साथ एकवचन क्रिया आती है।
Verb shows doing, happening, state of possession or state of being. Finite verbs change with tense and number (H.V. and M.V.); non-finite verbs do not change and work as noun, adjective etc. (infinitives: to + V1, gerunds: V1+ing, participles: V3 or V1+ing).क्रिया करना, होना, स्वामित्व की अवस्था या होने की अवस्था दिखाती है। परिमित (finite) क्रियाएँ काल और वचन से बदलती हैं (H.V. और M.V.); अपरिमित (non-finite) क्रियाएँ नहीं बदलतीं और संज्ञा, विशेषण आदि का काम करती हैं (infinitives: to + V1, gerunds: V1+ing, participles: V3 या V1+ing)।
Adverb modifies a verb, an adjective, another adverb or a whole sentence. | Type | It tells about | Asked with | Examples | |---|---|---|---| | Adverb of Manner | the manner or way of the action | How? / in what manner or way? | slowly, silently, strongly | | Adverb of Place | the place of the action | where? / at what or which place? | here, there, at my house, in the park | | Adverb of Time | the time of the action | when? / at what or which time? | yesterday, tomorrow, today, in the morning, in summer, before Monday | | Adverb of Frequency | how often the action happens | How many times? / how often? | always, never, often, two times, three times, daily, every day, twice, once |क्रियाविशेषण क्रिया, विशेषण, दूसरे क्रियाविशेषण या पूरे वाक्य को modify करता है। | प्रकार | क्या बताता है | किस प्रश्न से पता चलता है | उदाहरण | |---|---|---|---| | रीतिवाचक (Adverb of Manner) | कार्य के ढंग या तरीके के बारे में | 'How?' या 'in what manner/way?' | slowly, silently, strongly | | स्थानवाचक (Adverb of Place) | कार्य के स्थान के बारे में | 'where?' या 'at what/which place?' | here, there, at my house, in the park | | कालवाचक (Adverb of Time) | कार्य के समय के बारे में | 'when?' या 'at what/which time?' | yesterday, tomorrow, today, in the morning, in summer, before Monday | | आवृत्तिवाचक (Adverb of Frequency) | कार्य कितनी बार होता है | 'How many times?' या 'how often?' | always, never, often, two times, three times, daily, every day, twice, once |
Preposition + its object = prepositional phrase (works as adjective or adverb). Conjunction joins words, phrases or clauses: co-ordinate (for, and, nor, but, or, yet, so) and sub-ordinate (when, after, before, why, because, as, whereas). Interjection: Oh!, Hurray!, Ah!, Bravo!पूर्वसर्ग + उसका कर्म = prepositional phrase (विशेषण या क्रियाविशेषण का काम करता है)। समुच्चयबोधक शब्दों, वाक्यांशों या उपवाक्यों को जोड़ता है: co-ordinate (for, and, nor, but, or, yet, so) और sub-ordinate (when, after, before, why, because, as, whereas)। विस्मयादिबोधक: Oh!, Hurray!, Ah!, Bravo!

Elements of a sentence

Structure: subject + verb (h.v + m.v) + object / complement / adverb. The subject is a noun or noun equivalent; the predicate is everything apart from the subject; every full sentence needs a finite verb.संरचना: कर्ता + क्रिया (h.v + m.v) + कर्म / पूरक / क्रियाविशेषण। कर्ता संज्ञा या संज्ञा-तुल्य होता है; विधेय कर्ता के अलावा बाकी सब है; हर पूरे वाक्य में परिमित क्रिया होती है।
Object = the answer to what? / whom? | Object | Recognition | Example | |---|---|---| | Direct object (DO) | Directly receives the action; a person or thing. The answer to what? / whom? | He likes me. He teaches physics. | | Indirect object (IO) | The person for whom the action is done; comes only along with a direct object. The answer to to / for whom? | He gave me (IO) a book (DO). | > A single object is always the direct object. Verbs that take an object are transitive; verbs that take none are intransitive; verbs that take both objects are di-transitive.कर्म = what? / whom? का उत्तर | कर्म (Object) | पहचान (recognition) | उदाहरण | |---|---|---| | प्रत्यक्ष कर्म (Direct object, DO) | कार्य को सीधे ग्रहण करता है; व्यक्ति या वस्तु। what? / whom? का उत्तर | He likes me. He teaches physics. | | अप्रत्यक्ष कर्म (Indirect object, IO) | वह व्यक्ति जिसके लिए कार्य किया जाए; केवल प्रत्यक्ष कर्म के साथ आता है। to / for whom? का उत्तर | He gave me (IO) a book (DO). | > अकेला कर्म हमेशा प्रत्यक्ष कर्म होता है। कर्म लेने वाली क्रियाएँ सकर्मक, न लेने वाली अकर्मक, और दोनों कर्म लेने वाली द्विकर्मक कहलाती हैं।
Complement completes an incomplete predicate. Subject complement (after a linking verb): you are intelligent. Object complement (after a complex transitive verb): He called me a liar.पूरक अधूरे विधेय को पूरा करता है। कर्ता-पूरक (linking verb के बाद): you are intelligent। कर्म-पूरक (complex transitive verb के बाद): He called me a liar।

Phrases and clauses

| Phrase | Head word | Function | Example | |---|---|---|---| | Noun phrase | Noun | Subject / object / complement | A very beautiful girl | | Adjective phrase | Adjective | Modifies a noun or pronoun | Really very beautiful | | Adverb phrase | Adverb | Modifies a verb or adjective | Very fast | | Prepositional phrase | Preposition | Works as an adjective or adverb | In the garden | | Verb (Verbal) phrase | Verb | Works as a verb | Has been waiting | | Gerund phrase | Gerund (V1+ing) | Works as a noun | Playing cricket | | Infinitive phrase | To + V1 | Noun, or adverb of purpose | To call her | | Participle phrase | Participle (V1+ing / V3) | Works as an adjective | The boy playing hockey | | Appositive phrase | Noun | Extra information about a noun | Radhika, my best friend, … || Phrase (पदबंध) | मुख्य शब्द (Head word) | कार्य (function) | उदाहरण | |---|---|---|---| | Noun phrase (संज्ञा पदबंध) | संज्ञा | कर्ता / कर्म / पूरक | A very beautiful girl | | Adjective phrase (विशेषण पदबंध) | विशेषण | संज्ञा या सर्वनाम को modify करता है | Really very beautiful | | Adverb phrase (क्रियाविशेषण पदबंध) | क्रियाविशेषण | क्रिया या विशेषण को modify करता है | Very fast | | Prepositional phrase (पूर्वसर्गीय पदबंध) | पूर्वसर्ग | विशेषण या क्रियाविशेषण का काम | In the garden | | Verb (Verbal) phrase | क्रिया | क्रिया का काम | Has been waiting | | Gerund phrase (क्रियावाचक संज्ञा पदबंध) | Gerund (V1+ing) | संज्ञा का काम | Playing cricket | | Infinitive phrase (मूल क्रिया-रूप पदबंध) | To + V1 | संज्ञा, या उद्देश्य बताने वाला क्रियाविशेषण | To call her | | Participle phrase (कृदंत पदबंध) | Participle (V1+ing / V3) | विशेषण का काम | The boy playing hockey | | Appositive phrase | संज्ञा | किसी संज्ञा की अतिरिक्त जानकारी | Radhika, my best friend, … |
Noun phrase: adjective / determiner before the noun, or participle / prepositional phrase after it. Adjective phrase: adverbs before the adjective, or a prepositional phrase / participle after a noun. Prepositional phrase: preposition + noun or noun equivalent; works as an adjective or an adverb phrase.Noun phrase (संज्ञा पदबंध): संज्ञा से पहले विशेषण / निर्धारक, या उसके बाद participle (कृदंत) / prepositional phrase (पूर्वसर्गीय पदबंध)। Adjective phrase (विशेषण पदबंध): विशेषण से पहले क्रियाविशेषण, या संज्ञा के बाद prepositional phrase / participle। Prepositional phrase: पूर्वसर्ग + संज्ञा या संज्ञा-तुल्य; adjective (विशेषण) या adverb phrase (क्रियाविशेषण पदबंध) का काम करता है।
Phrase = no subject + verb of its own. Clause = its own subject + verb. | Main clauses | Co-ordinate clauses | Sub-ordinate clauses | |---|---|---| | Clauses that have no conjunction before them. | Clauses that have a co-ordinate conjunction before them (also called independent clauses). | Clauses that have a sub-ordinate conjunction before them (also called dependent clauses). |Phrase (पदबंध) = अपना कर्ता + क्रिया नहीं। Clause (उपवाक्य) = अपना कर्ता + क्रिया। | मुख्य उपवाक्य (Main clauses) | समानाधिकरण उपवाक्य (Co-ordinate clauses) | आश्रित उपवाक्य (Sub-ordinate clauses) | |---|---|---| | ऐसे उपवाक्य जिनसे पहले कोई समुच्चयबोधक नहीं होता। | ऐसे उपवाक्य जिनसे पहले co-ordinate conjunction (समन्वयकारी संयोजक) आते हैं (ये independent clauses होते हैं)। | ऐसे उपवाक्य जिनसे पहले sub-ordinate (आश्रित) conjunction (संयोजक) आता है (ये dependent clauses होते हैं)। |
| Sub-ordinate (dependent) clause | Works as | Modifies or serves as | |---|---|---| | Adjective clause | adjective | modifies a noun or noun equivalent | | Adverb clause | adverb | modifies a verb | | Noun clause | noun | the subject or object of the sentence || Sub-ordinate (आश्रित) उपवाक्य | कार्य | क्या modify करता है / क्या बनता है | |---|---|---| | Adjective clause (विशेषण उपवाक्य) | विशेषण | संज्ञा या संज्ञा-तुल्य को modify करता है | | Adverb clause (क्रियाविशेषण उपवाक्य) | क्रियाविशेषण | क्रिया को modify करता है | | Noun clause (संज्ञा उपवाक्य) | संज्ञा | वाक्य का कर्ता या कर्म |

Types of sentence

By structure | Type | Structure | Example | |---|---|---| | Simple | Only one main (independent) clause | I like English. | | Complex | One main clause + one or more sub-ordinate clauses | I like English, whereas my brother likes Physics. | | Compound | One main clause + one or more independent clauses | I like English and my brother likes Physics. | | Compound-Complex | More than one independent clause + at least one sub-ordinate clause | I like English, but my brother likes Physics because it is easier for him. |बनावट के अनुसार | प्रकार | बनावट | उदाहरण | |---|---|---| | Simple (सरल) | केवल एक main (independent) clause (उपवाक्य) | I like English. | | Complex (मिश्र) | एक main clause (मुख्य उपवाक्य) + एक या अधिक sub-ordinate clause (आश्रित उपवाक्य) | I like English, whereas my brother likes Physics. | | Compound (संयुक्त) | एक main clause + एक या अधिक independent clause (स्वतंत्र उपवाक्य) | I like English and my brother likes Physics. | | Compound-Complex (मिश्र-संयुक्त वाक्य) | एक से अधिक independent clause + कम से कम एक sub-ordinate clause | I like English, but my brother likes Physics because it is easier for him. |
By function | Type | Purpose | End mark | Example | |---|---|---|---| | Assertive | To state a fact, statement or opinion | . | The sky is blue. | | Interrogative | To ask a question | ? | Are you going to the store? | | Imperative | To give an order, request or advice | . (or !) | Close the door. | | Optative | To express a wish, desire or blessing | ! | May you be happy! | | Exclamatory | To express a sudden feeling (surprise or emotion) | ! | What a stunning view! |कार्य के अनुसार | प्रकार | उद्देश्य (purpose) | अंत का चिह्न | उदाहरण | |---|---|---|---| | Assertive (विधानवाचक) | तथ्य, कथन या राय बताना | . | The sky is blue. | | Interrogative (प्रश्नवाचक) | प्रश्न पूछना | ? | Are you going to the store? | | Imperative (आदेशसूचक) | आदेश, अनुरोध या सलाह देना | . (या !) | Close the door. | | Optative (इच्छासूचक) | इच्छा, कामना या आशीर्वाद व्यक्त करना | ! | May you be happy! | | Exclamatory (विस्मयादिबोधक) | अचानक भाव (आश्चर्य / भावना) | ! | What a stunning view! |

Structures to remember

Assertive: sub + verb + obj / complement / adverb. Negative: sub + auxiliary verb + negative word + main verb. Only one negative word in a clause.Assertive (विधानवाचक): sub + verb (क्रिया) + obj / complement (पूरक) / adverb (क्रियाविशेषण)। Negative (नकारात्मक): sub + auxiliary verb (सहायक क्रिया) + negative word (नकारात्मक शब्द) + main verb (मुख्य क्रिया)। एक उपवाक्य में केवल एक negative word।
Interrogative: yes / no: auxiliary verb + sub + main verb; choice: do / would + sub + main verb + (or); wh-: wh-word + auxiliary verb + sub + main verb; what (subject): What + verb + obj; what / which + noun: What / Which + noun + auxiliary + sub + main verb; modals: Modals + sub + verb; whom: Whom + auxiliary + sub + main verb; who (subject): Who + auxiliary verb + main verb.Interrogative (प्रश्नवाचक): yes / no: auxiliary verb (सहायक क्रिया) + sub + main verb (मुख्य क्रिया); choice: do / would + sub + main verb + (or); wh-: wh-word (प्रश्नवाचक शब्द) + auxiliary verb + sub + main verb; what (कर्ता): What + verb (क्रिया) + obj; what / which + noun (संज्ञा): What / Which + noun + auxiliary + sub + main verb; modals (रूपात्मक क्रिया): Modals + sub + verb; whom: Whom + auxiliary + sub + main verb; who (कर्ता): Who + auxiliary verb + main verb।
Imperative: V1 + obj / adverb; Don't + V1 + obj / adverb; Do + V1 (emphasis). Let: Let's + V1; Let + obj + V1; Don't let + obj + V1; Let + obj + not + V1.Imperative (आज्ञार्थक): V1 + obj / adverb (क्रियाविशेषण); Don't + V1 + obj / adverb; Do + V1 (ज़ोर के लिए)। Let: Let's + V1; Let + obj + V1; Don't let + obj + V1; Let + obj + not + V1।
Optative: May + sub + verb + obj + complement!; May + sub + be + adjective / noun!; May + sub + be + V3! (passive); Long + live + sub!; Wish + sub + obj!; May + sub + not / never + V1!Optative (इच्छार्थक): May + sub + verb (क्रिया) + obj + complement (पूरक)!; May + sub + be + adjective (विशेषण) / noun (संज्ञा)!; May + sub + be + V3! (passive); Long + live + sub!; Wish + sub + obj!; May + sub + not / never + V1!
Exclamatory: How + adjective!; How + adjective / adverb + sub + verb!; How + sub + verb!; What + a / an + (adjective) + singular countable noun!; What + adjective + noun + sub + verb!Exclamatory (विस्मयबोधक): How + adjective (विशेषण)!; How + adjective / adverb (क्रियाविशेषण) + sub + verb!; How + sub + verb!; What + a / an + (adjective) + singular countable noun (एकवचन गणनीय संज्ञा)!; What + adjective + noun (संज्ञा) + sub + verb!
| Exclamation of | Examples | |---|---| | Joy | Hurrah!, Aha!, Thanks a lot!, etc. | | Surprise | What!, My God!, Wow!, Amazing!, Fantastic!, etc. | | Greetings | Congratulations!, Well done!, etc. | | Contempt | Shame!, fie!, etc. | | Sorrow | Alas!, Ah!, How sad!, etc. | | Attention | Listen!, Look!, etc. | | Mistake | Sorry!, Oops!, Oh no!, etc. || भाव | उदाहरण | |---|---| | खुशी (Joy) | Hurrah!, Aha!, Thanks a lot!, etc. | | आश्चर्य (Surprise) | What!, My God!, Wow!, Amazing!, Fantastic!, etc. | | अभिनंदन (Greetings) | Congratulations!, Well done!, etc. | | घृणा (Contempt) | Shame!, fie!, etc. | | दुःख (Sorrow) | Alas!, Ah!, How sad!, etc. | | ध्यान आकर्षित करना (Attention) | Listen!, Look!, etc. | | गलती (Mistake) | Sorry!, Oops!, Oh no!, etc. |

Some abbreviations for help

| Abbreviation | Meaning | Abbreviation | Meaning | |---|---|---|---| | N. | Noun | Adv. | Adverb | | S.C.N. | Singular countable noun | Sub | Subject | | U.N | Uncountable noun | Obj. | Object | | Pl.N | Plural noun | D. obj. | Direct object | | V. | Verb | I. obj. | Indirect object | | H.V. | Helping verb | Comp. | Complement | | M.V. | Main verb | Det. | Determiner | | Prep. | Preposition | Pron. | Pronoun | | Conj. | Conjunction | Sb. | Somebody (a person) | | Adj. | Adjective | Sth. | Something (a thing) || संक्षिप्त रूप | पूरा रूप | संक्षिप्त रूप | पूरा रूप | |---|---|---|---| | N. | Noun | Adv. | Adverb | | S.C.N. | Singular countable noun (एकवचन गणनीय संज्ञा) | Sub | Subject (कर्ता) | | U.N | Uncountable noun (अगणनीय संज्ञा) | Obj. | Object (कर्म) | | Pl.N | Plural noun (बहुवचन संज्ञा) | D. obj. | Direct object (प्रत्यक्ष कर्म) | | V. | Verb | I. obj. | Indirect object (अप्रत्यक्ष कर्म) | | H.V. | Helping verb (सहायक क्रिया) | Comp. | Complement (पूरक) | | M.V. | Main verb (मुख्य क्रिया) | Det. | Determiner (निर्धारक) | | Prep. | Preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) | Pron. | Pronoun (सर्वनाम) | | Conj. | Conjunction (संयोजक) | Sb. | Somebody (a person) | | Adj. | Adjective | Sth. | Something (a thing) |

2. Clauses & Phrases Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A group with its own subject and finite verb is a clause; without them it is a phrase or a single word.जिस समूह का अपना कर्ता और सीमित क्रिया हो वह उपवाक्य है; अन्यथा पदबंध या अकेला शब्द।
A phrase is named by how it begins; a clause is named by its work (noun, adjective, adverb).पदबंध का नाम इससे तय होता है कि वह कैसे आरंभ होता है; उपवाक्य का नाम उसके कार्य (संज्ञा, विशेषण, क्रियाविशेषण) से।
The sentence decides the part of speech: noun after the word, preposition; clause after it, conjunction; nothing, adverb.शब्द-भेद वाक्य तय करता है: शब्द के बाद संज्ञा, संबंधबोधक; बाद में उपवाक्य, योजक; कुछ नहीं, क्रियाविशेषण।
Gerund phrase = noun's work (replace by it); participle phrase = adjective's work (describes a noun).Gerund (क्रियावाचक संज्ञा) पदबंध = संज्ञा का कार्य (it से बदल सकते हैं); Participle पदबंध = विशेषण का कार्य (संज्ञा के बारे में बताता है)।
An absolute phrase brings its own doer (The sun having set, …); an appositive is a noun phrase beside a noun.स्वतंत्र पदबंध अपना कर्ता साथ लाता है (The sun having set, …); appositive संज्ञा के बगल का संज्ञा-पदबंध है।
A noun clause is a statement: where the book was kept, not where was the book kept; as subject it takes a singular verb.संज्ञा-उपवाक्य कथन है: where the book was kept, where was the book kept नहीं; कर्ता हो तो एकवचन क्रिया।
Who for the doer, whom for the receiver or after a preposition, whose + noun for the owner.कर्ता के लिए who, कर्म या संबंधबोधक के बाद whom, स्वामी के लिए whose + संज्ञा।
Which and that are for things; that cannot follow a comma; *, which* may refer to the whole clause before it.Which और that वस्तुओं के लिए हैं; that अल्पविराम के बाद नहीं आता; *, which* पूरे पिछले उपवाक्य की ओर संकेत कर सकता है।
The verb in a relative clause agrees with the antecedent; no repeated it / he after the clause.संबंधी उपवाक्य की क्रिया पूर्वपद के अनुसार चलती है; उपवाक्य के बाद it / he नहीं दोहराते।
One clause, one connector: not although … but, not because … so.एक उपवाक्य, एक योजक: although … but नहीं, because … so नहीं।
Lest … should + V1; so that … could after a past verb; as if … was / were; not such … as.Lest … should + V1; भूतकालीन क्रिया के बाद so that … could; as if … was / were; not such … as।
Reduce a clause only when the subject is the same, and keep a finite verb in the main clause.उपवाक्य तभी संक्षिप्त कीजिए जब कर्ता वही हो, और मुख्य उपवाक्य में सीमित क्रिया रखिए।
An opening -ing phrase must describe the subject that follows; a who clause stands right after its noun.आरंभिक -ing पदबंध उसके बाद के कर्ता के बारे में होना चाहिए; who उपवाक्य अपनी संज्ञा के ठीक बाद आता है।
Sentence structure: count independent and dependent clauses separately; 2 + 1 is compound-complex.वाक्य-रचना: स्वतंत्र और आश्रित उपवाक्य अलग-अलग गिनिए; 2 + 1 संयुक्त-मिश्र है।

Name it: structure, then work

Own subject + finite verb: clause. No own subject + verb: phrase. Clause by work: noun clause (subject, object), adjective clause (tells about a noun), adverb clause (when, why, if).अपना कर्ता + सीमित क्रिया: उपवाक्य। अपना कर्ता + क्रिया नहीं: पदबंध। उपवाक्य का कार्य देखकर: संज्ञा-उपवाक्य (कर्ता, कर्म), विशेषण-उपवाक्य (संज्ञा के बारे में), क्रियाविशेषण-उपवाक्य (कब, क्यों, यदि)।
Phrase by its first word: preposition, to + V1, V1 + ing (gerund = noun's work, participle = adjective's work), a noun with a participle (absolute), a noun beside a noun (appositive).पदबंध का नाम उसके पहले शब्द से: संबंधबोधक, to + V1, V1 + ing (Gerund = संज्ञा का कार्य, Participle = विशेषण का कार्य), संज्ञा + Participle (स्वतंत्र), संज्ञा के बगल में संज्ञा (appositive)।
One word, many jobs: noun after it, preposition; clause after it, conjunction; nothing after it, adverb.एक शब्द, अनेक कार्य: बाद में संज्ञा, संबंधबोधक; बाद में उपवाक्य, योजक; बाद में कुछ नहीं, क्रियाविशेषण।

Noun clauses

Statement order, no do / does / did: where the book was kept, who accompanied you. As subject, singular verb: That the report failed … was surprising. No second connector: As you know, I …कथन-क्रम, do / does / did नहीं: where the book was kept, who accompanied you। कर्ता हो तो एकवचन क्रिया: That the report failed … was surprising. दूसरा योजक नहीं: As you know, I …

Relative clauses

| After the pronoun | Use | |---|---| | a verb | who | | a new subject | whom | | a noun | whose | | a preposition before the pronoun | preposition + whom | | a thing | which / that || सर्वनाम के बाद | प्रयोग | |---|---| | क्रिया | who | | नया कर्ता | whom | | संज्ञा | whose | | सर्वनाम से पहले संबंधबोधक | संबंधबोधक + whom | | वस्तु | which / that |
Comma before the pronoun: which or who, never that. No comma: that or which. *, which* can point to the whole clause before it.सर्वनाम से पहले अल्पविराम: which या who, that कभी नहीं। अल्पविराम नहीं: that या which। *, which* पूरे पिछले उपवाक्य की ओर संकेत कर सकता है।
The clause's verb follows the antecedent: students who were, the only one who was. No repeated it / he after the clause.उपवाक्य की क्रिया पूर्वपद के अनुसार आती है: students who were, the only one who was। उपवाक्य के बाद it / he दोहराइए मत।

Adverb clauses and reduction

One clause, one connector: Although … (no but); Because … (no so). Past purpose: so that … could. Lest … should + V1. As if … was / were. Not such … as.एक उपवाक्य, एक योजक: Although … (but नहीं); Because … (so नहीं)। भूतकाल का उद्देश्य: so that … could। Lest … should + V1। As if … was / were। Not such … as।
Reduce a clause only if the subject is the same. Same time: V1 + ing. Earlier: having + V3. Passive: V3. A reduced phrase is never the main verb.उपवाक्य तभी संक्षिप्त कीजिए जब कर्ता वही हो। एक ही समय: V1 + ing। पहले: having + V3। कर्मवाच्य: V3। संक्षिप्त पदबंध कभी मुख्य क्रिया नहीं होता।

Modifiers and structure

Opening -ing phrase: the subject that follows must be the doer. A who clause stands right after its noun. Only / even / almost stand before the word they limit.आरंभिक -ing पदबंध: उसके बाद आने वाला कर्ता ही करने वाला होना चाहिए। who उपवाक्य अपनी संज्ञा के ठीक बाद आता है। Only / even / almost उसी शब्द से पहले आते हैं जिसे वे सीमित करते हैं।
Independent + dependent: 1+0 simple; 2+0 compound; 1+1 complex; 2+1 compound-complex.स्वतंत्र + आश्रित: 1+0 सरल; 2+0 संयुक्त; 1+1 मिश्र; 2+1 संयुक्त-मिश्र।

2. Tense Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

Tense tells the time and the type of an action: 3 times × 4 types = 12 tenses.काल क्रिया का समय और प्रकार बताता है: 3 समय × 4 प्रकार = 12 काल।
Present indefinite: facts, habits and timetables; after do / does the verb stays in V1.Present indefinite: तथ्य, आदतें और समय-सारणी; do / does के बाद क्रिया V1 में रहती है।
Present continuous: now, at the moment, these days, Look!; with always it shows annoyance or a fond comment.Present continuous: now, at the moment, these days, Look!; always के साथ यह चिढ़ या स्नेह भरी टिप्पणी दिखाता है।
Stative verbs (know, like, want, belong, contain) are usually not used with -ing.Stative क्रियाओं (know, like, want, belong, contain) के साथ सामान्यतः -ing नहीं आता।
Present perfect is has / have + V3: a past action with a present result.Present perfect है has / have + V3: भूतकाल की क्रिया जिसका परिणाम वर्तमान में है।
The present perfect never sits with a finished time word (yesterday, last year, ago, in 2019).Present perfect कभी बीते निश्चित समय-शब्द (yesterday, last year, ago, in 2019) के साथ उचित नहीं है।
Yet is for negatives and questions; have yet to + V1 means "still to be done".Yet निषेध और प्रश्नों के लिए है; have yet to + V1 का अर्थ "अभी करना बाकी है"।
Since takes a point of time, for takes a period of time; since last, but for the last.Since के साथ समय-बिंदु, for के साथ अवधि; since last, लेकिन for the last।
With since + point of time use a perfect tense: has / have been + -ing (or has / have + V3 for a stative verb).Since + समय-बिंदु के साथ perfect काल आता है: has / have been + -ing (stative क्रिया के लिए has / have + V3)।
With how many / how much or a stative verb, use the present perfect, not the perfect continuous.How many / how much या stative क्रिया हो तो present perfect लगाएँ, perfect continuous नहीं।
Ago always takes the past indefinite.Ago के साथ हमेशा past indefinite।
Past continuous is the background; the interrupting action takes the past indefinite.Past continuous पृष्ठभूमि है; बीच में आने वाली क्रिया में past indefinite।
Past perfect (had + V3) shows an earlier event seen from a past reference point.Past perfect (had + V3) किसी भूतकाल के संदर्भ-बिंदु से देखी गई पहले की घटना बताता है।
Hardly / scarcely go with when; no sooner goes with than.Hardly / scarcely के साथ when; no sooner के साथ than।
After when, if, until, before, after, a time or condition clause takes no will: the present indefinite shows the future.when, if, until, before, after के बाद समय या शर्त वाले उपवाक्य में will नहीं आता: भविष्य present indefinite से दिखता है।
It is high time + V2; first time + present perfect; by the time + present gives will have + V3.It is high time + V2; first time + present perfect; by the time + वर्तमान के साथ will have + V3।

The twelve tenses: structures

Present Indefinite: Sub + V1 / V1+s/es. Negative: do/does + not + V1. ✔ Radhika studies in Indore.Present Indefinite (सामान्य वर्तमान काल): Sub + V1 / V1+s/es। निषेध: do/does + not + V1। ✔ Radhika studies in Indore.
Present Continuous: Sub + is/am/are + V1+ing. ✔ Yashpal is working on his science project.Present Continuous (अपूर्ण वर्तमान काल): Sub + is/am/are + V1+ing। ✔ Yashpal is working on his science project.
Present Perfect: Sub + has/have + V3. ✔ Meena has cooked food.Present Perfect (पूर्ण वर्तमान काल): Sub + has/have + V3। ✔ Meena has cooked food.
Present Perfect Continuous: Sub + has/have + been + V1+ing + since/for. ✔ I have been working here since 2010.Present Perfect Continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण वर्तमान काल): Sub + has/have + been + V1+ing + since/for। ✔ I have been working here since 2010.
Past Indefinite: Sub + V2. Negative: did + not + V1. ✔ She went to market yesterday.Past Indefinite (सामान्य भूत काल): Sub + V2। निषेध: did + not + V1। ✔ She went to market yesterday.
Past Continuous: Sub + was/were + V1+ing. ✔ She was playing cricket.Past Continuous (अपूर्ण भूत काल): Sub + was/were + V1+ing। ✔ She was playing cricket.
Past Perfect: Sub + had + V3. ✔ I realised he had bought a car.Past Perfect (पूर्ण भूत काल): Sub + had + V3। ✔ I realised he had bought a car.
Past Perfect Continuous: Sub + had + been + V1+ing + since/for. ✔ By 2020, he had been working for 10 years.Past Perfect Continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण भूत काल): Sub + had + been + V1+ing + since/for। ✔ By 2020, he had been working for 10 years.
Future Indefinite: Sub + will/shall + V1. ✔ I shall meet Radhika tomorrow.Future Indefinite (सामान्य भविष्य काल): Sub + will/shall + V1। ✔ I shall meet Radhika tomorrow.
Future Continuous: Sub + will/shall + be + V1+ing. ✔ He will be playing cricket at 9:00 am next Sunday.Future Continuous (अपूर्ण भविष्य काल): Sub + will/shall + be + V1+ing। ✔ He will be playing cricket at 9:00 am next Sunday.
Future Perfect: Sub + will/shall + have + V3. ✔ I shall have completed the work by next Sunday.Future Perfect (पूर्ण भविष्य काल): Sub + will/shall + have + V3। ✔ I shall have completed the work by next Sunday.
Future Perfect Continuous: Sub + will/shall + have + been + V1+ing. ✔ He will have been studying for 10 hours when I reach there.Future Perfect Continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण भविष्य काल): Sub + will/shall + have + been + V1+ing। ✔ He will have been studying for 10 hours when I reach there.
Questions: the first helping verb moves before the subject (Do/Does/Did, Is/Am/Are, Has/Have/Had, Will/Shall). A Wh-word goes before it. ✔ Why does she live in Delhi?प्रश्न: पहली सहायक क्रिया कर्ता से पहले आ जाती है (Do/Does/Did, Is/Am/Are, Has/Have/Had, Will/Shall)। Wh-शब्द उससे भी पहले लगता है। ✔ Why does she live in Delhi?

Present Indefinite

Pattern: Sub + V1 / V1 + s/es. I, you, we, they and plural subjects take V1 and do; he, she, it and singular subjects take V1 + s/es and does.ढाँचा: Sub + V1 / V1 + s/es। I, you, we, they और बहुवचन कर्ता के साथ V1 तथा do; he, she, it और एकवचन कर्ता के साथ V1 + s/es तथा does।
Use it for facts, universal truths, habits and regular actions, and for a fixed timetable.इसे तथ्य, सार्वभौमिक सत्य, आदतों और नियमित क्रियाओं के लिए, और तय समय-सारणी के लिए प्रयोग कीजिए।
After do / does the main verb stays in V1: no -s, no -ed. ✘ Does she lives here? ✔ Does she live here?do / does के बाद मुख्य क्रिया V1 में रहती है: न -s, न -ed। ✘ Does she lives here? ✔ Does she live here?
When who / what / which / how many is the subject, do / does is not used. ✔ Who teaches you English?जब who / what / which / how many स्वयं कर्ता हो, तब do / does नहीं लगता। ✔ Who teaches you English?
With frequency words (daily, always, never, often, seldom, every day) an ordinary action takes the present indefinite, not the continuous.बारंबारता वाले शब्दों (daily, always, never, often, seldom, every day) के साथ सामान्य क्रिया में present indefinite आता है, continuous नहीं।
Newspaper headlines and commentaries use the present indefinite. ✔ India strikes back.समाचार-पत्र की सुर्खियों और कमेंट्री में present indefinite आता है। ✔ India strikes back.
Be (is / am / are) shows nature or state. ✔ Cows are white.Be (is / am / are) स्वभाव या अवस्था दिखाती है। ✔ Cows are white.
Positive emphasis takes do / does. ✔ I do go to temple daily.सकारात्मक वाक्य में ज़ोर देने के लिए do / does लग सकता है। ✔ I do go to temple daily.

Present Continuous

Pattern: is / am / are + V1+ing. I takes am; he, she, it and singular subjects take is; you, we, they and plural subjects take are.ढाँचा: is / am / are + V1+ing। I के साथ am; he, she, it और एकवचन कर्ता के साथ is; you, we, they और बहुवचन कर्ता के साथ are।
Use it for an action that is going on at the time of speaking, or a temporary one: now, at the moment, these days, nowadays, at present, still.इसे उस क्रिया के लिए लगाएँ जो बोलते समय चल रही हो, या अस्थायी हो: now, at the moment, these days, nowadays, at present, still।
After Look! / Listen! / Sh! / Hurry up! the action is going on, so use the continuous.Look! / Listen! / Sh! / Hurry up! के बाद क्रिया चल रही होती है, इसलिए continuous लगाइए।
A slow change (getting cooler, growing older) takes the continuous.धीरे-धीरे आता बदलाव (getting cooler, growing older) continuous में आता है।
A habit usually takes the present indefinite. With always / constantly / forever, the continuous shows annoyance or a fond comment (He is always losing his keys, She is always helping others).आदत के लिए सामान्यतः present indefinite आता है। always / constantly / forever के साथ continuous चिढ़ या स्नेह भरी टिप्पणी दिखाता है (He is always losing his keys, She is always helping others)।

Stative verbs and 'be'

Stative verbs (know, like, want, need, believe, belong, contain, own, hear, seem, cost...) are usually not used in the continuous or the perfect continuous form. Many have an action meaning that does take -ing (I think you are right but I am thinking about it). In SSC exams, a pure state with -ing (I am knowing him) is the error.Stative (अवस्थावाचक) क्रियाएँ (know, like, want, need, believe, belong, contain, own, hear, seem, cost...) सामान्यतः continuous या perfect continuous रूप में प्रयुक्त नहीं होतीं। इनमें से कई का कार्य वाला अर्थ भी होता है, जो -ing लेता है (I think you are right पर I am thinking about it)। SSC परीक्षा में शुद्ध अवस्था के साथ -ing (I am knowing him) ही त्रुटि है।
Use the simple tense or the perfect instead. ✘ I am knowing him. ✔ I know him. ✔ I have known him since 2010.इनके बदले simple tense (सामान्य काल) या perfect लगाइए। ✘ I am knowing him. ✔ I know him. ✔ I have known him since 2010.
A verb with two meanings takes the continuous only in its action meaning: smell, taste, see, feel, look at, appear, consider, think, have.दो अर्थों वाली क्रिया केवल कार्य वाले अर्थ में continuous लेती है: smell, taste, see, feel, look at, appear, consider, think, have।
With an adjective of behaviour (rude, kind, silly, generous...), be in the continuous means behaving so for now (You are being rude); a time word like today is a clue, not a requirement.व्यवहार बताने वाले विशेषण (rude, kind, silly, generous...) के साथ be का continuous 'अभी ऐसा व्यवहार कर रहा है' का अर्थ देता है (You are being rude); today जैसा समय-सूचक शब्द एक संकेत है, अनिवार्य शर्त नहीं।
Mental state (no -ing): know, realise, understand, recognise, believe, suppose, imagine, doubt, remember, forget, want, need, desire, mean.मानसिक अवस्था (-ing नहीं): know, realise, understand, recognise, believe, suppose, imagine, doubt, remember, forget, want, need, desire, mean।
Emotional state (no -ing): love, like, mind, care, surprise, appreciate, please, prefer, hate, dislike, fear, astonish, amaze, envy.भावनात्मक अवस्था (-ing नहीं): love, like, mind, care, surprise, appreciate, please, prefer, hate, dislike, fear, astonish, amaze, envy।
Possession (no -ing): possess, have, own, belong, comprise, contain, consist, include, exclude.स्वामित्व (-ing नहीं): possess, have, own, belong, comprise, contain, consist, include, exclude।
Sense / perception and other states (no -ing): taste, smell, hear, feel, see, notice; seem, look, appear, sound, resemble, cost, owe, weigh, equal, be, exist, matter.इंद्रिय-बोध और अन्य अवस्थाएँ (-ing नहीं): taste, smell, hear, feel, see, notice; seem, look, appear, sound, resemble, cost, owe, weigh, equal, be, exist, matter।

Present Perfect

Pattern: has / have + V3. He, she, it and singular subjects take has; I, you, we, they and plural subjects take have.ढाँचा: has / have + V3। He, she, it और एकवचन कर्ता के साथ has; I, you, we, they और बहुवचन कर्ता के साथ have।
Words that join past to present take it: recently, till now, yet, so far, of late, lately, ever, just, already, never ... before.भूत को वर्तमान से जोड़ने वाले शब्द इसे लेते हैं: recently, till now, yet, so far, of late, lately, ever, just, already, never ... before।
A past action with a present effect (a bought car, a visited place) takes the present perfect.जिस भूतकाल की क्रिया का वर्तमान में असर हो (खरीदी हुई कार, देखी हुई जगह), उसमें present perfect लगता है।
Yet is for negative and question sentences. In a positive sentence use already or so far. ✘ He has not still returned. ✔ He has not returned yet.Yet निषेध और प्रश्न वाले वाक्यों के लिए है। सकारात्मक वाक्य में already या so far लगाइए। ✘ He has not still returned. ✔ He has not returned yet.
have / has yet to + V1 (or am / is / are yet to) means "still to be done".have / has yet to + V1 (या am / is / are yet to) का अर्थ है "अभी करना बाकी है"।
Since / for can be added to the present perfect. ✔ I have worked here since 2014. ✔ I have worked here for ten years.Present perfect में आवश्यकता के अनुसार since / for लग सकता है। ✔ I have worked here since 2014. ✔ I have worked here for ten years.

Present Perfect or Past Indefinite

A named past time (yesterday, last year, ago, in 1990, at 3 o'clock, when?) takes only the past indefinite.भूत का बताया गया समय (yesterday, last year, ago, in 1990, at 3 o'clock, when?) केवल past indefinite लेता है।
When the time is not named and the result or experience matters, use the present perfect.जब समय नहीं बताया गया हो और परिणाम या अनुभव मायने रखता हो, तब present perfect लगाइए।
Ago always takes the past indefinite, never the past perfect or the present perfect.Ago के साथ हमेशा past indefinite आता है, past perfect या present perfect कभी नहीं।
With today / this morning / this year: the period is still on = present perfect; the period is over = past indefinite.today / this morning / this year के साथ: अवधि चल रही है = present perfect; अवधि समाप्त = past indefinite।

Present Perfect Continuous, since and for

Pattern: has / have + been + V1+ing with since / for.ढाँचा: has / have + been + V1+ing, साथ में since / for।
Since + point of time (Monday, 2 pm, 2021, morning, childhood). For + period of time (2 hours, 6 months, 5 years).Since + समय-बिंदु (Monday, 2 pm, 2021, morning, childhood)। For + अवधि (2 hours, 6 months, 5 years)।
Since last + time word, but for the last + time word. ✔ since last week ✔ for the last week ✘ since last 10 yearsSince last + समय-शब्द, लेकिन for the last + समय-शब्द। ✔ since last week ✔ for the last week ✘ since last 10 years
A since clause is in the past indefinite; the main clause is in the present perfect (continuous). ✔ He has been working here since I arrived.Since वाला उपवाक्य past indefinite में होता है; मुख्य उपवाक्य present perfect (continuous) में। ✔ He has been working here since I arrived.
Not sits between has / have and been. Since + starting point and for + duration are used with perfect tenses; for also appears with other tenses (I worked there for two years, I am staying for a week).Not, has / have और been के बीच आता है। Since + आरंभ-बिंदु और for + अवधि perfect कालों के साथ प्रयुक्त होते हैं; for दूसरे कालों के साथ भी आता है (I worked there for two years, I am staying for a week)।

Perfect or Perfect Continuous

Stative verb + since / for = present perfect (not the continuous). ✔ I have known her since 2010.Stative क्रिया + since / for = present perfect (continuous नहीं)। ✔ I have known her since 2010.
When how many / how much is stated, use the present perfect. ✔ I have written 5 letters since morning.जब how many / how much बताया गया हो, तब present perfect लगाइए। ✔ I have written 5 letters since morning.
Since + point of time goes with a perfect tense: the perfect continuous for an ongoing action, the simple perfect for a stative verb or a counted amount. With live, work, wait, study the two forms overlap in real English (I have waited since morning is also correct); in SSC questions the continuous is the expected answer when both are not offered together. For goes with both. ✔ I have been waiting since morning. ✔ I have waited for two hours.Since + समय-बिंदु के साथ perfect काल आता है: चलती हुई क्रिया के लिए perfect continuous, stative क्रिया या गिनी हुई मात्रा के लिए simple perfect। live, work, wait, study के साथ वास्तविक अंग्रेज़ी में दोनों रूप चलते हैं (I have waited since morning भी सही है); SSC प्रश्नों में जब दोनों रूप साथ-साथ विकल्पों में न हों, तब continuous ही अपेक्षित उत्तर होता है। For के साथ दोनों आते हैं। ✔ I have been waiting since morning. ✔ I have waited for two hours.
With for: perfect = focus on the completed duration; perfect continuous = focus on continuity.For के साथ: perfect = पूरी अवधि पर ज़ोर; perfect continuous = निरंतरता पर ज़ोर।

Past Indefinite

Pattern: Sub + V2. In negatives and questions: did + V1. ✘ She did not attended. ✔ She did not attend.ढाँचा: Sub + V2। निषेध और प्रश्न में: did + V1। ✘ She did not attended. ✔ She did not attend.
A past time word or a past reference (yesterday, last year, ago, in 1990, historical events, old beliefs) calls for the past indefinite.भूतकाल का समय-शब्द या संदर्भ (yesterday, last year, ago, in 1990, ऐतिहासिक घटनाएँ, पुरानी मान्यताएँ) हो तो past indefinite।
A completed repeated action of the past takes the past indefinite (I swam every day). A repeated action seen as temporary or in progress during a period can take the past continuous (That summer I was swimming every day).भूतकाल की पूरी हो चुकी बार-बार होने वाली क्रिया में past indefinite आता है (I swam every day)। किसी अवधि में अस्थायी या चलती हुई दिखाई गई बार-बार होने वाली क्रिया में past continuous (अपूर्ण भूत काल) आ सकता है (That summer I was swimming every day)।
An old habit that has stopped: used to + V1. In questions and negatives: use to. Used to and would are alternatives; would is for actions only, not states.बंद हो चुकी पुरानी आदत: used to + V1। प्रश्न और निषेध में: use to। Used to और would एक-दूसरे के विकल्प हैं; would केवल कार्यों के लिए है, अवस्थाओं के लिए नहीं।
Not needs a helping verb: did not, never not alone.Not को सहायक क्रिया चाहिए: did not, अकेला not कभी नहीं।

Past Continuous

Pattern: was / were + V1+ing. I, he, she, it and singular subjects take was; you, we, they and plural subjects take were.ढाँचा: was / were + V1+ing। I, he, she, it और एकवचन कर्ता के साथ was; you, we, they और बहुवचन कर्ता के साथ were।
The background (long) action takes the past continuous; the interrupting (short) action takes the past indefinite. ✔ I was watching T.V. when you called.पृष्ठभूमि की (लंबी) क्रिया में past continuous और बीच में आने वाली (छोटी) क्रिया में past indefinite आता है। ✔ I was watching T.V. when you called.
Two long actions together: both in the past continuous, joined by while or as.दो लंबी क्रियाएँ साथ-साथ: दोनों past continuous में, while या as से जुड़ी।
A stative verb takes the past indefinite (liked, had, wanted), never was liking.Stative क्रिया में past indefinite आता है (liked, had, wanted), was liking कभी नहीं।
A repeated past action takes the past indefinite. Since is never used with the past continuous; use the past perfect continuous (had been working since 2010).भूतकाल की बार-बार होने वाली क्रिया में past indefinite आता है। Since past continuous के साथ नहीं आता; past perfect continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण भूत काल) लगाएँ (had been working since 2010)।

Past Perfect and Past Perfect Continuous

Past Perfect: had + V3 when an earlier event is seen from a past reference point.Past Perfect: had + V3 जब किसी भूतकाल के संदर्भ-बिंदु से देखकर कोई पहले की घटना बताई जाए।
Past Perfect Continuous: had been + V1+ing for an action that went on for some time up to a past point.Past Perfect Continuous: भूतकाल के बिंदु तक कुछ समय से चल रही क्रिया के लिए had been + V1+ing।
A single past action takes the past indefinite, unless a time adverb (by the end of, already, by + time) gives a second reference.अकेली भूतकाल की क्रिया में past indefinite आता है, जब तक कोई समय-क्रिया-विशेषण (by the end of, already, by + time) दूसरा संदर्भ न दे।
A past reference with since / for + time calls for the past perfect (or the past perfect continuous), not the past indefinite.भूतकाल के संदर्भ के साथ since / for + समय हो तो past perfect (या past perfect continuous) आता है, past indefinite नहीं।
Unreal past (I wish..., If only...) takes had + V3 for the past.काल्पनिक भूतकाल (I wish..., If only...) में भूत के लिए had + V3 आता है।

Two past actions

One after another: Past Indefinite + Past Indefinite. One clearly finished first: Past Perfect + Past Indefinite.एक के बाद एक: Past Indefinite + Past Indefinite। एक स्पष्ट रूप से पहले समाप्त: Past Perfect + Past Indefinite।
Background action + interruption: Past Continuous + Past Indefinite. Both long and together: Past Continuous + Past Continuous.पृष्ठभूमि की क्रिया + बाधा: Past Continuous + Past Indefinite। दोनों लंबी और साथ-साथ: Past Continuous + Past Continuous।
After + Past Perfect clause with a Past Indefinite main clause; Past Perfect + before + Past Indefinite.After के साथ Past Perfect वाला उपवाक्य और Past Indefinite मुख्य उपवाक्य; Past Perfect + before + Past Indefinite।
Ago goes with the Past Indefinite. After just after / as soon as both verbs are normally Past Indefinite (As soon as she finished, she left). With after / before, either is correct (After she finished, she left / After she had finished, she left).Ago के साथ Past Indefinite आता है। just after / as soon as के बाद दोनों क्रियाएँ सामान्यतः Past Indefinite में रहती हैं (As soon as she finished, she left)। after / before के साथ दोनों रूप सही हैं (After she finished, she left / After she had finished, she left)।
Hardly / Scarcely + had + sub + V3 … when + V2; No sooner + had + sub + V3 … than + V2.Hardly / Scarcely + had + sub + V3 … when + V2; No sooner + had + sub + V3 … than + V2।

Future tenses and ways to talk about the future

Future Indefinite: will / shall + V1. Future Continuous: will / shall + be + V1+ing.Future Indefinite (सामान्य भविष्य काल): will / shall + V1। Future Continuous (अपूर्ण भविष्य काल): will / shall + be + V1+ing।
Future Perfect: will / shall + have + V3 (by, by the time, by tomorrow). Future Perfect Continuous: will / shall + have been + V1+ing (in exam sentences with for + duration, e.g. for ten years).Future Perfect (पूर्ण भविष्य काल): will / shall + have + V3 (by, by the time, by tomorrow)। Future Perfect Continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण भविष्य काल): will / shall + have been + V1+ing (परीक्षा-वाक्यों में for + अवधि के साथ, जैसे for ten years)।
Will = a decision made while speaking, a promise, or a plain prediction. Be going to = an earlier plan, or a prediction from evidence we can see now.Will = बोलते समय लिया गया निर्णय, वादा, या सीधी भविष्यवाणी। Be going to = पहले की योजना, या अभी दिखते प्रमाण से भविष्यवाणी।
Present continuous = a personal arrangement already made. Not for natural events, permanent future situations, or the verb be.Present continuous = पहले से किया हुआ निजी इंतज़ाम। प्राकृतिक घटनाओं, स्थायी भविष्य की स्थितियों या क्रिया be के लिए नहीं।
Present indefinite = a timetable or official schedule (leaves, starts, arrives).Present indefinite = समय-सारणी या आधिकारिक कार्यक्रम (leaves, starts, arrives)।
A modal is always followed by V1. A past reference never takes will.Modal (रूपात्मक क्रिया) के बाद हमेशा V1 आती है। भूतकाल के संदर्भ के साथ will कभी नहीं आता।

Time and condition clauses, sequence of tenses

After when, as soon as, as long as, after, before, until / till, by the time, whenever, if, unless, in case the clause takes the present indefinite for the future, never will / shall / would. ✘ I will see you if I will have time. ✔ I will see you if I have time.when, as soon as, as long as, after, before, until / till, by the time, whenever, if, unless, in case के बाद वाले उपवाक्य में भविष्य के लिए present indefinite आता है, will / shall / would कभी नहीं। ✘ I will see you if I will have time. ✔ I will see you if I have time.
The main clause of such a sentence can have will.ऐसे वाक्य के मुख्य उपवाक्य में will आ सकता है।
A main clause in the present can take will in the clause beside it. ✔ It is interesting to see who will win.मुख्य उपवाक्य वर्तमान में हो तो साथ वाले उपवाक्य में will आ सकता है। ✔ It is interesting to see who will win.
If or when in a noun clause (after know, ask, wonder) can take will. ✔ I don't know when he will come.संज्ञा उपवाक्य में आने वाले if या when (know, ask, wonder के बाद) के साथ will आ सकता है। ✔ I don't know when he will come.
If with will is also correct when it means willingness (If you will wait here, I will ask the manager). SSC time-clause questions test the ordinary future meaning, so keep if + present there.If के साथ will तब भी सही है जब वह इच्छा या तत्परता का अर्थ दे (If you will wait here, I will ask the manager)। SSC के समय-उपवाक्य वाले प्रश्न सामान्य भविष्य का अर्थ परखते हैं, इसलिए वहाँ if + present ही रखिए।
A past main verb pulls the other verbs into the past; a universal truth stays in the present.भूतकाल की मुख्य क्रिया बाकी क्रियाओं को भूतकाल में खींच लेती है; सार्वभौमिक सत्य वर्तमान में ही रहता है।

Special structures

It is (high / about) time + sub + V2 ✔ It is high time you went home.
This / it / that + is / will be + the first / second / only + time + Present Perfect ✔ This will be the first time I have scolded Radhika.
This / it / that + was + the first / second / only + time + Past Perfect ✔ That was the only time she had called me.
Sub + had + V3 … by the time + sub + V2 (past fact).Sub + had + V3 … by the time + sub + V2 (भूतकाल का तथ्य)।
Sub + will have + V3 … by the time + sub + V1 (future possibility).Sub + will have + V3 … by the time + sub + V1 (भविष्य की संभावना)।

3. Verbs Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A verb is the word that tells what the subject does, is or has; no verb, no sentence.क्रिया (Verb) वह शब्द है जो बताता है कि कर्ता क्या करता है, क्या है या क्या रखता है; क्रिया नहीं तो वाक्य नहीं।
Have + V3 is a helping verb; have + noun is the main verb.Have + V3 सहायक क्रिया है; have + संज्ञा मुख्य क्रिया है।
Stative verbs (know, like, own, resemble, belong) never take the continuous form.भावबोधक क्रियाएँ (Stative verbs) (know, like, own, resemble, belong) कभी continuous रूप में नहीं आतीं।
After did, to and a modal, the verb is always V1.did, to और modal के बाद क्रिया सदैव V1 होती है।
Learn the irregular forms in groups: lose–lost, shut–shut, swing–swung, run–ran–run.अनियमित रूप समूहों में याद कीजिए: lose–lost, shut–shut, swing–swung, run–ran–run।
An intransitive verb has no object; arrive, emerge, happen are never passive.अकर्मक (Intransitive) क्रिया का कर्म नहीं होता; arrive, emerge, happen कभी passive (कर्मवाच्य) नहीं बनतीं।
Discuss, resemble, marry, enter, reach usually take the object directly; read the sense before adding a preposition.Discuss, resemble, marry, enter, reach के बाद आमतौर पर कर्म सीधे आता है; पूर्वसर्ग लगाने से पहले अर्थ पढ़िए।
Tell / say / ask / offer / call: know which one takes an indirect object and which takes a preposition or a complement.Tell / say / ask / offer / call: पहचानिए कि किसके साथ अप्रत्यक्ष कर्म आता है और किसके साथ पूर्वसर्ग या पूरक।
After a linking verb use an adjective, not an adverb: the soup tastes good.योजक क्रिया (Linking verb) के बाद विशेषण आता है, क्रिया-विशेषण नहीं: the soup tastes good।
Make / let / have + object + V1; get + object + to V1; passive of make takes to.Make / let / have + कर्म + V1; get + कर्म + to V1; make के कर्मवाच्य में to आता है।
Rise, lie, fall, arise, sit have no object; raise, lay, fell, arouse, set need one.Rise, lie, fall, arise, sit का कर्म नहीं होता; raise, lay, fell, arouse, set को कर्म चाहिए।
Hanged for a person, hung for a thing; founded for an institution, found for discovery.Hanged मनुष्य के लिए, hung वस्तु के लिए; founded संस्था के लिए, found खोजने के लिए।
Affect = influence, effect = result; hear takes no to, listen takes to; sink is a ship, drown is a person.Affect = प्रभाव, effect = परिणाम; hear के साथ to नहीं, listen के साथ to; sink जहाज़, drown मनुष्य।
Deny + V-ing, refuse + to V1; molten, laden, shorn are the adjective forms of melt, load, shear.Deny + V-ing, refuse + to V1; molten, laden, shorn क्रमशः melt, load, shear के विशेषण रूप हैं।

Kinds of verbs and the be, do, have family

A verb shows doing, happening or a state.क्रिया करना, होना या अवस्था दिखाती है।
Finite verb = the verb works as a helping verb or a main verb and changes with the subject and the tense.सीमित क्रिया (Finite verb) = वह क्रिया जो सहायक या मुख्य क्रिया का काम करे और कर्ता व काल के साथ बदले।
Non-finite verb (to + V1, V1+ing, V3) works as a noun, adjective or adverb and never as the main verb.असीमित क्रिया (to + V1, V1+ing, V3) संज्ञा, विशेषण या क्रिया-विशेषण का काम करती है, मुख्य क्रिया का कभी नहीं।
Helping verb = be, do, have and the modals. It needs another verb beside it. A verb standing alone is the main verb.सहायक क्रिया = be, do, have और modals (रूपात्मक क्रिया)। इसे साथ में दूसरी क्रिया चाहिए। जो क्रिया अकेली खड़ी हो, वह मुख्य क्रिया है।
One subject, one finite verb phrase. A clause with no finite verb, or with two finite verbs side by side for one subject (Pushpa is knows), is wrong. Two verbs joined by and are fine when each has its own form (She sings and dances).एक कर्ता, एक सीमित क्रिया-पद (finite verb phrase)। जिस उपवाक्य में सीमित क्रिया न हो, या एक कर्ता के साथ दो सीमित क्रियाएँ साथ-साथ हों (Pushpa is knows), वह गलत है। and से जुड़ी दो क्रियाएँ ठीक हैं, यदि हर एक का अपना सही रूप हो (She sings and dances)।
Helping be + V1+ing = continuous (active). Helping be + V3 = passive.सहायक be + V1+ing = continuous (कर्तृवाच्य)। सहायक be + V3 = कर्मवाच्य।
Main verb be takes a complement (linking) or an adverb of place (intransitive). A be verb is never followed by V1 or V2. ✘ They were went to school. ✔ They were going to school.मुख्य क्रिया be के बाद पूरक (योजक) या स्थान-सूचक क्रिया-विशेषण (अकर्मक) आता है। Be क्रिया के बाद V1 या V2 कभी नहीं आती। ✘ They were went to school. ✔ They were going to school.
Helping do / does / did + V1. ✘ She doesn't plays the piano. ✔ She doesn't play the piano.सहायक do / does / did + V1। ✘ She doesn't plays the piano. ✔ She doesn't play the piano.
Main verb do takes an object: do my duty. Doing and done are always main verbs.मुख्य क्रिया do के बाद कर्म आता है: do my duty। Doing और done हमेशा मुख्य क्रियाएँ होती हैं।
Helping have / has / had + V3 (perfect tense). Main verb have is followed by a noun or a pronoun.सहायक have / has / had + V3 (perfect काल)। मुख्य क्रिया have के बाद संज्ञा या सर्वनाम आता है।
Have in the sense of possession is not used in the continuous. Have with activities (have lunch, have a bath, have a baby) can be.Have का अर्थ स्वामित्व हो तो continuous में नहीं लिखते। गतिविधि वाली have (have lunch, have a bath, have a baby) continuous में आ सकती है।
A verb of state (mind, feeling, possession, appearance) is not used in the continuous.अवस्था बताने वाली क्रिया (मन, भावना, स्वामित्व, रूप) continuous में नहीं आती।
This holds for the perfect continuous too: no been knowing, been owning.यह perfect continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण) पर भी लागू होता है: been knowing, been owning नहीं।
The same verb can have an action meaning (have lunch, taste the soup, look at the picture). In that meaning the continuous is allowed.वही क्रिया कार्य के अर्थ में भी आ सकती है (have lunch, taste the soup, look at the picture)। उस अर्थ में continuous चलता है।

Verb forms

With no helping verb, a finished past action takes V2. After has / have / had and after be in the passive, use V3.सहायक क्रिया के बिना भूतकाल की पूरी हुई क्रिया में V2 आती है। has / have / had के बाद और कर्मवाच्य में be के बाद V3 लगाइए।
Learn irregular verbs by family: i–a–u; V2 = V3; -t endings; V3 ends in -n; all three same; V1 = V3.अनियमित क्रियाओं को परिवार से सीखें: i–a–u; V2 = V3; -t अंत; V3 में -n; तीनों समान; V1 = V3।
Group 5 (put, cut, hit, hurt, let, set, shut, cost, cast, read, broadcast …) has the same form in V1, V2 and V3. ✔ cost, shut, broadcast In SSC exams *-ed* on these verbs is the error (shuted, putted). Costed is used only for 'calculated the cost of' (The project was costed at ₹5 crore); broadcasted is recorded by some dictionaries as a variant but broadcast is the standard form and the one SSC keys.Group 5 (put, cut, hit, hurt, let, set, shut, cost, cast, read, broadcast …) में V1, V2 और V3 का रूप एक ही रहता है। ✔ cost, shut, broadcast SSC परीक्षा में इन क्रियाओं पर *-ed* जोड़ना त्रुटि है (shuted, putted)। Costed केवल 'लागत निकालना' के अर्थ में आता है (The project was costed at ₹5 crore); broadcasted को कुछ शब्दकोश variant के रूप में दर्ज करते हैं, पर broadcast ही मानक रूप है और SSC उसी को key करता है।
Lose – lost – lost; swing – swung – swung; run – ran – run. Losed, swinged, runned do not exist.Lose – lost – lost; swing – swung – swung; run – ran – run। Losed, swinged, runned जैसे शब्द होते ही नहीं।

Transitive and intransitive verbs

Transitive verb = takes an object (answer to what? / whom?) and can usually be made passive (a few, such as resemble and have meaning possess, do not). Intransitive verb = no object, no passive.सकर्मक क्रिया (Transitive verb) = कर्म लेती है (what? / whom? का उत्तर) और आमतौर पर इसका कर्मवाच्य बन सकता है (कुछ क्रियाओं, जैसे resemble और स्वामित्व अर्थ वाली have, का नहीं बनता)। अकर्मक क्रिया (Intransitive verb) = कर्म नहीं, कर्मवाच्य नहीं।
Never use be + V3 with an intransitive verb. ✘ He will be arrived. ✔ He will arrive.अकर्मक क्रिया के साथ be + V3 कभी प्रयोग नहीं करते। ✘ He will be arrived. ✔ He will arrive.
A transitive verb needs an object. If the doer is the receiver too, use a reflexive pronoun. ✔ We enjoyed ourselves at the party. Some transitive verbs can drop an obvious object (She is eating); the exam does not treat that as an error.सकर्मक क्रिया को कर्म चाहिए। अगर करने वाला ही पाने वाला हो, तो आत्मवाचक सर्वनाम लगाइए। ✔ We enjoyed ourselves at the party. कुछ सकर्मक क्रियाओं का स्पष्ट कर्म छूट सकता है (She is eating); परीक्षा इसे त्रुटि नहीं मानती।
Ergative verbs (sell, boil, hide, burn, start, stop, open, close, fly, turn, cook, melt, break, grow, change, spread, prove, run) work both ways; the meaning decides.उभयनिष्ठ क्रियाएँ (sell, boil, hide, burn, start, stop, open, close, fly, turn, cook, melt, break, grow, change, spread, prove, run) दोनों तरह चलती हैं; अर्थ तय करता है।
A passive describes an action done to the subject by someone. A state (laden with mangoes) is not a passive.कर्मवाच्य उस क्रिया को बताता है जो कर्ता पर किसी ने की। अवस्था (laden with mangoes) कर्मवाच्य नहीं होती।
A transitive verb takes its object directly. No preposition or adverb between the verb and the object.सकर्मक क्रिया अपना कर्म सीधे लेती है। क्रिया और कर्म के बीच पूर्वसर्ग या क्रिया-विशेषण नहीं आता।
In their usual exam senses these verbs take the object directly: reach, enter, discuss, describe, demand, order, attack, approach, resemble, comprise, await, join, tell, inform, assist, investigate, resist, emphasize, stress, affect, control, blame, lack, trust, face, help, board, fear, overcome, recommend, direct, sign, pass, qualify (discuss the issue, reach Delhi, enter the room). A few have other patterns in other senses (inform someone of something, help with the work, qualify for a post, enter into an agreement), so read the sense.इन क्रियाओं के परीक्षा में प्रचलित अर्थों में कर्म सीधे आता है: reach, enter, discuss, describe, demand, order, attack, approach, resemble, comprise, await, join, tell, inform, assist, investigate, resist, emphasize, stress, affect, control, blame, lack, trust, face, help, board, fear, overcome, recommend, direct, sign, pass, qualify (discuss the issue, reach Delhi, enter the room)। कुछ क्रियाओं के दूसरे अर्थों में दूसरे पैटर्न भी हैं (inform someone of something, help with the work, qualify for a post, enter into an agreement), इसलिए अर्थ पढ़कर तय कीजिए।
The noun form of the same word may take the preposition: an attack on, a demand for, an order for, a lack of.उसी शब्द का संज्ञा रूप पूर्वसर्ग ले सकता है: an attack on, a demand for, an order for, a lack of।
Marry: no preposition in the active, always to in the passive. ✔ Ram married Sita. ✔ Ram was married to Sita.Marry: कर्तृवाच्य में कोई पूर्वसर्ग नहीं, कर्मवाच्य में हमेशा to। ✔ Ram married Sita. ✔ Ram was married to Sita.
Comprise of is wrong; use consist of or plain comprise.Comprise of गलत है; consist of अथवा सादी comprise का प्रयोग कीजिए।
Di-transitive: Sub + verb + sb + sth. With the thing first: sth + to / for + sb. ✔ He gave me a purse. ✔ He gave a purse to me.द्विकर्मक: Sub + क्रिया + sb + sth। वस्तु पहले हो तो: sth + to / for + sb। ✔ He gave me a purse. ✔ He gave a purse to me.
When the person comes first, no preposition is put before him: offer / tell / ask sb.व्यक्ति पहले आए तो उससे पहले कोई पूर्वसर्ग नहीं लगता: offer / tell / ask sb।
Tell takes a person directly; say does not (say it to sb).Tell व्यक्ति को सीधे लेती है; say नहीं लेती (say it to sb)।
Complex transitive (name, make, elect, consider, think, call, nominate, declare): verb + object + complement, no as. Appoint, select and choose can be used either way: appointed her coordinator or appointed her as coordinator (both correct).जटिल सकर्मक (Complex transitive) (name, make, elect, consider, think, call, nominate, declare): क्रिया + कर्म + पूरक, as नहीं। Appoint, select और choose दोनों तरह आ सकती हैं: appointed her coordinator या appointed her as coordinator (दोनों सही)।
Portray, depict, mention, regard, describe, know, define, treat, view take as before the complement.Portray, depict, mention, regard, describe, know, define, treat, view में पूरक से पहले as लगता है।
A linking verb joins the subject to a complement (subject = complement). It has no passive. ✘ She was appeared surprised. ✔ She appeared surprised.योजक क्रिया कर्ता को पूरक से जोड़ती है (कर्ता = पूरक)। इसका कर्मवाच्य नहीं होता। ✘ She was appeared surprised. ✔ She appeared surprised.
After a linking verb use an adjective, not an adverb. ✘ He looked angrily. ✔ He looked angry.योजक क्रिया के बाद विशेषण लगता है, क्रिया-विशेषण नहीं। ✘ He looked angrily. ✔ He looked angry.
Seem / appear + a- adjective (asleep, alive, alone, awake): the usual and safer form is to be (He seemed to be asleep); He seemed asleep also occurs, but in SSC exams choose the to be version.Seem / appear + a- विशेषण (asleep, alive, alone, awake): सामान्य और अधिक सुरक्षित रूप to be वाला है (He seemed to be asleep); He seemed asleep भी मिलता है, पर SSC परीक्षा में to be वाला रूप चुनिए।
Grow / get = gradual change; turn = sudden change; go = sudden, undesirable or behaviour change (went blind, went bad); come = result.Grow / get = धीरे-धीरे परिवर्तन; turn = अचानक परिवर्तन; go = अचानक, अवांछित या व्यवहार का परिवर्तन (went blind, went bad); come = परिणाम।
After be the formal pattern is the subject case (It is I, It was he); It is me is normal in speech and is not an error in everyday English. In SSC exams prefer the subject case.be के बाद औपचारिक पैटर्न कर्ता-कारक है (It is I, It was he); It is me बोलचाल में सामान्य है और रोज़मर्रा की अंग्रेज़ी में त्रुटि नहीं है। SSC परीक्षा में कर्ता-कारक को प्राथमिकता दो।

Causative verbs

Make / have / let + object + V1 (no to). ✘ Radhika made her sister to do her work. ✔ Radhika made her sister do her work.Make / have / let + कर्म + V1 (to नहीं)। ✘ Radhika made her sister to do her work. ✔ Radhika made her sister do her work.
Get + object + to + V1 (active). Only get keeps to.Get + कर्म + to + V1 (कर्तृवाच्य)। केवल get के साथ to रहता है।
Passive causative: have / get + object + V3. The object is acted on. ✔ I must get my car washed.कर्मवाच्य प्रेरणार्थक: have / get + कर्म + V3। कर्म पर कार्य होता है। ✔ I must get my car washed.
Passive of make: be made + to + V1. ✔ The boy was made to work hard.Make का कर्मवाच्य: be made + to + V1। ✔ The boy was made to work hard.
Make meaning create is not causative; it takes a purpose to + V1. ✔ Radhika made a request to join the club.Make का अर्थ बनाना हो तो वह प्रेरणार्थक नहीं है; उसके साथ उद्देश्य वाला to + V1 आता है। ✔ Radhika made a request to join the club.

Look-alike and confusing verbs

Object after the verb → transitive twin (raise, lay, fell, arouse, set). No object → intransitive twin (rise, lie, fall, arise, sit).क्रिया के बाद कर्म → सकर्मक जुड़वाँ (raise, lay, fell, arouse, set)। कर्म नहीं → अकर्मक जुड़वाँ (rise, lie, fall, arise, sit)।
Passive (be + V3, a by-phrase) uses only the transitive twin: is raised, was laid, was felled, was aroused.कर्मवाच्य (be + V3, by वाला वाक्यांश) में केवल सकर्मक जुड़वाँ आती है: is raised, was laid, was felled, was aroused।
rise rose risen rising · raise raised raised raising · fall fell fallen falling · fell felled felled felling · arise arose arisen arising · arouse aroused aroused arousing
lie (rest) lay lain lying · lay (put) laid laid laying · lie (untruth) lied lied lyinglie (लेटना): lay lain lying · lay (रखना): laid laid laying · lie (झूठ बोलना): lied lied lying
sit sat sat sitting · set set set setting
Intransitive twins (rise, lie, fall, arise): own V2 and a V3 ending in -n; sit is the exception (sat, sat). Transitive twins: -ed in V2 and V3.अकर्मक जुड़वाँ (rise, lie, fall, arise): अपनी V2 और -n पर समाप्त होने वाली V3; sit अपवाद है (sat, sat)। सकर्मक जुड़वाँ: V2 और V3 में -ed।
Hanged = a person put to death; hung = anything suspended.Hanged = व्यक्ति को फाँसी; hung = कोई भी लटकाई गई वस्तु।
find – found – found (discover) · found – founded – founded (establish).find – found – found (खोजना) तथा found – founded – founded (स्थापित करना)।
Born = birth (be born). Borne = carried or tolerated (borne by). She has borne three children (active, she gave birth) but She was born in Delhi.Born = जन्म (be born)। Borne = उठाया या सहा गया (borne by)। She has borne three children (कर्तृवाच्य, उसने बच्चों को जन्म दिया) पर She was born in Delhi।
sow – sowed – sown · saw – sawed – sawn · fly – flew – flown · flow – flowed – flowed.sow: sowed – sown · saw: sawed – sawn · fly: flew – flown · flow: flowed – flowed।
leave – left – left (go away from, transitive) · live – lived – lived (reside, intransitive).leave – left – left (छोड़ना, सकर्मक) · live – lived – lived (रहना, अकर्मक)।
strike – struck (hit, go on strike) · stroke – stroked (touch gently) · grind – ground · rend – rent · rent – rented.strike – struck (प्रहार, हड़ताल) तथा stroke – stroked (धीरे से छूना) · grind – ground · rend – rent · rent – rented।
Affect (verb) = influence; effect (noun) = result. Effected means brought about.Affect (क्रिया) = प्रभाव डालना; effect (संज्ञा) = परिणाम। Effected का अर्थ है लाया गया।
Hear takes its object directly (hear the news); listen takes to (listen to music). Listen! can stand alone, and hear from / about / of are valid.Hear के बाद कर्म सीधे आता है (hear the news); listen के साथ to आता है (listen to music)। Listen! अकेला भी आ सकता है, और hear from / about / of भी सही हैं।
Deny + V-ing (it did not happen); refuse + to + V1 (I will not do it).Deny + V-ing (कार्य हुआ ही नहीं); refuse + to + V1 (कार्य करने से मना करना)।
Sink = go under; drown = die in water. A ship sinks, a person drowns.Sink = नीचे जाना; drown = पानी में मरना। जहाज़ sink होता है, मनुष्य drown होता है।
A state takes the adjective form (molten, laden, shorn); an action takes the passive V3.अवस्था के लिए विशेषण रूप (molten, laden, shorn); कार्य के लिए passive (कर्मवाच्य) V3।

4. Modals Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A modal is always followed by V1: no -s, -ed, -ing, no to (except ought to, used to, have to).Modal के बाद हमेशा V1: न -s, न -ed, न -ing, न to (ought to, used to, have to को छोड़कर)।
Modal + be + V-ing = going on now. Modal + have + V3 = the past. After a modal it is always have, never has or had.Modal + be + V-ing = अभी चल रहा। Modal + have + V3 = भूतकाल। Modal के बाद हमेशा have, has या had कभी नहीं।
can → could, may → might, will → would when the sentence or the clause is in the past.जब वाक्य या उपवाक्य भूतकाल में हो: can → could, may → might, will → would।
Never two ways of saying one thing: can be able to, must have to, should be supposed to, may be likely to. But will be able to is correct.एक बात दो तरह से कभी नहीं: can be able to, must have to, should be supposed to, may be likely to। लेकिन will be able to सही है।
Could = general past ability. One completed past action takes was / were able to or managed to; in a negative sentence couldn't is fine.Could = भूतकाल की सामान्य योग्यता। भूतकाल की एक पूरी क्रिया was / were able to या managed to लेती है; नकारात्मक वाक्य में couldn't चलता है।
May not = it may not happen. Cannot = it is impossible. Possibility in a question takes could, and a request asking someone to do something (Could you help me?) never takes may.May not = हो सकता है न हो। Cannot = हो ही नहीं सकता। प्रश्न में संभावना के लिए could आता है, और किसी से कुछ करवाने के अनुरोध (Could you help me?) में may कभी नहीं।
After when, if, until, before, as soon as no will / shall: the present indefinite shows the future. Offers and suggestions with I / we take Shall I?.when, if, until, before, as soon as के बाद will / shall नहीं: भविष्य Present indefinite (सामान्य वर्तमान काल) से दिखता है। I / we के साथ प्रस्ताव और सुझाव में Shall I? आता है।
Would = reported will, preference (like, love, prefer), polite offer, 2nd conditional and past habit. A past state takes used to.Would = अप्रत्यक्ष कथन का will, पसंद (like, love, prefer), विनम्र प्रस्ताव, 2nd conditional (शर्तवाचक) और भूतकाल की आदत। भूतकाल की अवस्था में used to आता है।
The past of shall is would; only an offer, a permission or a question keeps should. Had better + V1, never had better to.Shall का भूतकाल would है; केवल प्रस्ताव, अनुमति या प्रश्न में should रहता है। Had better + V1, had better to कभी नहीं।
Must = own obligation or strong guess; have to = outside requirement; past obligation = had to; must not = banned, don't have to = not needed.Must = अपनी अनिवार्यता या दृढ़ अनुमान; have to = बाहरी बाध्यता; भूतकाल की अनिवार्यता = had to; must not = मनाही, don't have to = आवश्यकता नहीं।
Need and dare are modals only in negative and interrogative sentences (no to, no -s). In a positive sentence they are main verbs: needs to, dares to.Need और dare केवल निषेधात्मक और प्रश्नवाचक वाक्यों में Modal हैं (न to, न -s)। विधिबोधक वाक्य में ये मुख्य क्रियाएँ हैं: needs to, dares to।
Used to + V1 = past habit, now over. Be / get used to + V-ing = accustomed. Be used to + V1 = passive of use.Used to + V1 = भूतकाल की आदत, अब समाप्त। Be / get used to + V-ing = अभ्यस्त होना। Be used to + V1 = use का कर्मवाच्य।
Could have / should have / would have + V3 = something that did not happen. Must have + V3 = strong guess about the past. Needn't have + V3 = done, but not needed. Never can have.Could have / should have / would have + V3 = जो हुआ नहीं। Must have + V3 = भूतकाल के बारे में दृढ़ अनुमान। Needn't have + V3 = हुआ, पर आवश्यकता नहीं थी। can have कभी नहीं।

Concepts every modal follows

After a modal, the verb is always V1. Never V2, V3, V-ing or V1 + s/es.Modal के बाद क्रिया हमेशा V1 में। V2, V3, V-ing या V1 + s/es कभी नहीं।
A modal never takes s/es: cans, wills, mays are all wrong.Modal के साथ s/es नहीं लगता: cans, wills, mays सब गलत हैं।
Going on now: modal + be + V-ing. Past: modal + have + V3. Long-running: modal + have been + V-ing.अभी चल रहा: modal + be + V-ing। भूतकाल: modal + have + V3। लंबे समय से चल रहा: modal + have been + V-ing।
After a modal always have, never has or had.Modal के बाद हमेशा have, has या had नहीं।
Register: formal (school, office, law) = may, shall; informal = can, will; polite request = could, would.औपचारिकता: औपचारिक (स्कूल, कार्यालय, कानून) = may, shall; अनौपचारिक = can, will; विनम्र अनुरोध = could, would।
Conditional: if + past, would / could / might + V1. Never will / can / may in the result clause.शर्त-वाक्य: if + भूतकाल, would / could / might + V1। परिणाम वाले उपवाक्य में will / can / may कभी नहीं।

Present and past forms

can → could, may → might, will → would, when the sentence or the clause is in the past.जब वाक्य या उपवाक्य भूतकाल में हो: can → could, may → might, will → would।
Can, may, will and shall are used only in the present and future.Can, may, will और shall केवल वर्तमान और भविष्य में प्रयोग होते हैं।
Could, might, would can also be used in the present, for politeness or weaker possibility.Could, might, would वर्तमान में भी आ सकते हैं, विनम्रता या कमज़ोर संभावना के लिए।
If + past verb, main clause: would / could / might. Never will / can / may.If + भूतकाल क्रिया, मुख्य उपवाक्य: would / could / might। कभी will / can / may नहीं।

Can and Could

Can = ability, informal request, informal permission, general possibility.Can = योग्यता, अनौपचारिक अनुरोध, अनौपचारिक अनुमति, सामान्य संभावना।
In SSC exams, can + be able to (like could be able to, must have to) is treated as a repeated idea, so choose one: can swim or is able to swim.SSC परीक्षाओं में can + be able to (जैसे could be able to, must have to) दोहराया हुआ भाव माना जाता है, इसलिए कोई एक चुनें: can swim या is able to swim।
Future ability: will + be able to for a new ability (After this course you will be able to …). Can also refers to future availability (I can meet you tomorrow).भविष्य की योग्यता: नई योग्यता के लिए will + be able to (After this course you will be able to …)। Can भविष्य की उपलब्धता के लिए भी आता है (I can meet you tomorrow)।
Write cannot or can't, never can not.cannot या can't लिखें, can not कभी नहीं।
Specific chance of one event: may / might / could, not can.किसी एक घटना की विशेष संभावना: may / might / could, can नहीं।
Could = past ability, polite request, remote possibility, suggestion.Could = भूतकाल की योग्यता, विनम्र अनुरोध, दूर की संभावना, सुझाव।
In SSC exams, could + be able to is treated as a repeated idea, so use could or was / were able to. (In real English With more training she could be able to do it is possible; exam keys do not rely on such uses.)SSC परीक्षाओं में could + be able to दोहराया हुआ भाव माना जाता है, इसलिए could या was / were able to लगाएँ। (वास्तविक अंग्रेज़ी में With more training she could be able to do it संभव है; परीक्षा की उत्तर-कुंजी ऐसे प्रयोगों पर निर्भर नहीं करती।)
General past ability: could. One completed past action: was / were able to / managed to / succeeded in.भूतकाल की सामान्य योग्यता: could। भूतकाल की एक पूरी क्रिया: was / were able to / managed to / succeeded in।
In a negative sentence, couldn't is fine even for one past event.नकारात्मक वाक्य में couldn't एक भूतकालीन घटना के लिए भी ठीक है।
Could is more polite than can.Could, can से अधिक विनम्र है।
Written forms: cannot / can't (one word, never can not); may not (never mayn't); mustn't; needn't.लिखित रूप: cannot / can't (एक शब्द, can not कभी नहीं); may not (mayn't कभी नहीं); mustn't; needn't।

May and Might

May = possibility, formal permission, wish / blessing. Might = past of may, weaker possibility.May = संभावना, औपचारिक अनुमति, इच्छा / आशीर्वाद। Might = may का भूतकाल रूप, कमज़ोर संभावना।
No may / might + be likely to: the idea is already inside. May possibly is acceptable usage (the extra word is only emphasis); it is not an error.may / might + be likely to नहीं: भाव पहले से भीतर है। May possibly स्वीकार्य प्रयोग है (अतिरिक्त शब्द केवल ज़ोर देता है); यह त्रुटि नहीं है।
Possibility in a question: Could it rain?, not May it rain?प्रश्न में संभावना: Could it rain?, May it rain? नहीं।
May not = possible that it does not happen. Cannot = not possible at all.May not = न होने की संभावना। Cannot = होने की संभावना ही नहीं।
Purpose: so that + may / might (can / could).उद्देश्य: so that + may / might (can / could)।
Strength of possibility: could (remote) < might (weak) < may (more likely than not) < must (strong deduction).संभावना की दृढ़ता: could (दूर की) < might (कमज़ोर) < may (अधिक संभावित) < must (दृढ़ अनुमान)।

Will, Shall and Be going to

Future: will with you / he / she / they, shall with I / we. In informal use will is fine with all.भविष्य: you / he / she / they के साथ will, I / we के साथ shall। अनौपचारिक में सबके साथ will चलता है।
Formal: shall with every subject for determination, order or instruction.औपचारिक: दृढ़ संकल्प, आदेश या निर्देश के लिए हर कर्ता के साथ shall।
Offer or suggestion with I / we: Shall I / Shall we (Shall I open the door?). A plain question about the future can use Will I (Will I need a ticket?); in SSC exams, when only shall fits the offer sense, choose shall.I / we के साथ प्रस्ताव या सुझाव: Shall I / Shall we (Shall I open the door?)। भविष्य के बारे में सीधा प्रश्न Will I से भी बन सकता है (Will I need a ticket?); SSC परीक्षाओं में जब प्रस्ताव के भाव में केवल shall उपयुक्त हो, तो shall चुनें।
After when, if, until, before, after, as soon as no will / shall: use the present indefinite.when, if, until, before, after, as soon as के बाद will / shall नहीं: Present indefinite (सामान्य वर्तमान काल) लगाएँ।
Be going to = decided plan, or a prediction from present evidence.Be going to = तय योजना, या सामने के प्रमाण से पूर्वानुमान।

Would

Would = past of will / shall, preference (like, love, prefer, hate), polite request or offer, 2nd conditional, past habit.Would = will / shall का भूतकाल, पसंद (like, love, prefer, hate), विनम्र अनुरोध या प्रस्ताव, 2nd conditional (शर्तवाचक), भूतकाल की आदत।
If + past, would + V1. Never will in the result clause.If + भूतकाल, would + V1। परिणाम वाले उपवाक्य में will कभी नहीं।
Would you mind + V-ing. Would is a modal: Would you like (not liked).Would you mind + V-ing। Would Modal है: Would you like (liked नहीं)।
Past habit can take would, but a past state takes used to, not would.भूतकाल की आदत में would आ सकता है, पर भूतकाल की अवस्था में used to आता है, would नहीं।
Would rather + V1; would rather + new subject + V2; would rather have + V3. No would better.Would rather + V1; would rather + नया कर्ता + V2; would rather have + V3। would better नहीं होता।

Should, Ought to, Had better, Be supposed to

Should = advice, obligation, expectation. Ought to = the same with a moral duty. Both take V1.Should = सलाह, अनिवार्यता, अपेक्षा। Ought to = वही, नैतिक कर्तव्य के साथ। दोनों के बाद V1।
Had better + (not) + V1 = should (not) + V1. Never had better to, had not better, would better.Had better + (not) + V1 = should (not) + V1। had better to, had not better, would better कभी नहीं।
Lest + V1 or lest + should + V1. No extra not.Lest + V1 या lest + should + V1। अलग से not नहीं।
Past of shall: would (statement); should (offer, permission, question).Shall का भूतकाल: would (कथन); should (प्रस्ताव, अनुमति, प्रश्न)।
Should and supposed to are alternatives, never together.Should और supposed to विकल्प हैं, साथ कभी नहीं।

Must and Have to

Must = own obligation, strong advice, strong deduction. Have to / has to = an external requirement.Must = अपनी अनिवार्यता, कड़ी सलाह, दृढ़ अनुमान। Have to / has to = बाहरी बाध्यता।
Present guess: must be. Past guess: must have + V3. Negative guess: can't be / can't have + V3.वर्तमान अनुमान: must be। भूतकाल अनुमान: must have + V3। नकारात्मक अनुमान: can't be / can't have + V3।
Past obligation: had to, never must.भूतकाल की अनिवार्यता: had to, must कभी नहीं।
In SSC exams, must + have to is treated as a repeated idea, so choose one. Must have to repeats the idea of obligation; use must or have to. After have to / has to / had to the verb is V1.SSC परीक्षाओं में must + have to दोहराया हुआ भाव माना जाता है, इसलिए कोई एक चुनें। Must have to अनिवार्यता के भाव को दोहराता है; must या have to लगाएँ। have to / has to / had to के बाद क्रिया V1।
Must not = prohibition. Don't have to = no necessity.Must not = निषेध। Don't have to = आवश्यकता नहीं।

Need and Dare

As modals, need and dare are used mainly in negative and interrogative sentences (the modal pattern). In positive sentences they are usually main verbs; fixed positive patterns also exist: You need only ask, I dare say.Modal के रूप में need और dare मुख्यतः निषेधात्मक और प्रश्नवाचक वाक्यों में आते हैं (Modal का ढाँचा)। विधिबोधक वाक्यों में ये प्रायः मुख्य क्रियाएँ होती हैं; कुछ निश्चित विधिबोधक प्रयोग भी हैं: You need only ask, I dare say।
Modal: need not / dare not + V1, no s/es. Main verb: need to / dare to + V1, with s/es and do / does / did.Modal: need not / dare not + V1, s/es नहीं। मुख्य क्रिया: need to / dare to + V1, s/es और do / does / did के साथ।
Need not = no necessity (= don't have to). Dare = courage, never ability.Need not = कोई आवश्यकता नहीं (= don't have to)। Dare = साहस, योग्यता कभी नहीं।
Need I buy…? (modal) or Do I need to buy…? (main verb). Never Need I to buy…?.Need I buy…? (Modal) या Do I need to buy…? (मुख्य क्रिया)। Need I to buy…? कभी नहीं।

Used to

Used to + V1 = past habit or past state, now over. No use to.Used to + V1 = भूतकाल की आदत या अवस्था, अब समाप्त। use to नहीं।
Negative and question: did not use to / Did you use to…?.निषेध और प्रश्न: did not use to / Did you use to…?।
Be / get / become used to + V-ing (or noun) = accustomed. The to is a preposition.Be / get / become used to + V-ing (या संज्ञा) = अभ्यस्त होना। यहाँ to संबंधबोधक है।
Be used to + V1 = passive of use (a thing employed for a purpose).Be used to + V1 = use का कर्मवाच्य (किसी वस्तु का किसी उद्देश्य के लिए प्रयोग)।
A repeated past action is never was / were + V-ing + every day.भूतकाल की दोहराई गई क्रिया कभी was / were + V-ing + every day नहीं होती।

Past modals

Past modals: modal + have + V3. After a modal, have stays in the base form.भूतकाल के Modals: modal + have + V3। Modal के बाद have मूल रूप में रहता है।
Would have + V3 = unreal past result; should have + V3 = duty not done, or expectation (She should have arrived by now); could have + V3 = unreal chance or possibility (It could have been the wind).Would have + V3 = अवास्तविक भूतकालीन परिणाम; should have + V3 = जो कर्तव्य पूरा नहीं हुआ, या अपेक्षा (She should have arrived by now); could have + V3 = अवास्तविक अवसर या संभावना (It could have been the wind)।
Must have + V3 = strong guess. May / might have + V3 = weak guess. Can't / couldn't have + V3 = sure it did not happen.Must have + V3 = दृढ़ अनुमान। May / might have + V3 = कमज़ोर अनुमान। Can't / couldn't have + V3 = पक्का है कि नहीं हुआ।
Needn't have + V3 = it was done, but it was not needed. Didn't need to + V1 does not say whether it was done.Needn't have + V3 = काम हुआ, पर उसकी आवश्यकता नहीं थी। Didn't need to + V1 यह नहीं बताता कि कार्य हुआ या नहीं।
Not can have + V3: use could have. Not must have for duty: use had to.can have + V3 नहीं: could have लगाएँ। कर्तव्य के लिए must have नहीं: had to लगाएँ।

Modal equivalents

A modal and its equivalent do not come together: can be able to, could be able to, must have to, should be supposed to, may be likely to. In SSC exams, a modal and its equivalent in the same verb group (could be able to, can be able to, must have to, should be supposed to) is treated as a repeated idea, so choose one. (In real English some of these carry a special meaning, for example With more training she could be able to do it; exam keys do not rely on those.)Modal और उसका समानार्थी प्रयोग साथ नहीं आते: can be able to, could be able to, must have to, should be supposed to, may be likely to। SSC परीक्षाओं में Modal और उसका समानार्थी प्रयोग एक ही क्रिया-समूह में (could be able to, can be able to, must have to, should be supposed to) दोहराया हुआ भाव माना जाता है, इसलिए कोई एक चुनें। (वास्तविक अंग्रेज़ी में इनमें से कुछ का विशेष अर्थ हो सकता है, जैसे With more training she could be able to do it; परीक्षा की उत्तर-कुंजी इन पर निर्भर नहीं करती।)
Future ability: will / shall + be able to (will and be able to are not equivalents).भविष्य की योग्यता: will / shall + be able to (will और be able to समानार्थी नहीं हैं)।
After be able to the verb is V1.be able to के बाद क्रिया V1।
Pairs: can = be able to; must = have to / have got to; should = be supposed to; may / might = be likely to; will = be going to; need not = don't have to.जोड़ियाँ: can = be able to; must = have to / have got to; should = be supposed to; may / might = be likely to; will = be going to; need not = don't have to।

Which modal for which job

| Function | Modals | |---|---| | Ability | can, could, be able to | | Permission | may, can, could | | Possibility | may, might, could, can (general), be likely to | | Strong deduction | must, can't / couldn't | | Obligation / necessity | must, have to, have got to, need to | | Advice | should, ought to, had better | | Prohibition | mustn't, can't, may not | | Request | can, could, will, would | | Suggestion / offer | shall, could | | Future / prediction | will, shall, be going to | | No necessity | needn't, don't have to || कार्य | Modals | |---|---| | योग्यता | can, could, be able to | | अनुमति | may, can, could | | संभावना | may, might, could, can (general), be likely to | | दृढ़ अनुमान | must, can't / couldn't | | अनिवार्यता / आवश्यकता | must, have to, have got to, need to | | सलाह | should, ought to, had better | | निषेध | mustn't, can't, may not | | अनुरोध | can, could, will, would | | सुझाव / प्रस्ताव | shall, could | | भविष्य / पूर्वानुमान | will, shall, be going to | | आवश्यकता नहीं | needn't, don't have to |

Summary chart of modals and similar expressions

| Modal | Use | Present / future | Past | |---|---|---|---| | May | Formal permission | You may leave the room. | — | | May | Weak possibility | Where's Ram? He may be at the library. | He may have been at the library. | | Might | Weak possibility | Where's Ram? He might be at the library. | I might have been at the library. | | Should | Advisability | I should study tonight. | I should have studied last night, but I didn't. | | Should | Expectation | He should do well on the test. | He should have done well on the test. | | Ought to | Advisability | I ought to study tonight. | I ought to have studied last night, but I didn't. | | Had better | Advice with a threat of a bad result | You had better be on time, or we will leave without you. | (past form is uncommon) | | Be supposed to | Expectation | The class is supposed to begin at 10:00. | The class was supposed to begin at 10:00, but it didn't begin until 10:15. (unfulfilled expectation) || Modal | प्रयोग | वर्तमान / भविष्य | भूतकाल | |---|---|---|---| | May | औपचारिक अनुमति | You may leave the room. | — | | May | कमज़ोर संभावना | Where's Ram? He may be at the library. | He may have been at the library. | | Might | कमज़ोर संभावना | Where's Ram? He might be at the library. | I might have been at the library. | | Should | सलाह | I should study tonight. | I should have studied last night, but I didn't. | | Should | अपेक्षा | He should do well on the test. | He should have done well on the test. | | Ought to | सलाह | I ought to study tonight. | I ought to have studied last night, but I didn't. | | Had better | बुरे परिणाम की चेतावनी के साथ सलाह | You had better be on time, or we will leave without you. | (past form is uncommon) | | Be supposed to | अपेक्षा | The class is supposed to begin at 10:00. | The class was supposed to begin at 10:00, but it didn't begin until 10:15. (unfulfilled expectation) |
| Modal | Use | Present / future | Past | |---|---|---|---| | Must | Strong necessity | I must go to class today. | (I had to go to class yesterday.) | | Must | Prohibition (negative) | You must not open that door. | — | | Must | Strong deduction (present) | Radhika isn't in class. She must be sick. | Radhika must have been sick yesterday. | | Have to | Necessity | I have to go to class today. | I had to go to class yesterday. | | Have to | Lack of necessity (negative) | I don't have to go to class today. | I didn't have to go to class yesterday. | | Will | Certainty (future only) | She will be here at 6:00. | — | | Will | Willingness | The phone's ringing. I'll get it. | — | | Will | Polite request | Will you please pass the salt? | — | | Be going to | Prediction (future only) | He is going to be here at 6:00. | — | | Be going to | Definite plan, intention (future only) | I'm going to paint my room. | I was going to paint my room, but I didn't have time. (unfulfilled intention) || Modal | प्रयोग | वर्तमान / भविष्य | भूतकाल | |---|---|---|---| | Must | दृढ़ अनिवार्यता | I must go to class today. | (I had to go to class yesterday.) | | Must | निषेध (नकारात्मक) | You must not open that door. | — | | Must | दृढ़ अनुमान (वर्तमान) | Radhika isn't in class. She must be sick. | Radhika must have been sick yesterday. | | Have to | आवश्यकता | I have to go to class today. | I had to go to class yesterday. | | Have to | आवश्यकता का अभाव (नकारात्मक) | I don't have to go to class today. | I didn't have to go to class yesterday. | | Will | निश्चितता (केवल भविष्य) | She will be here at 6:00. | — | | Will | इच्छा | The phone's ringing. I'll get it. | — | | Will | विनम्र अनुरोध | Will you please pass the salt? | — | | Be going to | पूर्वानुमान (केवल भविष्य) | He is going to be here at 6:00. | — | | Be going to | पक्की योजना, इरादा (केवल भविष्य) | I'm going to paint my room. | I was going to paint my room, but I didn't have time. (unfulfilled intention) |
| Modal | Use | Present / future | Past | |---|---|---|---| | Can | Ability, possibility | I can run fast. | I could run fast when I was a child, but now I can't. | | Can | Informal permission | You can use my car tomorrow. | — | | Can | Impossibility | That can't be true! | That can't have been true! | | Could | Past ability | — | I could run fast when I was a child. | | Could | Polite request | Could I borrow your pen? Could you help me? | — | | Could | Suggestion (affirmative only) | I need help in maths. You could talk to your teacher. | You could have talked to your teacher. | | Could | Weak possibility | Where's Ram? He could be at home. | He could have been at home. | | Could | Impossibility (negative only) | That couldn't be true! | That couldn't have been true! | | Be able to | Ability | I am able to help you. I will be able to help you. | I was able to help him. | | Would | Polite request | Would you please pass the salt? Would you mind if I left early? | — | | Would | Preference | I would rather go to the park than stay home. | I would rather have gone to the park. | | Would | Repeated action in the past | — | When I was a child, I would visit my grandparents every weekend. | | Would | Polite way of saying 'want' (with like) | I would like an apple, please. | — | | Would | Unfulfilled wish | — | I would have liked a biscuit but there were none in the house. | | Used to | Repeated action in the past | — | I used to visit my parents every weekend. | | Used to | Past situation that no longer exists | — | I used to live in Mumbai. Now I live in Delhi. | | Shall | Polite question to make a suggestion | Shall I open the window? | The past form of shall is would. | | Shall | Future with I or we as subject | I shall arrive at nine. (will is more common) | — || Modal | प्रयोग | वर्तमान / भविष्य | भूतकाल | |---|---|---|---| | Can | योग्यता, संभावना | I can run fast. | I could run fast when I was a child, but now I can't. | | Can | अनौपचारिक अनुमति | You can use my car tomorrow. | — | | Can | असंभवता | That can't be true! | That can't have been true! | | Could | भूतकाल की योग्यता | — | I could run fast when I was a child. | | Could | विनम्र अनुरोध | Could I borrow your pen? Could you help me? | — | | Could | सुझाव (केवल विधिबोधक) | I need help in maths. You could talk to your teacher. | You could have talked to your teacher. | | Could | कमज़ोर संभावना | Where's Ram? He could be at home. | He could have been at home. | | Could | असंभवता (केवल नकारात्मक) | That couldn't be true! | That couldn't have been true! | | Be able to | योग्यता | I am able to help you. I will be able to help you. | I was able to help him. | | Would | विनम्र अनुरोध | Would you please pass the salt? Would you mind if I left early? | — | | Would | पसंद | I would rather go to the park than stay home. | I would rather have gone to the park. | | Would | भूतकाल की दोहराई गई क्रिया | — | When I was a child, I would visit my grandparents every weekend. | | Would | 'want' का विनम्र रूप (like के साथ) | I would like an apple, please. | — | | Would | अधूरी इच्छा | — | I would have liked a biscuit but there were none in the house. | | Used to | भूतकाल की दोहराई गई क्रिया | — | I used to visit my parents every weekend. | | Used to | भूतकाल की स्थिति जो अब नहीं है | — | I used to live in Mumbai. Now I live in Delhi. | | Shall | सुझाव देने वाला विनम्र प्रश्न | Shall I open the window? | The past form of shall is would. | | Shall | I या we के साथ भविष्य | I shall arrive at nine. (will is more common) | — |

5. Noun Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A noun is a name. In the exam its kind matters only for the article, the number and the verb it takes.संज्ञा एक नाम है। परीक्षा में उसका भेद इसलिए मायने रखता है कि उसके साथ कौन-सा article, वचन और क्रिया आती है।
Proper nouns take a capital letter and no article (except the Ganga, the Taj Mahal); abstract nouns take no a / an.व्यक्तिवाचक संज्ञा में capital letter (बड़ा अक्षर) और article नहीं (सिवाय the Ganga, the Taj Mahal); भाववाचक संज्ञा के साथ a / an नहीं।
Where the sentence needs a noun, use the noun form of the word: intelligent → intelligence, believe → belief.जहाँ वाक्य को संज्ञा चाहिए, वहाँ शब्द का संज्ञा रूप लगाइए: intelligent → intelligence, believe → belief।
Group names: pride of lions, pack of wolves, herd of cattle, flock of birds, school of fish, swarm of bees; the public never takes -s.समूह-नाम: शेरों का pride, भेड़ियों का pack, पशुओं का herd, पक्षियों का flock, मछलियों का school, मधुमक्खियों का swarm; the public में -s नहीं लगता।
A singular countable noun always needs a determiner; a plural may stand alone; much / little go with uncountables, many / few with plurals.एकवचन गणनीय संज्ञा को हमेशा निर्धारक चाहिए; बहुवचन अकेली आ सकती है; अगणनीय के साथ much / little, बहुवचन के साथ many / few।
Advice, information, furniture, luggage, equipment, scenery, news, mischief, evidence never take -s, never take a / an, and take a singular verb.Advice, information, furniture, luggage, equipment, scenery, news, mischief, evidence में कभी -s नहीं, a / an नहीं, और एकवचन क्रिया।
Count an uncountable noun with a unit: a piece of advice, an item of furniture, a drop of water, a cup of tea.अगणनीय को इकाई से गिनिए: a piece of advice, an item of furniture, a drop of water, a cup of tea।
Work = labour is uncountable; a work = a piece of art; works = construction.Work = काम अगणनीय है; a work = कला-कृति; works = निर्माण।
Plurals: -es after s, ss, sh, ch, x, z; consonant + y → -ies; f / fe → -ves; -um → -a, -us → -i, -on → -a, -is → -es.बहुवचन: s, ss, sh, ch, x, z के बाद -es; व्यंजन + y → -ies; f / fe → -ves; -um → -a, -us → -i, -on → -a, -is → -es।
Children, men, women, mice, feet, teeth, geese are already plural: no extra -s.Children, men, women, mice, feet, teeth, geese पहले से बहुवचन हैं: उनमें फिर -s नहीं।
Sheep, deer, series, innings, means, aircraft keep one form; people, police, cattle are plural without -s; news, mathematics, physics, billiards, measles are singular.Sheep, deer, series, innings, means, aircraft का रूप नहीं बदलता; people, police, cattle बिना -s के बहुवचन हैं; news, mathematics, physics, billiards, measles एकवचन हैं।
Two-part things (scissors, spectacles, trousers) are plural only: count them with a pair of / two pairs of.दो भागों वाली वस्तुएँ (scissors, spectacles, trousers) केवल बहुवचन हैं: उन्हें a pair of / two pairs of से गिनिए।
Compounds: sisters-in-law, passers-by, runners-up (main noun) but break-ins, start-ups, cut-offs and cupfuls (-s at the end).यौगिक शब्द: sisters-in-law, passers-by, runners-up (मुख्य संज्ञा) लेकिन break-ins, start-ups, cut-offs और cupfuls (-s अंत में)।
A noun modifier stays singular (an eight-year-old girl, two cricket bats); two dozen but dozens of; hundreds of miles.संज्ञा-विशेषक एकवचन रहता है (an eight-year-old girl, two cricket bats); two dozen लेकिन dozens of; hundreds of miles।
One of the + plural noun + singular verb; the same plural noun follows most of the, none of the, a large number of.One of the + बहुवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया; most of the, none of the, a large number of के बाद भी बहुवचन संज्ञा आती है।
’s for living things, places, time, measures and personified things; of for ordinary non-living things (the leg of the table).’s सजीव प्राणियों, स्थानों, समय, माप और मानवीकृत वस्तुओं के लिए; आम निर्जीव वस्तुओं के लिए of (the leg of the table)।
Joint ownership: Ram and Sita’s children; separate: Ram’s and Shyam’s houses; double possession: the parents of Rajat’s wife.साझा स्वामित्व: Ram and Sita’s children; अलग-अलग: Ram’s and Shyam’s houses; दोहरा स्वामित्व: the parents of Rajat’s wife।

Kinds of noun

A kind of noun shows three things: whether it takes an article, whether it can be plural, and which verb it takes. Proper noun = one particular name, capital letter, no article (except some, like the Ganga).संज्ञा के भेद से तीन बातें पता चलती हैं: article का प्रयोग होगा या नहीं, बहुवचन बनेगा या नहीं, और कौन-सी क्रिया आएगी। व्यक्तिवाचक संज्ञा = एक विशेष नाम, capital letter (बड़ा अक्षर), article नहीं (कुछ को छोड़कर, जैसे the Ganga)।
Common noun = a whole class (city, girl). Singular and plural both; a singular countable one always needs a determiner.जातिवाचक संज्ञा = पूरा वर्ग (city, girl)। एकवचन और बहुवचन दोनों; एकवचन गणनीय के साथ determiner (निर्धारक) ज़रूरी।
Material noun (gold, water, cloth) is usually uncountable: no a / an, no -s, singular verb.पदार्थवाचक संज्ञा (gold, water, cloth) सामान्यतः अगणनीय होती है: a / an नहीं, -s नहीं, एकवचन क्रिया।
Abstract noun (honesty, love) has no physical form and usually no a / an. A few (lie, dream, hope) can be counted.भाववाचक संज्ञा (honesty, love) का भौतिक रूप नहीं होता और सामान्यतः a / an नहीं लगता। कुछ (lie, dream, hope) गिनी जा सकती हैं।
When the sentence needs a noun, turn the adjective or verb into its noun form (intelligent → intelligence, succeed → success, believe → belief).जहाँ वाक्य को संज्ञा चाहिए, वहाँ विशेषण या क्रिया को उसके noun (संज्ञा) रूप में बदलिए (intelligent → intelligence, succeed → success, believe → belief)।

Collective nouns

A collective noun names a group. As one unit it takes a singular verb; for separate members (division) a plural verb is possible; in the plural form (families) the verb is always plural.समूहवाचक संज्ञा समूह का नाम है। एक इकाई के रूप में एकवचन क्रिया; अलग-अलग सदस्यों (division) के लिए बहुवचन क्रिया भी चल सकती है; बहुवचन रूप (families) में क्रिया हमेशा बहुवचन।
Learn the animal groups: pride of lions, pack of wolves or dogs, herd of cattle or elephants, flock of birds or sheep, school of fish, swarm of bees.पशु-समूह याद रखिए: शेरों का pride, भेड़ियों या कुत्तों का pack, पशुओं या हाथियों का herd, पक्षियों या भेड़ों का flock, मछलियों का school, मधुमक्खियों का swarm।
After crowd of / group of / team of the noun is plural: a crowd of workers.Crowd of / group of / team of के बाद संज्ञा बहुवचन आती है: a crowd of workers।
Public takes no -s. Say the public, not the publics.Public में -s नहीं लगता। The public कहें, the publics नहीं।
Singular collective noun as one unit: singular verb. Division or separate members: plural verb possible. Plural form (families): plural verb.एकवचन समूहवाचक संज्ञा एक इकाई के रूप में: एकवचन क्रिया। बिखराव या अलग-अलग सदस्य: बहुवचन क्रिया भी चल सकती है। बहुवचन रूप (families): बहुवचन क्रिया।

Countable and uncountable

Singular countable noun: determiner is compulsory (a pen, her sister); verb singular; with each / every / one.एकवचन गणनीय संज्ञा: निर्धारक ज़रूरी (a pen, her sister); क्रिया एकवचन; each / every / one के साथ।
Plural countable noun: determiner not compulsory, no a / an; verb plural; with many, few, several.बहुवचन गणनीय संज्ञा: निर्धारक वैकल्पिक, a / an नहीं; क्रिया बहुवचन; many, few, several के साथ।
Uncountable noun: no plural (-s), no number word, no a / an, singular verb; use much / little.अगणनीय संज्ञा: बहुवचन (-s) नहीं, संख्यावाचक शब्द नहीं, a / an नहीं, एकवचन क्रिया; much / little लगाइए।
Cutting test (a rough guide only): if every piece keeps the same name (water, soap), the noun is usually uncountable. Countability depends on the sense, so check the word.टुकड़ों वाला परीक्षण (केवल मोटा अंदाज़ा): हर टुकड़े का नाम वही रहे (water, soap), तो संज्ञा प्रायः अगणनीय होती है। गणनीयता अर्थ पर निर्भर करती है, इसलिए शब्द को जाँचिए।
Group-name test: a name that covers different things but is not the name of any one of them (furniture, luggage, jewellery, stationery) is uncountable.समूह-नाम परीक्षण: जो नाम अलग-अलग वस्तुओं को समेटे पर उनमें से किसी एक का नाम न हो (furniture, luggage, jewellery, stationery), वह अगणनीय है।

Uncountable nouns in the exam

These nouns have no plural: advice, information, news, furniture, luggage, baggage, equipment, machinery, jewellery, stationery, scenery, knowledge, evidence, research, progress, mischief, traffic, weather, money, work. Some of these have countable senses in other uses (an experience, works of art); the exam uses the uncountable sense.इन संज्ञाओं का बहुवचन नहीं होता: advice, information, news, furniture, luggage, baggage, equipment, machinery, jewellery, stationery, scenery, knowledge, evidence, research, progress, mischief, traffic, weather, money, work। इनमें से कुछ के दूसरे प्रयोगों में गणनीय अर्थ भी हैं (an experience, कला के works); परीक्षा अगणनीय अर्थ ही पूछती है।
They take a singular verb (furniture was, information is) and much / little, never many / few.इनके साथ एकवचन क्रिया (furniture was, information is) और much / little आता है, many / few कभी नहीं।
Suggestion is countable, advice is not. Proof is countable, evidence is not.Suggestion गणनीय है, advice नहीं। Proof गणनीय है, evidence नहीं।
Time meaning duration is uncountable: too much time, never too much times.अवधि के अर्थ में time अगणनीय है: too much time, too much times कभी नहीं।

Counting the uncountable

To count an uncountable noun use a unit: a piece of advice / information / news / furniture, an item of clothing, a drop of water, a cup of tea.अगणनीय को गिनने के लिए इकाई लगाइए: a piece of advice / information / news / furniture, an item of clothing, a drop of water, a cup of tea।
Experience meaning general knowledge is uncountable (much experience); an experience is one event (a bad experience). Education as a process is uncountable; an education is a kind of schooling (a good education). A countable sense does not need an adjective (an experience); it needs the sense. Knowledge, breakfast, lunch, dinner take a / an mostly with an adjective (a sound knowledge, a heavy breakfast).सामान्य ज्ञान के अर्थ में experience अगणनीय है (much experience); an experience एक घटना है (a bad experience)। प्रक्रिया के अर्थ में education अगणनीय है; an education एक प्रकार की शिक्षा है (a good education)। गणनीय अर्थ को विशेषण की आवश्यकता नहीं (an experience); उसे सही अर्थ चाहिए। Knowledge, breakfast, lunch, dinner के साथ a / an प्रायः विशेषण के साथ आता है (a sound knowledge, a heavy breakfast)।
Advice, information, furniture, weather, news never take a / an, even with an adjective.Advice, information, furniture, weather, news के साथ विशेषण होने पर भी a / an कभी नहीं।
Work = task: uncountable (much work); work of art: countable (a work); construction: works (always plural).Work = काम: अगणनीय (much work); कला-कृति: गणनीय (a work); निर्माण: works (हमेशा बहुवचन)।
Noun / verb pairs: advice / advise, practice / practise, device / devise. A verb slot takes the -ise form.संज्ञा / क्रिया जोड़े: advice / advise, practice / practise, device / devise। क्रिया की जगह पर -ise वाला रूप आता है।

Plural of countable nouns

-s for most nouns; -es after s, ss, sh, ch, x, z; consonant + y → -ies; vowel + y → -s; f / fe → -ves (roofs, chiefs, chefs, beliefs keep -s).अधिकतर संज्ञाओं में -s; s, ss, sh, ch, x, z के बाद -es; व्यंजन + y → -ies; स्वर + y → -s; f / fe → -ves (roofs, chiefs, chefs, beliefs में केवल -s)।
Consonant + o → -es (mangoes, heroes, tomatoes); photos, pianos, kilos take only -s.व्यंजन + o → -es (mangoes, heroes, tomatoes); photos, pianos, kilos में केवल -s।
Learn the irregular ones: man / men, woman / women, child / children, foot / feet, tooth / teeth, goose / geese, mouse / mice, ox / oxen. Childrens is wrong.अनियमित बहुवचन याद कीजिए: man / men, woman / women, child / children, foot / feet, tooth / teeth, goose / geese, mouse / mice, ox / oxen। Childrens गलत है।
Foreign endings: -um → -a (data, bacteria), -us → -i (alumni, stimuli, syllabi), -on → -a (criteria, phenomena), -is → -es (bases, crises), -a → -ae (formulae, larvae). Formulae and formulas, syllabi and syllabuses are both standard; the exam uses the classical plural when offered one.विदेशी अंत: -um → -a (data, bacteria), -us → -i (alumni, stimuli, syllabi), -on → -a (criteria, phenomena), -is → -es (bases, crises), -a → -ae (formulae, larvae)। Formulae और formulas, syllabi और syllabuses दोनों मानक हैं; परीक्षा में पारंपरिक (classical) बहुवचन दिया हो तो वही चुनिए।
A plural can change the meaning: manners (behaviour), waters (seas), glasses (spectacles), papers (documents), damages (compensation), pains (efforts), ashes, woods, sands.बहुवचन से अर्थ बदल सकता है: manners (आचरण), waters (समुद्र), glasses (चश्मा), papers (दस्तावेज़), damages (मुआवज़ा), pains (प्रयास), ashes, woods, sands।

Special number nouns

Same form in both numbers: sheep, deer, swine, series, salmon, fish, innings, means, headquarters, aircraft. No -s, ever.दोनों वचनों में एक ही रूप: sheep, deer, swine, series, salmon, fish, innings, means, headquarters, aircraft। कभी -s नहीं।
Look singular, are plural: people, police, children, cattle, poultry, clergy, vermin, gentry, peasantry. Plural verb, no -s. Only people and children can take a number.दिखने में एकवचन, वास्तव में बहुवचन: people, police, children, cattle, poultry, clergy, vermin, gentry, peasantry। बहुवचन क्रिया, -s नहीं। संख्या केवल people और children के साथ लग सकती है।
Look plural, are singular: news, mathematics, physics, economics, ethics, statistics, politics, measles, mumps, rickets, billiards, dominoes, shambles. Singular verb.दिखने में बहुवचन, वास्तव में एकवचन: news, mathematics, physics, economics, ethics, statistics, politics, measles, mumps, rickets, billiards, dominoes, shambles। एकवचन क्रिया।
A subject name used for views or values is plural: His politics are .... As a field of study it is singular: Politics is ....विषय का नाम विचारों या मूल्यों के अर्थ में बहुवचन होता है: His politics are ...। पढ़ाई के विषय के रूप में एकवचन: Politics is ...।
Summons → summonses. Wages = income (plural), result (singular). Fish → fishes only for different species.Summons → summonses। Wages = आमदनी (बहुवचन), परिणाम (एकवचन)। Fish → fishes केवल अलग-अलग प्रजातियों के लिए।
Mean = medium (noun), selfish (adjective), to signify (verb). Means = a way: a means ... is, all means ... are. Earnings is always plural.Mean = माध्यम (संज्ञा), कंजूस (विशेषण), अर्थ होना (क्रिया)। Means = तरीका: a means ... is, all means ... are। Earnings हमेशा बहुवचन।

Always plural nouns

Always plural in their usual sense: scissors, pliers, tongs, spectacles, binoculars, jeans, trousers, pants, shorts, handcuffs, goods, regards, thanks, congratulations, surroundings, and (in the money sense) savings, earnings, assets, premises (buildings). Some have a singular in another sense: an asset to the team, a saving of ten rupees, the premise of an argument, an archive of letters.अपने सामान्य अर्थ में सदा बहुवचन: scissors, pliers, tongs, spectacles, binoculars, jeans, trousers, pants, shorts, handcuffs, goods, regards, thanks, congratulations, surroundings, और (धन के अर्थ में) savings, earnings, assets, premises (इमारतें)। दूसरे अर्थ में कुछ का एकवचन भी होता है: an asset to the team, a saving of ten rupees, the premise of an argument, an archive of letters।
Tools, eyewear and clothing are counted with a pair of / two pairs of: a pair of scissors, two pairs of jeans.औज़ार, चश्मे और वस्त्रों को a pair of / two pairs of से गिनते हैं: a pair of scissors, two pairs of jeans।
No a / an and no singular form: ✘ a pants, a pant, a spectacle, two scissors.a / an नहीं और एकवचन रूप नहीं: ✘ a pants, a pant, a spectacle, two scissors।
In these senses savings, assets, archives and earnings are plural but never take pair of.इन अर्थों में savings, assets, archives और earnings बहुवचन हैं, पर इनके साथ pair of कभी नहीं आता।
Some adjectives work as plural nouns: valuables, eatables, belongings, surroundings, returns.कुछ विशेषण बहुवचन संज्ञा बनकर चलते हैं: valuables, eatables, belongings, surroundings, returns।

Compound nouns

-ful words: the -s goes at the end: cupfuls, handfuls, spoonfuls, bagfuls (never cupsful).-ful वाले शब्द: -s अंत में लगता है: cupfuls, handfuls, spoonfuls, bagfuls (cupsful कभी नहीं)।
Noun + preposition + (object): pluralise the main noun before the preposition: sisters-in-law, passers-by, runners-up, sons-in-law, commanders-in-chief.संज्ञा + पूर्वसर्ग + (कर्म): पूर्वसर्ग से पहले वाली मुख्य संज्ञा को बहुवचन कीजिए: sisters-in-law, passers-by, runners-up, sons-in-law, commanders-in-chief।
Verb + preposition: -s at the end: break-ins, start-ups, cut-offs, mix-ups, build-ups, take-aways.क्रिया + पूर्वसर्ग: -s अंत में: break-ins, start-ups, cut-offs, mix-ups, build-ups, take-aways।

Noun modifiers and numbers

A noun that describes another noun stays singular: two cricket bats, an eight-year-old girl, a ten-rupee note. Only the last (main) noun is made plural.दूसरी संज्ञा का वर्णन करने वाली संज्ञा एकवचन रहती है: two cricket bats, an eight-year-old girl, a ten-rupee note। केवल अंतिम (मुख्य) संज्ञा बहुवचन होती है।
Man / woman telling the gender → both plural (women doctors). Man telling the type → only the main noun (man eaters).Man / woman लिंग बताए → दोनों बहुवचन (women doctors)। Man प्रकार बताए → केवल मुख्य संज्ञा (man eaters)।
Number + dozen / hundred / thousand / lakh → singular, no of: two dozen mangoes.संख्या + dozen / hundred / thousand / lakh → एकवचन, of नहीं: two dozen mangoes।
Without a number → plural + of + plural noun: hundreds of boys, thousands of miles.संख्या के बिना → बहुवचन + of + बहुवचन संज्ञा: hundreds of boys, thousands of miles।
Some modifiers are always plural: customs officer, sports car, savings account, goods train, clothes shop, greetings card, fisheries sector.कुछ modifiers हमेशा बहुवचन रहते हैं: customs officer, sports car, savings account, goods train, clothes shop, greetings card, fisheries sector।

One of the + plural noun

One of the + (superlative) + plural noun + singular verb: one of the best books, one of the reasons ... is.One of the + (उत्कृष्टतावाचक) + बहुवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया: one of the best books, one of the reasons ... is।
Words that take a plural noun after of: most of the, none of the, some of the, a large number of, two of my, hundreds of.वे शब्द जिनके of के बाद बहुवचन संज्ञा आती है: most of the, none of the, some of the, a large number of, two of my, hundreds of।
After one of the use a plural noun (one of the best books). The adjective is usually a superlative (one of the most difficult things); in SSC exams choose the superlative when both a superlative and a comparative form appear. One of the more difficult things is also grammatical.One of the के बाद बहुवचन संज्ञा आती है (one of the best books)। विशेषण प्रायः उत्कृष्टतावाचक (Superlative) होता है (one of the most difficult things); SSC परीक्षा में Superlative (उत्तमावस्था) और Comparative (तुलनात्मक) दोनों दिए हों तो Superlative चुनिए। One of the more difficult things भी व्याकरण की दृष्टि से सही है।
A friend of mine = one of my friends. Many a + singular noun + singular verb.A friend of mine = one of my friends। Many a + एकवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया।

Gender, cases, look-alike nouns

Four genders: masculine, feminine, common, neuter. Common gender (doctor, teacher, friend, cousin) needs woman / male / female only when the gender must be shown.चार लिंग: पुल्लिंग, स्त्रीलिंग, उभयलिंग, नपुंसकलिंग। उभयलिंग (doctor, teacher, friend, cousin) में woman / male / female तभी लगाते हैं जब लिंग दिखाना ज़रूरी हो।
Cousin is common gender: my cousin, not my cousin sister.Cousin उभयलिंगी है: my cousin, my cousin sister नहीं।
Prefer gender-neutral words: police officer, firefighter, chairperson, flight attendant, salesperson, batter.लिंग-निष्पक्ष शब्दों को प्राथमिकता दें: police officer, firefighter, chairperson, flight attendant, salesperson, batter।
A noun in apposition and a noun in the vocative are set off by commas. Without the comma, the vocative name turns into the subject. A name that identifies the noun needs no commas (my friend Radhika); a name that only adds information is set off (Radhika, my friend, ...).समानाधिकरण वाली संज्ञा और संबोधन वाली संज्ञा commas (अल्पविराम) से अलग लिखी जाती हैं। Comma के बिना संबोधन वाला नाम कर्ता बन जाता है। जो नाम संज्ञा की पहचान बताता है उसके आसपास commas नहीं लगते (my friend Radhika); जो नाम केवल अतिरिक्त जानकारी जोड़ता है उसे commas से अलग करते हैं (Radhika, my friend, ...)।
A noun looks the same as a subject or an object; only the possessive case changes its form.संज्ञा कर्ता हो या कर्म, उसका रूप वही रहता है; केवल संबंध कारक में रूप बदलता है।
Demise is the noun for a person's death. Scene is countable, scenery is not. Weather is short term, climate long term.Demise किसी की मृत्यु के लिए संज्ञा है। Scene गणनीय है, scenery नहीं। Weather अल्पकालिक, climate दीर्घकालिक।
Confusing pairs: marriage / wedding, weather / climate, centre / middle, house / home, job / work, journey / trip / travel, audience / spectators, customer / client, prize / award / reward, theft / robbery / burglary, poison / venom, shade / shadow, scene / scenery, injury / wound.उलझाने वाले जोड़े: marriage / wedding, weather / climate, centre / middle, house / home, job / work, journey / trip / travel, audience / spectators, customer / client, prize / award / reward, theft / robbery / burglary, poison / venom, shade / shadow, scene / scenery, injury / wound।

Possessive: forming and using

Singular owner → ’s (a girl’s dream). Plural owner ending in -s → ’ only (boys’ hostel). Plural owner not ending in -s → ’s (children’s toys).एकवचन स्वामी → ’s (a girl’s dream)। -s पर समाप्त होने वाला बहुवचन स्वामी → केवल ’ (boys’ hostel)। -s पर समाप्त न होने वाला बहुवचन स्वामी → ’s (children’s toys)।
An apostrophe normally has a thing owned after it. The noun can be left out when it is understood: at the doctor’s, This is Radhika’s, my uncle’s (see the next concept). Otherwise a word with no thing after it is a plain plural: the teachers.अपॉस्ट्रोफी के बाद प्रायः वह वस्तु आती है जिसका वह स्वामी है। संज्ञा समझ में आ रही हो तो उसे छोड़ा जा सकता है: at the doctor’s, This is Radhika’s, my uncle’s (अगला Concept देखिए)। अन्यथा जिस शब्द के बाद कोई वस्तु न हो, वह सादा बहुवचन है: the teachers।
Use ’s with living things, places and countries, time, measurement and personified things: India’s future, a week’s leave, a gram’s weight, the sun’s anger.’s सजीव प्राणियों, स्थानों और देशों, समय, माप और मानवीकृत वस्तुओं के साथ लगाइए: India’s future, a week’s leave, a gram’s weight, the sun’s anger।
Number + time word: either ten days’ leave or a ten-day leave. Never a ten days leave.संख्या + समय-शब्द: या तो ten days’ leave या a ten-day leave। A ten days leave कभी नहीं।
Fixed phrases keep the apostrophe: for God’s sake, at a stone’s throw, at one’s wit’s end, the ship’s passenger, the train’s arrival.स्थिर वाक्यांशों में अपॉस्ट्रोफी रहती है: for God’s sake, at a stone’s throw, at one’s wit’s end, the ship’s passenger, the train’s arrival।

Possessive: 's or of

Living → ’s; non-living → usually of (the leg of the table, the roof of the house). The room’s ceiling and the building’s entrance occur in good writing; in SSC exams prefer of for objects. Places, time, measures, personified and fixed phrases keep ’s.सजीव → ’s; निर्जीव → प्रायः of (the leg of the table, the roof of the house)। The room’s ceiling और the building’s entrance अच्छे लेखन में मिलते हैं; SSC परीक्षा में निर्जीव वस्तुओं के लिए of को चुनिए। स्थान, समय, माप, मानवीकृत और स्थिर वाक्यांशों में ’s चलता है।
Noun modifier = for / kind of (guest room). Possessive = whose (guest’s car). Group exception: children’s hospital, women’s college.Noun (संज्ञा) modifier = के लिए / प्रकार (guest room)। Possessive = किसका (guest’s car)। समूह का अपवाद: children’s hospital, women’s college।
Joint ownership: ’s on the last name (Ram and Sita’s children). Separate ownership: ’s on both (Ram’s and Shyam’s houses).साझा स्वामित्व: ’s अंतिम नाम पर (Ram and Sita’s children)। अलग स्वामित्व: ’s दोनों पर (Ram’s and Shyam’s houses)।
Compound noun: ’s on the last word (my brothers-in-law’s house). With else: everyone else’s, not everyone’s else.यौगिक संज्ञा: ’s अंतिम शब्द पर (my brothers-in-law’s house)। Else के साथ: everyone else’s, everyone’s else नहीं।
No double apostrophe: the parents of Rajat’s wife. No apostrophe on the poor / the rich / the brave: the life of the poor.दो अपॉस्ट्रोफी नहीं: the parents of Rajat’s wife। the poor / the rich / the brave पर अपॉस्ट्रोफी नहीं: the life of the poor।
A noun followed by a describing phrase takes of: the car of the man with a gun. A photo of Ram’s (he owns it); of Ram (he is in it); by Ram (he took it).वर्णन करने वाले वाक्यांश वाली संज्ञा के साथ of आता है: the car of the man with a gun। A photo of Ram’s (मालिक वह है); of Ram (चित्र में वह है); by Ram (उसने खींचा)।
A friend of mine = one of my friends. A place can be shown by a person’s name: at my uncle’s, to the doctor’s.A friend of mine = one of my friends। व्यक्ति के नाम से स्थान का बोध हो सकता है: at my uncle’s, to the doctor’s।

6. Article Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

There are only three articles: a, an and the.आर्टिकल केवल तीन हैं: a, an और the।
A singular countable noun never stands alone: it needs a / an / the or another determiner.एकवचन गणनीय संज्ञा अकेली नहीं आती: उसे a / an / the या कोई और निर्धारक चाहिए।
The order is article, adverb, adjective, noun; a or an is chosen by the word that follows it.क्रम है article, adverb (क्रियाविशेषण), adjective, noun; a या an उसके ठीक बाद वाले शब्द से तय होता है।
A / an depends on the first sound, not the first letter: an hour, a university.A / an पहली ध्वनि से तय होता है, पहले अक्षर से नहीं: an hour, a university।
A / an means one, and is also used for rate, half, jobs and exclamations.A / an का अर्थ one है, और दर, आधा, पेशा और विस्मयादिबोधक में भी आता है।
Use the when the listener knows which one.जब सुनने वाले को पता हो कौन-सा, तब the लगाइए।
The goes with one-of-a-kind things, ordinals, superlatives, only, same and whole.The अद्वितीय वस्तुओं, क्रमवाचक शब्दों, उत्कृष्टतावाचक रूपों, only, same और whole के साथ आता है।
The goes with rivers, seas, mountain ranges, groups of islands, books and newspapers; not with single mountains or countries.The नदियों, सागरों, पर्वत-शृंखलाओं, द्वीप-समूहों, पुस्तकों और समाचार-पत्रों के साथ; अकेले पर्वत या देश के साथ नहीं।
The + adjective names a whole group of people: the poor, the rich.The + विशेषण लोगों का पूरा समूह बताता है: the poor, the rich।
Diseases, subjects, languages and sports take no article.रोग, विषय, भाषाएँ और खेल के साथ कोई आर्टिकल नहीं।
Meals, transport after by, and institutions used for their purpose take no article.भोजन, by के बाद वाहन, और अपने उद्देश्य के लिए संस्थाओं के साथ कोई आर्टिकल नहीं।
To speak about a whole group, use a plural noun with no article.पूरे समूह के बारे में कहना हो तो बहुवचन संज्ञा बिना आर्टिकल के लगाइए।

Singular countable nouns

A singular countable noun never stands alone: it needs a / an / the (or my, this, some…). ✘ She is doctor. ✔ She is a doctor.एकवचन गणनीय संज्ञा कभी अकेली नहीं आती: उसके साथ a / an / the (या my, this, some…) चाहिए। ✘ She is doctor. ✔ She is a doctor.
Listener does not know which one: indefinite, a / an. Listener knows which one: definite, the.सुनने वाले को नहीं पता कौन सा: अनिश्चित (Indefinite), a / an। सुनने वाले को पता है कौन सा: निश्चित (Definite), the।
a / an (and one) go only with a singular countable noun.a / an (और one) केवल एकवचन गणनीय संज्ञा के साथ आते हैं।
Uncountable and plural nouns never take a / an. The is possible only when the noun is definite. ✘ a news, a people ✔ the news of her demiseअगणनीय और बहुवचन संज्ञाओं के साथ a / an कभी नहीं आता। The तभी आ सकता है जब संज्ञा निश्चित हो। ✘ a news, a people ✔ the news of her demise

Order: article, adverb, adjective, noun

An article goes before a noun, never before an adjective that stands alone. ✘ Radhika is an honest. ✔ Radhika is honest.Article संज्ञा के पहले आता है, अकेले विशेषण के पहले कभी नहीं। ✘ Radhika is an honest. ✔ Radhika is honest.
Order: Article + Adverb + Adjective + Noun. ✔ a very good girlक्रम: Article + Adverb (क्रियाविशेषण) + Adjective (विशेषण) + Noun (संज्ञा)। ✔ a very good girl
so / as / too / how / this / that + adjective + a / an + noun ✔ too grave a sinso / as / too / how / this / that + adjective (विशेषण) + a / an + noun (संज्ञा) ✔ too grave a sin
such / quite + a / an + adjective + noun ✔ such a cordial manner

A or an

Consonant sound → a; vowel sound → an. The sound decides, not the spelling.व्यंजन ध्वनि → a; स्वर ध्वनि → an। वर्तनी नहीं, ध्वनि तय करती है।
The article depends on the very next word, even if that word is an adjective or an adverb. ✔ an intelligent boy ✔ a very intelligent boyArticle ठीक अगले शब्द पर निर्भर करता है, चाहे वह विशेषण या क्रियाविशेषण ही क्यों न हो। ✔ an intelligent boy ✔ a very intelligent boy
Silent h takes an: an hour, an honest man, an heir, an honour. Sounded h takes a: a hotel, a house, a historic event.मौन h के साथ an: an hour, an honest man, an heir, an honour। बोले जाने वाले h के साथ a: a hotel, a house, a historic event।
A vowel letter with a yoo or wun sound takes a: a university, a European, a useful book, a unit, a one-rupee coin.यू या वन ध्वनि वाले स्वर अक्षर के साथ a: a university, a European, a useful book, a unit, a one-rupee coin।
Abbreviations are said letter by letter: an FIR, an MLA, an MNC, an M.A., an SBI but a BA, a PhD, a UN envoy, a UFO. An acronym said as a word follows its sound: a NASA scientist, a UNESCO delegate. Always say the letters or the word aloud.संक्षिप्त रूप अक्षर-अक्षर करके बोले जाते हैं: an FIR, an MLA, an MNC, an M.A., an SBI लेकिन a BA, a PhD, a UN envoy, a UFO। जो Acronym एक शब्द की तरह बोला जाता है, वह अपनी ध्वनि के अनुसार चलता है: a NASA scientist, a UNESCO delegate। सदा अक्षरों या शब्द को बोलकर देखिए।
Historical, historic, hotel, humble take a in modern English.Historical, historic, hotel, humble के साथ आधुनिक अंग्रेज़ी में a आता है।

Uses of a / an

a / an = one before dozen, hundred, thousand, lakh, million. ✔ a hundred rupeesdozen, hundred, thousand, lakh, million के पहले a / an = one। ✔ a hundred rupees
a / an = per for a rate: ₹20 a kilo, 80 km an hour, four times a day, seven days a week. For the unit of sale use by the kilo.दर के लिए a / an = per: ₹20 a kilo, 80 km an hour, four times a day, seven days a week। बेचने की इकाई के लिए by the kilo।
Fractions: one and a half hours, three and a half metres.भिन्न: one and a half hours, three and a half metres।
A job or title takes a / an: Radhika is a teacher. Two roles of one person: a teacher and doctor.पेशे या उपाधि के साथ a / an: Radhika is a teacher। एक व्यक्ति की दो भूमिकाएँ: a teacher and doctor।
What + a / an + adjective + noun = How + adjective + a / an + noun.What + a / an + adjective + noun = How + adjective + a / an + noun।

A / an or one; names as common nouns

a / an → identity (what, which, who). one → number (how many).a / an → पहचान (what, which, who)। one → संख्या (how many)।
Use one (not a) with another / other, in one day (some day), as a pronoun (One must not…), and when only is used for counting (only one girl).one (a नहीं) लगाइए another / other के साथ, one day (किसी दिन) में, सर्वनाम की तरह (One must not…), और जब only गिनती के लिए आए (only one girl)।
Name as a type: a Kishore Kumar. Name + of-phrase: the Kishore Kumar of our village. Name + adjective: the run machine Kohli.नाम प्रकार की तरह: a Kishore Kumar। नाम + of-phrase: the Kishore Kumar of our village। नाम + विशेषण: the run machine Kohli।
Appositive: identify → the, extra information → a / an. ✔ Salman, the actor, visited the stadium. ✔ My friend, a computer engineer, came.Appositive: पहचान → the, अतिरिक्त जानकारी → a / an। ✔ Salman, the actor, visited the stadium. ✔ My friend, a computer engineer, came.

The: definite nouns

The = both speaker and listener know which one. A / an = new, unknown, or one of many.The = बोलने और सुनने वाले दोनों को पता है कि कौन सा। A / an = नया, अनजान, या कई में से एक।
Second mention → the. ✔ a prince … the princeदूसरी बार उल्लेख → the। ✔ a prince … the prince
A defining clause or phrase after the noun → the. If the sense is still one of many → a / an. A following who / which clause or of phrase does not decide by itself; ask whether the speaker and the listener both know which one it is. ✔ the person who met me / a person who knows Hindiसंज्ञा के बाद परिभाषित करने वाला उपवाक्य या पदबंध → the। अगर फिर भी one of many का भाव है → a / an। बाद में आने वाला who / which clause (उपवाक्य) या of phrase (पदबंध) अकेले निर्णय नहीं करता; पूछिए कि क्या आप दोनों जानते हैं कि कौन-सा वाला है। ✔ the person who met me / a person who knows Hindi
Only one exists → the. ✔ the thumb of my left handकेवल एक ही है → the। ✔ the thumb of my left hand
A place or position points to one noun → the: pass the salt; go to the bank, the doctor, the police.स्थान या स्थिति एक ही संज्ञा की ओर संकेत करे → the: pass the salt; go to the bank, the doctor, the police।

The: unique things, ordinals, only, same, whole

One-of-a-kind and universally known things take the: the Sun, the Earth, the sky, the world, the universe, the past, the present, the future.अद्वितीय और सबको ज्ञात वस्तुओं के साथ the: the Sun, the Earth, the sky, the world, the universe, the past, the present, the future (भविष्य)।
The + ordinal + noun. A possessive can replace the (my first book), and a / an + ordinal means 'one more' (a second attempt). ✔ the third person, the first amputeeThe + क्रमसूचक + noun। the की जगह Possessive आ सकता है (my first book), और a / an + क्रमसूचक का अर्थ 'एक और' होता है (a second attempt)। ✔ the third person, the first amputee
The + same / whole / very + noun. A whole day and the whole day both occur; the exam item expects the whole ... when the noun is definite (the whole country). ✔ the same colour, the whole countryThe + same / whole / very + noun। A whole day और the whole day दोनों मिलते हैं; संज्ञा निश्चित हो तो परीक्षा में the whole ... ही चाहिए (the whole country)। ✔ the same colour, the whole country
The only + noun (definite) but only a / an + noun (stress). An only child is also correct (a child with no brothers or sisters). ✔ the only book you need / only a bookThe only + noun (निश्चित) लेकिन only a / an + noun (ज़ोर)। An only child भी सही है (जिस बच्चे का कोई भाई-बहन न हो)। ✔ the only book you need / only a book

The with names

The goes with rivers, seas, oceans, gulfs, canals, deserts, forests, mountain ranges and groups of islands, lakes or people. ✔ the Ganga, the Arabian Sea, the Sahara Desert, the Himalayas, the Great LakesThe लगता है नदियों, समुद्रों, महासागरों, खाड़ियों, नहरों, रेगिस्तानों, वनों, पर्वत-शृंखलाओं और द्वीपों, झीलों या लोगों के समूहों के साथ। ✔ the Ganga, the Arabian Sea, the Sahara Desert, the Himalayas, the Great Lakes
No the with a single peak, a single lake named with Lake, other planets, cities, countries (mostly), religions and Hudson Bay / Cape Horn. ✘ the Mount Everest, the HinduismThe नहीं लगता अकेली चोटी, Lake वाली अकेली झील, बाकी ग्रहों, शहरों, देशों (अधिकतर), धर्मों और Hudson Bay / Cape Horn के साथ। ✘ the Mount Everest, the Hinduism
The goes with famous buildings, trains, ships, newspapers, hotels, religious books, armed forces, musical instruments and trophies. Many palaces and castles carry no article (Buckingham Palace, Windsor Castle); learn the standard list. ✔ the Taj Mahal, The Hindu, the Geeta, the guitarThe लगता है प्रसिद्ध इमारतों, रेलगाड़ियों, जहाज़ों, समाचार-पत्रों, होटलों, धार्मिक ग्रंथों, सशस्त्र सेनाओं, वाद्य यंत्रों और ट्रॉफ़ियों के साथ। कई महलों और क़िलों के साथ article नहीं आता (Buckingham Palace, Windsor Castle); मानक सूची सीख लें। ✔ the Taj Mahal, The Hindu, the Geeta, the guitar
Organisations: abbreviation (letter by letter) takes the: the UN, the WTO. Acronym (read as a word) takes none: UNESCO, NASA, ISRO. Use the usual name of the organisation (the United Nations, UNESCO, Parliament); there is no single pattern for all organisations.संस्थाएँ: abbreviation (अक्षर-अक्षर) में the: the UN, the WTO। Acronym (एक शब्द की तरह) में नहीं: UNESCO, NASA, ISRO। संस्था का प्रचलित नाम ही प्रयोग कीजिए (the United Nations, UNESCO, Parliament); सभी संस्थाओं पर एक ही Concept लागू नहीं होता।
Plural names of people and places take the: the Sharmas, the Andamans, the Philippines.लोगों और स्थानों के बहुवचन नामों के साथ the: the Sharmas, the Andamans, the Philippines।
A direction used as a noun takes the (in the east). Used as an adjective, the following noun decides: north India but the northern United States.संज्ञा की तरह दिशा के साथ the (in the east)। विशेषण की तरह हो तो आगे की संज्ञा तय करती है: north India लेकिन the northern United States।
A common noun standing for a quality or feeling takes the: the doctor in him, the mother in her.गुण या भावना दिखाने वाली जातिवाचक संज्ञा के साथ the: the doctor in him, the mother in her।

Parts of the day and fixed phrases

Parts of the day: in / during / on + article (in the morning); at / by / after / before + no article (at night, at noon).दिन के भाग: in / during / on + article (in the morning); at / by / after / before + बिना article (at night, at noon)।
With on the article is a, with an adjective possible: on a cold morning. With of after it: on the morning of Diwali.On के साथ article a, बीच में विशेषण भी आ सकता है: on a cold morning। आगे of हो तो: on the morning of Diwali।
Fixed phrases with a / an: in a rage, in a hurry, in a mood, in a fix, in a dilemma, in a temper; at a loss, at a pinch, at a low ebb.a / an वाले निश्चित मुहावरे: in a rage, in a hurry, in a mood, in a fix, in a dilemma, in a temper; at a loss, at a pinch, at a low ebb।
With have / take / go for: have a drink, rest, walk, headache, dream, chat, quarrel; take a risk, rest, hint; go for a walk; award a scholarship.have / take / go for के साथ: have a drink, rest, walk, headache, dream, chat, quarrel; take a risk, rest, hint; go for a walk; award a scholarship।
Fixed phrases with the: at the eleventh hour, all the best, bite the dust, beat around the bush, castles in the air, hit below the belt, set / raise the bar, salt of the Earth, kick the bucket, under the influence of.the वाले निश्चित मुहावरे: at the eleventh hour, all the best, bite the dust, beat around the bush, castles in the air, hit below the belt, set / raise the bar, salt of the Earth, kick the bucket, under the influence of।

The with adjectives

The + adjective = all such people, with a plural verb and no s. ✔ The poor are helped by the rich. ✘ the poorsThe + adjective = ऐसे सभी लोग, बहुवचन क्रिया के साथ और बिना s के। ✔ The poor are helped by the rich. ✘ the poors
The + comparative when it is a noun (the braver of the two, the former, the latter) or for parallel change (the harder … the stronger).The + तुलनात्मक जब वह संज्ञा की तरह हो (the braver of the two, the former, the latter) या साथ-साथ बदलाव के लिए (the harder … the stronger)।
A true superlative takes the: the best of all, the fastest method. A possessive can stand in place of the (my best friend); best without the is correct in Which is best? and She sings best in the morning.सच्ची उत्तमावस्था के साथ the: the best of all, the fastest method। the की जगह Possessive आ सकता है (my best friend); Which is best? और She sings best in the morning में best बिना the के सही है।
most = very → a most beautiful girl. most = one out of all → the most beautiful girl of our class.most = very → a most beautiful girl। most = सबमें से एक → the most beautiful girl of our class।
Same person in different situations: no the. ✔ She is best in the mornings. ✔ He is nicest when he is with children.एक ही व्यक्ति अलग स्थितियों में: the नहीं। ✔ She is best in the mornings. ✔ He is nicest when he is with children.

No article I

No article before diseases, lakes, subjects, languages, sports, festivals, most countries and cities, proper nouns, God, heaven, hell and religions.इनके पहले article नहीं: रोग, झीलें, विषय, भाषाएँ, खेल, त्योहार, अधिकतर देश और शहर, व्यक्तिवाचक संज्ञाएँ, God, heaven, hell और धर्म।
Exceptions: the flu, plague; a cold, headache, toothache, cough, fever. Measles and mumps usually take no article (She has measles); the measles also occurs. The USA, UK, Netherlands, Maldives.अपवाद: the flu, plague; a cold, headache, toothache, cough, fever। Measles और mumps के साथ प्रायः article नहीं आता (She has measles); the measles भी मिलता है। The USA, UK, Netherlands, Maldives।
Bare name of a language, colour or subject: no article. With the word language / colour / subject added: the. ✔ Hindi, the Hindi language; red, the red colourभाषा, रंग या विषय का केवल नाम: article नहीं। साथ में language / colour / subject (कर्ता) शब्द हो: the। ✔ Hindi, the Hindi language; red, the red colour
The + language of a nation = all the people of that nation: the English, the Chinese. As an adjective: She is English.The + किसी राष्ट्र की भाषा = उस राष्ट्र के सभी लोग: the English, the Chinese। विशेषण की तरह: She is English।
a lot of, a great deal of, a large amount of, a good many, a great many, a great number of keep a. Plenty of never takes a.a lot of, a great deal of, a large amount of, a good many, a great many, a great number of में a रहता है। Plenty of के साथ a कभी नहीं।
After type of, kind of, sort of, amount of, number of the noun takes no article. ✔ this kind of treatment ✘ What type of a gametype of, kind of, sort of, amount of, number of के बाद संज्ञा के साथ article नहीं आता। ✔ this kind of treatment ✘ What type of a game

No article II

Meals have no article; with an adjective → a / an; with a relative clause, participle or of → the. ✔ lunch / a delicious lunch / the lunch hosted by Mr Sharmaभोजन के साथ article नहीं; विशेषण हो → a / an; relative clause (संबंधवाचक उपवाक्य), participle (कृदंत) या of हो → the। ✔ lunch / a delicious lunch / the lunch hosted by Mr Sharma
Seasons take no article (in winter); with the word season: in the winter season.ऋतुओं के साथ article नहीं (in winter); season शब्द हो तो: in the winter season।
By + transport / communication: no article (by bus, by air, by phone). A specific vehicle: on a bus / train / plane / bike, in a car / taxi / ambulance. A time given: by the 8 o'clock train. Walking: on foot.By + यातायात / संचार: article नहीं (by bus, by air, by phone)। विशिष्ट वाहन: on a bus / train / plane / bike, in a car / taxi / ambulance। समय दिया हो: by the 8 o'clock train। पैदल: on foot।
School, college, university, church, temple, jail, prison, hospital, bed: no article for the primary purpose; the for any other purpose. In British English go to hospital (as a patient); in American English go to the hospital is normal. SSC keys follow the British pattern; if both appear in the options, choose the one without the for the patient's purpose. ✔ taken to hospital for treatment / went to the church to meet a friendSchool, college, university, church, temple, jail, prison, hospital, bed: मुख्य उद्देश्य में article नहीं; किसी और उद्देश्य में the। British English में go to hospital (रोगी के रूप में); American English में go to the hospital सामान्य है। SSC की उत्तर-कुंजी British पद्धति पर चलती है; दोनों विकल्पों में हों तो रोगी के उद्देश्य के लिए बिना the वाला चुनिए। ✔ taken to hospital for treatment / went to the church to meet a friend
Body parts and relations take possessive words, not the: hit him in the stomach (reference clear), both my brothers.शरीर के अंगों और संबंधों के साथ the नहीं, अधिकार-सूचक शब्द: hit him in the stomach (संदर्भ स्पष्ट), both my brothers।
No article with titles (Queen Elizabeth), object complements (appointed him manager) and vocatives (Good morning, teacher!).Article नहीं उपाधि (Queen Elizabeth), कर्म-पूरक (appointed him manager) और संबोधन (Good morning, teacher!) के साथ।
Zero-article phrases: in demand, in time, in doubt, in confusion, in short, in detail, in danger, in crisis, in life, in debt, in haste, in difficulty, in trouble; on demand, on time, on strike, on foot, on leave, on earth, on fire, on duty, on payment; by post, by bus, by chance, by mistake.शून्य-article वाले मुहावरे: in demand, in time, in doubt, in confusion, in short, in detail, in danger, in crisis, in life, in debt, in haste, in difficulty, in trouble; on demand, on time, on strike, on foot, on leave, on earth, on fire, on duty, on payment; by post, by bus, by chance, by mistake।
More zero-article phrases: take heart, lose heart, take action, take care, catch fire, set sth on fire, last but not least, in black and white, write in pen / pencil; double expressions with knife and fork, day after day, arm in arm, husband and wife.और शून्य-article वाले मुहावरे: take heart, lose heart, take action, take care, catch fire, set sth on fire, last but not least, in black and white, write in pen / pencil; युग्म अभिव्यक्तियाँ with knife and fork, day after day, arm in arm, husband and wife।

Generalising

Plural and uncountable nouns in the general sense take no article. ✔ Teachers work for long hours. ✔ Salt is obtained from seawater.सामान्य अर्थ में बहुवचन और अगणनीय संज्ञाओं के साथ article नहीं आता। ✔ Teachers work for long hours. ✔ Salt is obtained from seawater.
The same noun with a defining phrase takes the: The sugar present in fruits is less harmful.परिभाषित करने वाले पद के साथ वही संज्ञा the लेती है: The sugar present in fruits is less harmful।
The + singular noun = the whole class: the tiger, the rose, the telephone, the dollar, the guitar, the bulb. Play the guitar (the instrument in general) is the usual form; play a guitar is grammatical when it means one particular guitar. In the exam choose the for the instrument in general.The + एकवचन संज्ञा = पूरा वर्ग: the tiger, the rose, the telephone, the dollar, the guitar, the bulb। Play the guitar (वाद्य यंत्र की सामान्य बात) प्रचलित रूप है; play a guitar तब सही है जब कोई एक विशेष guitar हो। परीक्षा में वाद्य यंत्र की सामान्य बात के लिए the चुनिए।
Animals: the for the whole community, a / an for any one: A cow is a useful animal. The cow is a useful animal.जानवर: पूरे समुदाय के लिए the, किसी एक के लिए a / an: A cow is a useful animal. The cow is a useful animal.
A profession or relation in general can take a / an or the (A policeman's life is not easy; The policeman's life ... can be generic). The exam question makes the sense clear; it should be read before choosing. Man (mankind) takes none.पेशे या संबंध की सामान्य बात में a / an या the दोनों आ सकते हैं (A policeman's life is not easy; The policeman's life ... भी सामान्य हो सकता है)। परीक्षा का प्रश्न अर्थ स्पष्ट कर देगा; चुनने से पहले उसे पढ़िए। Man (मानवजाति) के साथ कुछ नहीं।

7. Pronoun Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A pronoun does the job of a noun: subject, object or owner. Pick its form by the job.सर्वनाम संज्ञा का काम करता है: कर्ता, कर्म या मालिक। काम के अनुसार उसका रूप चुनिए।
Before a verb I, we, he, she, they; after a verb or a preposition me, us, him, her, them: between you and me.क्रिया से पहले I, we, he, she, they; क्रिया या पूर्वसर्ग के बाद me, us, him, her, them: between you and me।
After than / as … as, a printed verb decides the form: taller than I am. With no verb, than me is also accepted in everyday English.than / as … as के बाद छपी हुई क्रिया रूप तय करती है: taller than I am। क्रिया न हो तो रोज़मर्रा की अंग्रेज़ी में than me भी चलता है।
A determiner has a noun after it, a pronoun stands alone: your book, but the book is yours.निर्धारक के बाद संज्ञा आती है, सर्वनाम अकेला खड़ा होता है: your book, but the book is yours।
Its = belonging to it; it’s = it is / it has. Before a gerund use the possessive: my ignoring.Its = उसका; it’s = it is / it has। Gerund (क्रियावाचक संज्ञा) से पहले Possessive लगाएँ: my ignoring।
Courtesy order: positive you, he and I; blame I, you and he; we first, you before the third person.शिष्टाचार-क्रम: सकारात्मक बात में you, he and I; दोष में I, you and he; we पहले, you अन्य पुरुष से पहले।
There is the introductory subject, their shows ownership, they’re = they are. It is for time, weather and distance.There प्रस्तावना वाला कर्ता है, their स्वामित्व दिखाता है, they’re = they are। समय, मौसम और दूरी के लिए it।
A reflexive is used when subject and object are the same; it is never a subject, and never follows an intransitive verb.Reflexive तब लगता है जब कर्ता और कर्म एक ही हों; यह कभी कर्ता नहीं बनता, और अकर्मक क्रिया के बाद नहीं आता।
Each other (two) and one another (more than two) is the traditional pairing the exam follows; neither is ever a subject.Each other (दो) और one another (दो से अधिक) वह परंपरागत जोड़ी है जिसे परीक्षा मानती है; दोनों में से कोई कभी कर्ता नहीं बनता।
In a comparison use that of / those of so that like is compared with like.तुलना में that of / those of लगाएँ ताकि बराबर की वस्तुओं की तुलना हो।
Each, either, neither take a singular verb (the exam keeps none singular too); neither is for two, none for more than two.Each, either, neither के साथ एकवचन क्रिया आती है (परीक्षा none को भी एकवचन रखती है); neither दो के लिए, none दो से अधिक के लिए।
With some of, all of, half of the verb follows the noun after of; with everyone, everything it is singular.Some of, all of, half of के साथ क्रिया of के बाद वाली संज्ञा के अनुसार; everyone, everything के साथ एकवचन।
One … one’s … oneself go together; the substitute one takes no a directly before it.One … one’s … oneself साथ चलते हैं; स्थानापन्न one के ठीक पहले a नहीं लगता।
Relative pronouns: who (subject), whom (object), whose (possession); see the job inside the clause, and count verbs and subjects as a quick check.Relative pronouns (संबंधवाचक सर्वनाम): who (कर्ता), whom (कर्म), whose (स्वामित्व); उपवाक्य के भीतर का काम देखें, और तेज़ जाँच के लिए क्रियाएँ व कर्ता गिनिए।
The verb of a relative clause agrees with its antecedent; a non-defining clause has commas and never takes that.संबंधवाचक उपवाक्य की क्रिया अपने पूर्ववर्ती से मेल खाती है; अनिर्धारक उपवाक्य में अल्पविराम होते हैं और that कभी नहीं आता।

Personal pronouns and cases

Before a verb (as its subject): I, we, he, she, they. After a verb or a preposition: me, us, him, her, them.क्रिया से पहले (उसके कर्ता के रूप में): I, we, he, she, they। क्रिया या पूर्वसर्ग के बाद: me, us, him, her, them।
After as … as, so … as, than: with a verb after the pronoun, use the subject form (taller than I am, faster than I do). Without a verb, than me (taller than me) is standard, everyday English and than I is the formal choice. In SSC exams the printed verb decides: where a verb follows, choose the subject form.as … as, so … as, than के बाद: यदि सर्वनाम के बाद क्रिया लिखी हो, तो कर्ता रूप (Subjective) आता है (taller than I am, faster than I do)। क्रिया न हो तो than me (taller than me) रोज़मर्रा की मानक अंग्रेज़ी है और than I औपचारिक विकल्प है। SSC परीक्षा में छपी हुई क्रिया ही निर्णय करती है: जहाँ क्रिया आगे लिखी हो, वहाँ कर्ता रूप चुनिए।
After a linking verb the formal form is the subject case (It was I). In everyday English It is me is normal and not an error. SSC fill-ins keep the subject case when only the two forms are offered.योजक क्रिया के बाद औपचारिक रूप कर्ता कारक (Subjective case) है (It was I)। रोज़मर्रा की अंग्रेज़ी में It is me सामान्य है और त्रुटि नहीं है। SSC के रिक्त-स्थान प्रश्नों में जब केवल दो रूप दिए हों, तो Subjective case (कर्ता कारक) ही रखा जाता है।
Two words joined by and take the same case. Drop the other word and test.and से जुड़े दोनों शब्द एक ही कारक में आते हैं। दूसरा शब्द हटाकर जाँचिए।
Like, except, but (= except), between, let are followed by the objective case.Like, except, but (= except), between, let के बाद Objective case (कर्म कारक) आता है।

Possessives

A possessive determiner stands before a noun (my, our, your, her, its, their). A possessive pronoun stands alone (mine, ours, yours, hers, theirs).Possessive determiner (स्वामित्वबोधक निर्धारक) संज्ञा से पहले आता है (my, our, your, her, its, their)। Possessive pronoun (स्वामित्वबोधक सर्वनाम) अकेला आता है (mine, ours, yours, hers, theirs)।
His works both ways. Its has no pronoun form, so it never stands alone.His दोनों तरह चलता है। Its का सर्वनाम रूप नहीं होता, इसलिए यह कभी अकेला नहीं आता।
its = belonging to it (noun follows). it’s = it is / it has (subject + verb).its = उसका (आगे संज्ञा)। it’s = it is / it has (कर्ता + क्रिया)।
Before a gerund use the possessive determiner: my ignoring, his winning (formal; everyday English often says me ignoring; SSC chooses the possessive).Gerund (क्रियावाचक संज्ञा) से पहले Possessive determiner (स्वामित्वबोधक निर्धारक) लगाएँ: my ignoring, his winning (यह औपचारिक रूप है; रोज़मर्रा की अंग्रेज़ी में अक्सर me ignoring भी बोलते हैं; SSC Possessive चुनता है)।
Leave of you, mention of him, sight of me, favour from you: do not put the possessive in front when the other person is the one affected.Leave of you, mention of him, sight of me, favour from you: जब प्रभाव दूसरे व्यक्ति पर हो तो Possessive आगे नहीं लगाते।

Sequence and common person

Courtesy order of pronouns (SSC convention, not a grammar law): 2 – 3 – 1 in a pleasant sentence, 1 – 2 – 3 for blame, apology or a duty.सर्वनामों का शिष्टाचार-क्रम (SSC की परिपाटी है, व्याकरण का Concept नहीं): सुखद वाक्य में 2 – 3 – 1, दोष, क्षमा या कर्तव्य में 1 – 2 – 3।
A courtesy order that SSC tests: blame, apology, responsibility or a negative idea → 1 – 2 – 3 (I, you and he); a positive statement → 2 – 3 – 1 (You, he and I).SSC जो शिष्टाचार-क्रम जाँचता है: दोष, क्षमा, ज़िम्मेदारी या नकारात्मक बात → 1 – 2 – 3 (I, you and he); सकारात्मक बात → 2 – 3 – 1 (You, he and I)।
We always comes first. You always comes before the 3rd person.We हमेशा पहले आता है। You हमेशा 3rd person से पहले आता है।
Common person: 1st person present → we / our; else 2nd present → you / your; else they / their.उभयनिष्ठ पुरुष: 1st person हो → we / our; नहीं तो 2nd हो → you / your; नहीं तो they / their।

It and there

It = one thing, animal, baby, place or time. They = many. A singular noun is never picked up by they.It = एक वस्तु, पशु, शिशु, स्थान या समय। They = बहुत सारे। एकवचन संज्ञा के लिए they कभी नहीं।
Empty it for time, weather, temperature and distance: It is raining, It is 5 o’clock.समय, मौसम, तापमान और दूरी के लिए Empty it: It is raining, It is 5 o’clock।
It + infinitive / that-clause puts the real subject later: It was easy to go.It + infinitive (मूल क्रिया-रूप) / that-clause (संज्ञा उपवाक्य) असली कर्ता को बाद में रखता है: It was easy to go।
There introduces a person or thing that exists, and the verb agrees with what comes after it. A question needs Is there …?, not Is it …?.There किसी अस्तित्व वाले व्यक्ति या वस्तु को प्रस्तुत करता है, और क्रिया उसके बाद वाली संज्ञा से मेल खाती है। प्रश्न में Is there …? आता है, Is it …? नहीं।
there (subject) / they’re (they are) / their (belonging to them).there (कर्ता) / they’re (they are) / their (उनका)।

Reflexive pronouns

Subject and object are the same person or thing → reflexive (I saw myself).कर्ता और कर्म एक ही हों → Reflexive (निजवाचक) (I saw myself)।
A reflexive is never a subject: Myself is Shivani → I am Shivani.Reflexive (निजवाचक) कभी कर्ता नहीं बनता: Myself is Shivani → I am Shivani।
A preposition of possession or place takes him / her: with him, behind him.स्वामित्व या स्थान वाले पूर्वसर्ग के बाद him / her आता है: with him, behind him।
Transitive verbs (enjoy, avail, express, injure, introduce, absent, pride, devote) with no other object take a reflexive; in the passive they do not.सकर्मक क्रियाओं (enjoy, avail, express, injure, introduce, absent, pride, devote) के साथ कोई और कर्म न हो तो Reflexive (निजवाचक) आता है; कर्मवाच्य में नहीं।
Intransitive verbs (sleep, come) and ergative verbs (hide, keep, stop, turn, move, wash) take no reflexive.अकर्मक क्रियाओं (sleep, come) और ergative क्रियाओं (hide, keep, stop, turn, move, wash) के साथ Reflexive नहीं आता।
In an order, the hidden subject is you: yourself, not myself or you.आदेश वाले वाक्य में छिपा कर्ता you है: yourself, myself या you नहीं।
Two meanings: apply for (ask) / apply oneself to (devote); resign from / resign oneself to; acquit somebody of / acquit oneself; absent / present as a verb takes oneself, as an adjective it does not.दो अर्थ: apply for (आवेदन) / apply oneself to (समर्पित होना); resign from / resign oneself to; acquit somebody of / acquit oneself; absent / present क्रिया हो तो oneself लेता है, विशेषण हो तो नहीं।
Reflexive form follows the noun: male himself, female herself, thing itself, any plural themselves.Reflexive रूप संज्ञा के अनुसार: पुल्लिंग himself, स्त्रीलिंग herself, वस्तु itself, कोई भी बहुवचन themselves।

Emphatic and reciprocal pronouns

Emphatic = stress only: I myself did it. It sits right after the subject or at the end, never between the verb and its object.Emphatic (बलवाचक) = केवल बल: I myself did it। यह कर्ता के ठीक बाद या अंत में आता है, क्रिया और कर्म के बीच कभी नहीं।
Each other and one another both express a mutual action. Traditional teaching uses each other for two and one another for more than two; modern dictionaries accept either for any number. In SSC exams, follow the traditional pairing when both are offered.Each other और one another दोनों आपसी क्रिया बताते हैं। परंपरागत शिक्षण में each other दो के लिए और one another दो से अधिक के लिए आता है; आधुनिक शब्दकोश किसी भी संख्या के लिए दोनों मान लेते हैं। SSC परीक्षा में जब दोनों विकल्प हों, तो परंपरागत जोड़ी मानें।
A reciprocal pronoun is an object and can take ’s (each other’s). It is never a subject: use the other or each.Reciprocal pronoun (परस्परवाचक सर्वनाम) कर्म होता है और इसमें ’s लग सकता है (each other’s)। यह कभी कर्ता नहीं बनता: the other या each लगाइए।
Reflexive = the action returns to the doer. Reciprocal = the action goes both ways between two or more. Read the sense.Reflexive = क्रिया करने वाले पर लौटती है। Reciprocal (परस्परवाचक) = क्रिया दो या अधिक के बीच दोनों ओर जाती है। अर्थ पढ़िए।

Demonstrative pronouns

This / these = near and present. That / those = far and past. Singular with this/that, plural with these/those.This / these = पास और वर्तमान। That / those = दूर और भूतकाल। This/that के साथ एकवचन, these/those के साथ बहुवचन।
In a comparison, replace the repeated noun: that of (singular), those of / in (plural). Compare like with like.तुलना में दोहराई जा रही संज्ञा की जगह लगाएँ: that of (एकवचन), those of / in (बहुवचन)। बराबर की वस्तुओं की तुलना कीजिए।
Two nouns: this / these for the last-named (nearer), that / those for the earlier one.दो संज्ञाओं में: अंत में आई (पास वाली) के लिए this / these, पहली के लिए that / those।
Those who (not they who). It for time, distance and weather; it identifies, this introduces.Those who (they who नहीं)। समय, दूरी और मौसम के लिए it; it पहचान बताता है, this परिचय देता है।

Distributive and fractional pronouns

Each, either, neither + of + plural noun take a singular verb. None of and any of take a singular verb in formal English (None of the students is ready) and are often followed by a plural verb in everyday usage (None of the students are ready). SSC keys prefer the singular; the plural is not a mistake in real English.Each, either, neither + of + बहुवचन संज्ञा के साथ एकवचन क्रिया आती है। None of और any of के साथ औपचारिक अंग्रेज़ी में एकवचन क्रिया आती है (None of the students is ready), और रोज़मर्रा की अंग्रेज़ी में अक्सर बहुवचन क्रिया भी चलती है (None of the students are ready)। SSC की keys में एकवचन को वरीयता दी जाती है; असली अंग्रेज़ी में बहुवचन कोई गलती नहीं है।
Neither = two; none and any = more than two. Either = one of two; each = every one.Neither = दो; none और any = दो से अधिक। Either = दो में से एक; each = प्रत्येक।
None / neither are negative: no not, never, hardly, little, few with them. Both is never used with not.None / neither स्वयं नकारात्मक हैं: इनके साथ not, never, hardly, little, few नहीं। Both के साथ not नहीं।
Every is only a determiner: every of → each of / every one of.Every केवल निर्धारक है: every of → each of / every one of।
Fractional pronoun + of: the verb follows the noun after of (some of the boys are, all of the milk is). Both is always plural.अंशवाचक + of: क्रिया, of के बाद वाली संज्ञा के अनुसार (some of the boys are, all of the milk is)। Both हमेशा बहुवचन।

Indefinite pronouns and ‘one’

Someone, anyone, everyone, no one, something, anything, everything, nothing + singular verb.Someone, anyone, everyone, no one, something, anything, everything, nothing + एकवचन क्रिया।
A later pronoun can be he / she, his / her (the formal exam choice) or they / their (accepted in modern English). Verb agreement is a separate matter: everyone takes a singular verb (Everyone has their own ID card, not Everyone have). In SSC exams, when the options offer his/her and their, follow the official key pattern: choose his/her if the sentence gives no gender cue.बाद का सर्वनाम he / she, his / her हो सकता है (परीक्षा का औपचारिक विकल्प) या they / their (आधुनिक अंग्रेज़ी में स्वीकार्य)। क्रिया का मेल अलग बात है: everyone के साथ एकवचन क्रिया आती है (Everyone has their own ID card, Everyone have नहीं)। SSC परीक्षा में जब विकल्पों में his/her और their दोनों हों, तो आधिकारिक key का पैटर्न मानें: यदि वाक्य में लिंग का कोई संकेत न हो, तो his/her चुनिए।
Everyone of is wrong. Use every one of or each of.Everyone of गलत है। every one of या each of लगाइए।
Collective noun acting as one unit → it / its. Members acting separately → they / their.समूहवाचक संज्ञा एक इकाई की तरह → it / its। सदस्य अलग-अलग → they / their।
One for people in general: one … one’s … oneself. Never his, her, he, they with it.सामान्य व्यक्ति के लिए one: one … one’s … oneself। इसके साथ कभी his, her, he, they नहीं।
Substitute one / ones takes the place of a countable noun already named. No a / an directly before it; a + adjective + one is fine.स्थानापन्न one / ones पहले आई गणनीय संज्ञा की जगह लेता है। सीधे उसके आगे a / an नहीं; a + विशेषण + one ठीक है।
One of + plural noun + singular verb: One of the students has …One of + बहुवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया: One of the students has …
It = a known, definite thing. One = any thing of that kind.It = जानी हुई, निश्चित वस्तु। One = उस प्रकार की कोई भी वस्तु।

Relative pronouns

Who = human subject, whom = human object, whose = possession (it can refer to things too: a table whose legs are broken). Which = non-human. That = both.Who = मनुष्य कर्ता, whom = मनुष्य कर्म, whose = स्वामित्व (यह वस्तुओं के लिए भी आ सकता है: a table whose legs are broken)। Which = अमनुष्य। That = दोनों।
To choose who or whom, see the job of the pronoun inside its own clause: a subject of a verb → who; an object (of a verb or preposition) → whom. Counting verbs and subjects is a quick method for this: a verb with no subject → who. Every verb has its subject → whom.Who या whom चुनने के लिए देखें कि सर्वनाम अपने उपवाक्य के भीतर क्या काम कर रहा है: क्रिया का कर्ता → who; (क्रिया या पूर्वसर्ग का) कर्म → whom। इसका एक तेज़ तरीका है क्रियाएँ और कर्ता गिनना: बिना कर्ता वाली क्रिया हो → who। हर क्रिया का कर्ता है → whom।
That is preferred after all, none, both, few, little, any, nothing, only, superlative, very, same. After the same / such: that or as. (Keep the SSC answer pattern: prefer that.)That को प्राथमिकता मिलती है all, none, both, few, little, any, nothing, only, उत्तमावस्था, very, same के बाद। the same / such के बाद: that या as। (SSC का उत्तर-पैटर्न रखें: that को वरीयता दें।)
After a preposition: whom / which only, never that or who. A preposition at the end allows any of them, or none.पूर्वसर्ग के बाद: केवल whom / which, that या who कभी नहीं। पूर्वसर्ग अंत में हो तो कोई भी चलता है, या कुछ भी नहीं।
An apostrophe noun is not an antecedent: use of + noun. No antecedent for that → use what.Apostrophe वाली संज्ञा पूर्ववर्ती नहीं बनती: of + संज्ञा लगाइए। that के लिए पूर्ववर्ती न हो → what लगाइए।
The verb of a relative clause agrees with the antecedent, not with the nearest word: I who am, It is he who works.संबंधवाचक उपवाक्य की क्रिया पूर्ववर्ती से मेल खाती है, पास वाले शब्द से नहीं: I who am, It is he who works।
One of those who + plural verb; the only one of those who + singular verb.One of those who + बहुवचन क्रिया; the only one of those who + एकवचन क्रिया।
Non-defining clause: commas, no that, no dropping. Who for a person, whom for the object, never which for a person.अनिर्धारक उपवाक्य: अल्पविराम, that नहीं, हटाना नहीं। व्यक्ति के लिए who, कर्म के लिए whom, व्यक्ति के लिए which कभी नहीं।
A defining object pronoun can be dropped; a subject pronoun never.निर्धारक उपवाक्य का कर्म वाला सर्वनाम हट सकता है; कर्ता वाला कभी नहीं।
Which can refer to a whole clause; that cannot. No conjunction (but which) with a relative pronoun.Which पूरे उपवाक्य का संदर्भ दे सकता है; that नहीं। संबंधवाचक सर्वनाम के साथ समुच्चयबोधक (but which) नहीं।
A relative clause can be reduced to a participle phrase: the girl who is wearing a red dress → the girl wearing a red dress. After a negative antecedent but = who … not: There is no mother but loves her child.संबंधवाचक उपवाक्य को कृदंत पदबंध में बदल सकते हैं: the girl who is wearing a red dress → the girl wearing a red dress। नकारात्मक पूर्ववर्ती के बाद but = who … not: There is no mother but loves her child.

Compound relative and interrogative pronouns

Whoever, whomever, whatever, whichever = antecedent + relative pronoun in one word (anyone who, anyone whom, anything that).Whoever, whomever, whatever, whichever = एक ही शब्द में पूर्ववर्ती + संबंधवाचक सर्वनाम (anyone who, anyone whom, anything that)।
Two verbs and only one subject word → whoever. Two verbs and only one object word → whomever.दो क्रियाएँ और कर्ता वाला शब्द एक → whoever। दो क्रियाएँ और कर्म वाला शब्द एक → whomever।
Who = subject, whom = object. Who do you think will win? keeps who, because will win needs a subject.Who = कर्ता, whom = कर्म। Who do you think will win? में who ही रहता है, क्योंकि will win को कर्ता चाहिए।
Which = limited choice, which of. What = unlimited choice, what kind of. Why, where, when, how are adverbs.Which = सीमित चुनाव, which of। What = असीमित चुनाव, what kind of। Why, where, when, how क्रिया-विशेषण हैं।

8. Question Tags Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A tag is a mini question at the end of a statement. It asks for the listener's confirmation.Tag कथन के अंत में लगा छोटा प्रश्न है। वह सुनने वाले से पुष्टि माँगता है।
Three checks: sign, pronoun, helping verb.तीन जाँच: चिह्न, सर्वनाम, सहायक क्रिया।
Positive statement, negative tag. Negative statement, positive tag.सकारात्मक कथन, नकारात्मक tag। नकारात्मक कथन, सकारात्मक tag।
The tag has only two words: helping verb + pronoun. No noun, no main verb, no change of tense.Tag में केवल दो शब्द: सहायक क्रिया + सर्वनाम। न संज्ञा, न मुख्य क्रिया, न काल का बदलाव।
Hidden helpers: V1 ⇒ do / does, V2 ⇒ did, has / have + noun ⇒ do / does, used to ⇒ did.छिपी सहायक क्रियाएँ: V1 ⇒ do / does, V2 ⇒ did, has / have + संज्ञा ⇒ do / does, used to ⇒ did।
I am ⇒ aren't I; I am not ⇒ am I. May ⇒ can't.I am ⇒ aren't I; I am not ⇒ am I। May ⇒ can't।
Hidden negatives (seldom, hardly, never, little, few, nobody) make the tag positive, if they act on the verb, subject or object.छिपे नकारात्मक शब्द (seldom, hardly, never, little, few, nobody) tag को सकारात्मक बनाते हैं, यदि वे क्रिया, कर्ता या कर्म पर प्रभाव डालें।
This / that take the pronoun of the noun they point to; these / those take they; there stays there.This / that में उस संज्ञा का सर्वनाम लगता है जिसकी ओर संकेत है; these / those में they; there का there ही रहता है।
Everyone, nobody, each, none ⇒ they. Everything, nothing ⇒ it. One of / half of ⇒ look after of.Everyone, nobody, each, none ⇒ they। Everything, nothing ⇒ it। One of / half of ⇒ of के बाद देखिए।
Main clause decides. After I think / I suppose, the next clause decides. After and / but, the clause nearest the tag decides.मुख्य उपवाक्य तय करता है। I think / I suppose के बाद अगला उपवाक्य तय करता है। and / but में tag के सबसे पास वाला उपवाक्य तय करता है।
Imperatives: won't you; Don't …, will you; Let's …, shall we; offer ⇒ will you; scolding ⇒ can't you.आज्ञार्थक वाक्य: won't you; Don't …, will you; Let's …, shall we; प्रस्ताव ⇒ will you; डाँट ⇒ can't you।
Agreement tag: So + HV + subject; negative: Neither / Nor + HV + subject.सहमति-पुच्छ: So + HV + कर्ता; नकारात्मक: Neither / Nor + HV + कर्ता।
Short answer: yes / no + pronoun + helping verb. Write Yes, they have, never Yes, they've.संक्षिप्त उत्तर: yes / no + सर्वनाम + सहायक क्रिया। Yes, they have लिखें, Yes, they've कभी नहीं।

Making the tag

Positive statement ⇒ negative tag; negative statement ⇒ positive tag. ✔ Pawan is going to Delhi, isn't he? ✔ Pawan is not going to Delhi, is he?सकारात्मक कथन ⇒ नकारात्मक tag; नकारात्मक कथन ⇒ सकारात्मक tag। ✔ Pawan is going to Delhi, isn't he? ✔ Pawan is not going to Delhi, is he?
The tag has only two words: helping verb + pronoun. No noun, no main verb, no change of tense. ✔ Rahul will help us, won't he?Tag में केवल दो शब्द: सहायक क्रिया + सर्वनाम। न संज्ञा, न मुख्य क्रिया, न काल का बदलाव। ✔ Rahul will help us, won't he?
A negative tag is normally contracted: won't, doesn't, can't, shan't, mustn't, oughtn't, needn't. May ⇒ can't. Am ⇒ aren't.नकारात्मक tag सामान्यतः संक्षिप्त होता है: won't, doesn't, can't, shan't, mustn't, oughtn't, needn't। May ⇒ can't। Am ⇒ aren't।

The helping verb

Present Indefinite ⇒ do / does; Past Indefinite ⇒ did; modals ⇒ the same modal. ✔ Radhika loves me, doesn't she? ✔ He came late, didn't he?Present Indefinite (सामान्य वर्तमान काल) ⇒ do / does; Past Indefinite (सामान्य भूत काल) ⇒ did; modals (रूपात्मक क्रिया) ⇒ वही modal। ✔ Radhika loves me, doesn't she? ✔ He came late, didn't he?
has / have / had + V3 ⇒ hasn't / haven't / hadn't. has / have + noun ⇒ doesn't / don't; had + noun ⇒ didn't. has / have / had to ⇒ do / does / did. ✔ You have finished, haven't you? ✔ She has a car, doesn't she?has / have / had + V3 ⇒ hasn't / haven't / hadn't। has / have + संज्ञा ⇒ doesn't / don't; had + संज्ञा ⇒ didn't। has / have / had to ⇒ do / does / did। ✔ You have finished, haven't you? ✔ She has a car, doesn't she?
is / am / are / was / were + to, and about to ⇒ the be verb. need / dare + not ⇒ need / dare; need / dare + to ⇒ do / does / did.is / am / are / was / were + to, और about to ⇒ be क्रिया। need / dare + not ⇒ need / dare; need / dare + to ⇒ do / does / did।
used to ⇒ didn't; ought to ⇒ oughtn't; must ⇒ mustn't; must have + V3 ⇒ haven't; might ⇒ mightn't.used to ⇒ didn't; ought to ⇒ oughtn't; must ⇒ mustn't; must have + V3 ⇒ haven't; might ⇒ mightn't।
I am ⇒ aren't I; I am not ⇒ am I. ✔ I am happy, aren't I? ✔ I am not going, am I?I am ⇒ aren't I; I am not ⇒ am I। ✔ I am happy, aren't I? ✔ I am not going, am I?

Negative words

not, no, never, no sooner, no longer, nothing, nobody, neither, none, few, little, hardly, scarcely, barely, rarely, seldom ⇒ the statement is negative ⇒ positive tag. ✔ He seldom comes here, does he?not, no, never, no sooner, no longer, nothing, nobody, neither, none, few, little, hardly, scarcely, barely, rarely, seldom ⇒ कथन नकारात्मक ⇒ सकारात्मक tag। ✔ He seldom comes here, does he?
A negative word inside a small phrase (with no effort, without hope) does not negate the verb ⇒ negative tag. ✔ Ravi makes money with no effort, doesn't he?छोटे पदबंध (with no effort, without hope) के भीतर का नकारात्मक शब्द क्रिया को नकारता नहीं ⇒ नकारात्मक tag। ✔ Ravi makes money with no effort, doesn't he?
Too … to and un- / im- / dis- words are positive in grammar ⇒ negative tag. a few / a little are positive; few / little are negative.Too … to और un- / im- / dis- वाले शब्द व्याकरण में सकारात्मक हैं ⇒ नकारात्मक tag। a few / a little सकारात्मक हैं; few / little नकारात्मक हैं।

The pronoun

boy / man ⇒ he; girl / woman ⇒ she; thing / animal ⇒ it; many ⇒ they. This / that ⇒ pronoun of the noun they point to. These / those ⇒ they. There ⇒ there. It ⇒ it.लड़का / पुरुष ⇒ he; लड़की / स्त्री ⇒ she; वस्तु / पशु ⇒ it; अनेक ⇒ they। This / that ⇒ जिस संज्ञा की ओर संकेत है उसका सर्वनाम। These / those ⇒ they। There ⇒ there। It ⇒ it।
One ⇒ one; one + noun ⇒ pronoun of the noun; one of / half of / neither of … ⇒ pronoun of the word after of. ✔ One should obey one's parents, shouldn't one?One ⇒ one; one + संज्ञा ⇒ उस संज्ञा का सर्वनाम; one of / half of / neither of … ⇒ of के बाद वाले शब्द का सर्वनाम। ✔ One should obey one's parents, shouldn't one?
everyone, everybody, no one, nobody, someone, anyone, none, all, both, some, either, neither, each (and each / every / any + noun) ⇒ they. everything, nothing, something, anything ⇒ it.everyone, everybody, no one, nobody, someone, anyone, none, all, both, some, either, neither, each (और each / every / any + संज्ञा) ⇒ they। everything, nothing, something, anything ⇒ it।
Collective noun as one unit ⇒ it; members acting separately ⇒ they. ✔ The jury was unanimous, wasn't it? ✔ The committee have different opinions, don't they?समूहवाचक संज्ञा एक इकाई ⇒ it; सदस्य अलग-अलग ⇒ they। ✔ The jury was unanimous, wasn't it? ✔ The committee have different opinions, don't they?

Two clauses

Main + subordinate clause ⇒ tag follows the main clause. ✔ She is so beautiful that she cannot be ignored, isn't she?मुख्य + आश्रित उपवाक्य ⇒ tag मुख्य उपवाक्य का बनता है। ✔ She is so beautiful that she cannot be ignored, isn't she?
I think / suppose / guess / feel + clause ⇒ tag follows the clause after it. ✔ I don't think Radhika likes coffee, does she?I think / suppose / guess / feel + उपवाक्य ⇒ tag उसके बाद वाले उपवाक्य का बनता है। ✔ I don't think Radhika likes coffee, does she?
Co-ordinate clause (and / but / or) + main clause ⇒ tag follows the clause nearest to the tag.समानाधिकरण उपवाक्य (and / but / or) + मुख्य उपवाक्य ⇒ tag tag के सबसे पास वाले उपवाक्य का बनता है।

Imperative and exclamatory

V1 … ⇒ won't you; Don't + V1 ⇒ will you; Let us (permission) ⇒ will you / won't you; Let us (suggestion) ⇒ shall we; Let's / Let's not ⇒ shall we.V1 … ⇒ won't you; Don't + V1 ⇒ will you; Let us (permission) ⇒ will you / won't you; Let us (suggestion) ⇒ shall we; Let's / Let's not ⇒ shall we।
Offer / request ⇒ will you; scolding ⇒ can't you; moral duty ⇒ shouldn't you / we.प्रस्ताव / अनुरोध ⇒ will you; डाँट ⇒ can't you; नैतिक कर्तव्य ⇒ shouldn't you / we।
Exclamatory sentence with no subject ⇒ take the pronoun from the sense: What a beautiful girl, isn't she? What weather, isn't it?कर्ता के बिना विस्मयादिबोधक वाक्य ⇒ भाव से सर्वनाम लें: What a beautiful girl, isn't she? What weather, isn't it?

Agreement tags and short answers

Positive agreement tag ⇒ So + helping verb + subject. ✔ Radhika is working here, so is Ram.सकारात्मक सहमति-पुच्छ ⇒ So + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता। ✔ Radhika is working here, so is Ram.
Negative agreement tag ⇒ Neither + HV + sub, Nor + HV + sub or Sub + HV + not + either. ✔ She does not teach here, neither do I.नकारात्मक सहमति-पुच्छ ⇒ Neither + HV + sub, Nor + HV + sub या Sub + HV + not + either। ✔ She does not teach here, neither do I.
In an agreement tag the subject differs, the tense is kept, the main verb is dropped, and a noun or a pronoun may be used.सहमति-पुच्छ में कर्ता अलग होता है, काल वही रहता है, मुख्य क्रिया हट जाती है, और संज्ञा या सर्वनाम दोनों चल सकते हैं।
Short answer = yes / no + pronoun + helping verb; no noun, no main verb, no contraction with the subject; a negative answer takes n't. ✔ Yes, he will. ✔ No, he won't.संक्षिप्त उत्तर = yes / no + सर्वनाम + सहायक क्रिया; न संज्ञा, न मुख्य क्रिया, कर्ता के साथ संक्षेपण नहीं; नकारात्मक उत्तर में n't लगता है। ✔ Yes, he will. ✔ No, he won't.

9. Adjective Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

An adjective describes a noun or pronoun; an adverb describes a verb, an adjective or another adverb.विशेषण संज्ञा या सर्वनाम की विशेषता बताता है; क्रियाविशेषण क्रिया, विशेषण या दूसरे क्रियाविशेषण की।
After a linking verb use an adjective (tasted sweet); after an action verb use an adverb (does it well).संयोजक क्रिया के बाद विशेषण (tasted sweet); कार्य वाली क्रिया के बाद क्रियाविशेषण (does it well)।
Elder, main, chief stand only before a noun; asleep, afraid, alone stand only after a linking verb.Elder, main, chief केवल संज्ञा से पहले आते हैं; asleep, afraid, alone केवल संयोजक क्रिया के बाद।
The + adjective (the poor, the rich) means the whole group; never drop the.The + विशेषण (the poor, the rich) का अर्थ पूरा समूह है; the कभी मत हटाइए।
as … as takes the positive degree; so … as only in negative sentences. With no comparison in the sentence, the adjective stays positive.as … as में मूलावस्था; so … as केवल नकारात्मक वाक्यों में। वाक्य में तुलना न हो तो विशेषण मूलावस्था में रहता है।
Than needs a comparative; never more + -er or most + -est (more better, most cleverest).Than के साथ उत्तरावस्था; more + -er या most + -est कभी नहीं (more better, most cleverest)।
Senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior, preferable and the verb prefer take to, not than, and no more.Senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior, preferable और क्रिया prefer के साथ to आता है, than नहीं, और more भी नहीं।
Compare like with like: that of, those of, Delhi's. If the subject belongs to the group, use any other or everyone else.समान की समान से तुलना कीजिए: that of, those of, Delhi's। कर्ता उसी समूह का हो तो any other या everyone else लगाइए।
Superlative = the + superlative + of / in a group of more than two; never a, never than, never other.उत्तमावस्था = the + उत्तमावस्था + of / in और दो से अधिक का समूह; a नहीं, than नहीं, other नहीं।
Most can mean very: with no group the sentence takes a most. One of the + superlative + plural noun.Most का अर्थ very भी होता है: समूह न हो तो a most। One of the + उत्तमावस्था + बहुवचन संज्ञा।
Change of state: from bad to worse, colder and colder; never a superlative. Twice / thrice / half take as … as.स्थिति का बदलाव: from bad to worse, colder and colder; उत्तमावस्था कभी नहीं। Twice / thrice / half के साथ as … as।
Non-gradable adjectives (unique, essential, perfect, round) take no very, more, most, *-er* or *-est*.Non-gradable विशेषणों (unique, essential, perfect, round) के साथ very, more, most, *-er*, *-est* नहीं लगते।
Enough comes after an adjective (tall enough) and before a noun (enough money); worth comes after its noun.Enough विशेषण के बाद (tall enough) और संज्ञा से पहले (enough money) आता है; worth अपनी संज्ञा के बाद आता है।
Adjective order: Opinion, Size, Age, Shape, Colour, Origin, Material, Purpose (OSASCOMP). An ordinal takes the and stands before the cardinal: the first three boys.विशेषणों का क्रम: Opinion, Size, Age, Shape, Colour, Origin, Material, Purpose (OSASCOMP)। Ordinal के साथ the और वह Cardinal से पहले: the first three boys।
Elder is for family, older for the rest; farther is distance, further is additional; less is uncountable, fewer is countable.Elder परिवार के लिए, older बाकी के लिए; farther दूरी, further अतिरिक्त; less अगणनीय, fewer गणनीय।

Positions and degrees: the basics

Three positions: attributive (before a noun), predicative (after a linking verb, no noun, no article), postpositive (right after a noun or pronoun).तीन स्थान: attributive (विशेषणात्मक) (संज्ञा से पहले), predicative (विधेयात्मक) (संयोजक क्रिया के बाद, बिना संज्ञा और Article के), postpositive (संज्ञा या सर्वनाम के ठीक बाद)।
Linking verbs: is, am, are, was, were, be, been, seem, appear, become (and look, feel, smell, taste, sound, grow, turn, remain).संयोजक क्रियाएँ: is, am, are, was, were, be, been, seem, appear, become (और look, feel, smell, taste, sound, grow, turn, remain)।
Positive = no comparison. Comparative = two. Superlative = one out of more than two.मूलावस्था = कोई तुलना नहीं। उत्तरावस्था = दो की तुलना। उत्तमावस्था = दो से अधिक में से एक।
One syllable: -er / -est. More than two syllables: more / most. Count the vowel sounds; a silent final e is not counted. ✔ wise, wiser, wisest ✔ beautiful, more beautiful, most beautifulएक syllable: -er / -est। दो से अधिक syllables: more / most। स्वर ध्वनियाँ गिनिए; अंत का मौन e नहीं गिनते। ✔ wise, wiser, wisest ✔ beautiful, more beautiful, most beautiful
Irregular: good, better, best · bad, worse, worst · little, less / lesser, least · late, later / latter, latest / last · old, older / elder, oldest / eldest · near, nearer, nearest / next · far, further / farther, furthest / farthest · outer, outermost · inner, innermost · fore, former, foremost / first.अनियमित: good, better, best · bad, worse, worst · little, less / lesser, least · late, later / latter, latest / last · old, older / elder, oldest / eldest · near, nearer, nearest / next · far, further / farther, furthest / farthest · outer, outermost · inner, innermost · fore, former, foremost / first।
In Modern English, adjectives of quantity and number, demonstrative, distributive, interrogative and possessive adjectives are determiners (see the Determiner chapter).आधुनिक अंग्रेज़ी में adjectives (विशेषण) of quantity और number, demonstrative (निश्चयवाचक), distributive, interrogative (प्रश्नवाचक) और possessive adjectives निर्धारक (Determiners) माने जाते हैं (Determiner अध्याय देखिए)।

Position-restricted adjectives and the + adjective

Adjectives that usually stand before a noun (elder, mere, sheer, utter, main, chief, principal, former, latter, little in the sense of 'small') are not normally used after is / was. Check each word: rural, urban and major can be used after be (The area is rural), so they are not on this list.ऐसे विशेषण जो आम तौर पर संज्ञा से पहले आते हैं (elder, mere, sheer, utter, main, chief, principal, former, latter, और 'छोटा' के अर्थ में little) is / was के बाद सामान्यतः नहीं आते। हर शब्द जाँचिए: rural, urban और major को be के बाद लगा सकते हैं (The area is rural), इसलिए वे इस सूची में नहीं हैं।
Adjectives that usually stand after a linking verb (afraid, afloat, ablaze, alike, alone, asleep, awake, aware, ashamed, alive, addicted). Glad, ill and well are mostly predicative too (glad tidings, ill health, a well man are fixed uses). Before a noun use the other form: sleeping, floating, frightened, habitual, healthy, …ऐसे विशेषण जो आम तौर पर संयोजक क्रिया के बाद आते हैं (afraid, afloat, ablaze, alike, alone, asleep, awake, aware, ashamed, alive, addicted)। Glad, ill और well भी अधिकतर इसी स्थान पर आते हैं (glad tidings, ill health, a well man निश्चित प्रयोग हैं)। संज्ञा से पहले दूसरा रूप लगाइए: sleeping, floating, frightened, habitual, healthy, …
Attributive-only adjectives have no comparative or superlative: not more main, not most chief.ऐसे विशेषणों की उत्तरावस्था या उत्तमावस्था नहीं बनती: more main नहीं, most chief नहीं।
Before a noun, nearby is the usual word for place (a nearby shop); near is also used before a noun in some expressions (the near future, in the near distance). The shop is nearby is also correct (adverb).संज्ञा से पहले स्थान के लिए nearby सामान्य शब्द है (a nearby shop); कुछ अभिव्यक्तियों में near भी संज्ञा से पहले आता है (the near future, in the near distance)। The shop is nearby भी सही है (क्रियाविशेषण)।
The + adjective (the poor, the rich, the blind) means that whole group and takes a plural verb. Never drop the.The + विशेषण (the poor, the rich, the blind) का अर्थ पूरा समुदाय होता है और उसके साथ बहुवचन क्रिया आती है। The कभी मत हटाइए।

Adjective or adverb

Linking verb (be, seem, appear, become, look, feel, smell, taste, sound, grow, turn, remain) + adjective.संयोजक क्रिया (be, seem, appear, become, look, feel, smell, taste, sound, grow, turn, remain) + विशेषण।
Action verb + adverb (it tells how the action is done). ✘ She does it good. ✔ She does it well.कार्य दिखाने वाली क्रिया + क्रियाविशेषण (वह बताता है कि कार्य कैसे हो रहा है)। ✘ She does it good. ✔ She does it well.
An adjective describes a noun or a pronoun; an adverb describes a verb, an adjective or another adverb.विशेषण संज्ञा या सर्वनाम की विशेषता बताता है; क्रियाविशेषण क्रिया, विशेषण या दूसरे क्रियाविशेषण की।
Many qualities of one noun: adjective + adjective + noun. Use an adverb only if it describes the adjective (a completely wooden table).एक संज्ञा के कई गुण: विशेषण + विशेषण + संज्ञा। क्रियाविशेषण तभी लगाइए जब वह विशेषण की विशेषता बता रहा हो (a completely wooden table)।
Good is the adjective, well is the adverb (and means "healthy" in I am well). Fast is both; there is no word fastly.Good विशेषण है, well क्रियाविशेषण है (और I am well में उसका अर्थ "स्वस्थ" है)। Fast दोनों है; fastly कोई शब्द नहीं होता।

Positive degree

Equality takes as + positive degree + as. Never put a comparative between them. ✘ as smarter as ✔ as smart asबराबरी के लिए as + मूलावस्था + as लगता है। दोनों के बीच उत्तरावस्था कभी नहीं। ✘ as smarter as ✔ as smart as
so … as is used only in negative sentences; as … as works in positive and negative sentences.so … as केवल नकारात्मक वाक्यों में आता है; as … as सकारात्मक और नकारात्मक, दोनों में आ सकता है।
Linking verb + as … as → adjective between them. Action verb + as … as → adverb between them (still positive).संयोजक क्रिया + as … as → बीच में विशेषण। कार्य वाली क्रिया + as … as → बीच में क्रियाविशेषण (फिर भी मूलावस्था)।
If a sentence has no comparison (no than, no of all, no in the class), the adjective stays in the positive degree.अगर वाक्य में कोई तुलना नहीं है (न than, न of all, न in the class), तो विशेषण मूलावस्था में रहता है।

Comparative degree

Comparative + than. The word before than is a comparative, never a positive or a superlative. ✘ best than ✔ better thanउत्तरावस्था + than। than से पहले का शब्द उत्तरावस्था में होता है, मूलावस्था या उत्तमावस्था में नहीं। ✘ best than ✔ better than
No double degree: not more better, more smarter, most cleverest, most easiest.अवस्था दोहराना नहीं: more better, more smarter, most cleverest, most easiest नहीं।
Relatively and comparatively take the positive degree. With than, drop them and use the comparative.Relatively और comparatively के साथ मूलावस्था आती है। than हो तो इन्हें हटाकर उत्तरावस्था लगाइए।
Two qualities of one person: more + positive + than + positive. ✔ Harish is more clever than wise.एक ही व्यक्ति के दो गुण: more + मूलावस्था + than + मूलावस्था। ✔ Harish is more clever than wise.
Choice out of two: the + comparative + of the two.दो में से चुनाव: the + उत्तरावस्था + of the two।
The + comparative …, the + comparative … for two linked changes.दो जुड़े हुए बदलावों के लिए The + उत्तरावस्था …, the + उत्तरावस्था …।

Senior, superior, prefer

senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior, preferable take to, never than.senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior, preferable के बाद to का प्रयोग होता है, than का कभी नहीं।
Never put more / most before superior, inferior, prior, preferable (already comparative). Senior and junior are different: a more senior colleague, the most senior officer are fine; with a comparison use senior to me, not senior than me.superior, inferior, prior, preferable से पहले more / most कभी मत लगाइए (ये पहले से उत्तरावस्था में हैं)। Senior और junior अलग हैं: a more senior colleague, the most senior officer सही हैं; तुलना में senior to me लगता है, senior than me नहीं।
prefer X to Y (also prefer walking to driving). Never prefer X than Y.prefer X to Y (साथ ही prefer walking to driving)। prefer X than Y का प्रयोग कभी नहीं होता।
Two adjectives, two different words: use each word separately (inferior to but costlier than). Same word for both: write it once, after the later adjective.दो विशेषण, दो अलग शब्द: दोनों के साथ अलग-अलग लिखिए (inferior to but costlier than)। दोनों के साथ एक ही शब्द: उसे एक बार, बाद वाले विशेषण के साथ लिखिए।
Elder takes neither to nor than; anterior and posterior take to.Elder के बाद न to प्रयुक्त होता है, न than; anterior और posterior के बाद to प्रयुक्त होता है।

Compare like with like; any other

Compare like with like. After than or as, stand in for the earlier noun with that (singular), those (plural), a noun's, an of phrase or an in phrase.समान की समान से तुलना कीजिए। than या as के बाद पहले आई संज्ञा की जगह that (एकवचन), those (बहुवचन), noun (संज्ञा)'s, of phrase (पदबंध) या in phrase लगाइए।
If the thing compared belongs to the group, write any other + noun or everyone / anyone else.अगर जिसकी तुलना हो रही है वह उसी समूह का हिस्सा है, तो any other + noun (संज्ञा) या everyone / anyone else लिखिए।
If the thing compared is outside the group, no other (Diamond is harder than any metal).अगर जिसकी तुलना हो रही है वह समूह से बाहर है, तो other नहीं (Diamond is harder than any metal)।
Three equal patterns: the + superlative + of all, No other … as + positive + as, comparative + than + any other.तीन समान ढाँचे: the + superlative (उत्तमावस्था) + of all, No other … as + positive + as, comparative (तुलनात्मक) + than + any other।

Superlative: the, one of the, a most

A superlative normally takes the, never a. A possessive can replace the (my best friend), and best is bare in Which is best?, in She sings best, and after a possessive. ✘ a oldest ✔ the oldestउत्तमावस्था के साथ सामान्यतः the आता है, a कभी नहीं। Possessive the की जगह ले सकता है (my best friend), और Which is best?, She sings best में तथा possessive के बाद best बिना the के आता है। ✘ a oldest ✔ the oldest
one of the / some of the + superlative + plural noun.one of the / some of the + उत्तमावस्था + बहुवचन संज्ञा।
Most can mean very. With no group in the sentence, write a most + adjective (not the most). With a group, write the most.Most का अर्थ very भी होता है। वाक्य में समूह न हो, तो a most + विशेषण लिखिए (the most नहीं)। समूह हो, तो the most।
A superlative followed by a clause with ever takes the: the worst movie I have ever seen.ever वाले उपवाक्य से पहले आने वाली उत्तमावस्था के साथ the लगता है: the worst movie I have ever seen।

Superlative: group, of / in, worst

Superlative: more than two. the + superlative + of / in + group. Only two: the + comparative + of the two.उत्तमावस्था: दो से अधिक के लिए। the + उत्तमावस्था + of / in + समूह। केवल दो हों: the + उत्तरावस्था + of the two।
A superlative is never followed by than; use of or in.उत्तमावस्था के बाद than कभी नहीं; of या in लगाइए।
A superlative never takes other or else.उत्तमावस्था के साथ other या else कभी नहीं।
One person compared with himself in different situations: no the (best in the mornings).एक ही व्यक्ति की स्वयं से तुलना, अलग-अलग परिस्थितियों में: the नहीं (best in the mornings)।
Bad – worse – worst. "The worst of all", "ever" and "in a decade" call for worst.Bad – worse – worst. "सबसे बुरा" तथा "ever" और "in a decade" के अर्थ में worst आता है।

Finer points: joined adjectives, change of state, colours, twice

Adjectives joined by and / but / or / nor in one comparison take the same degree when the frame demands it (than → comparative). Adjectives of different degrees can be coordinated if each answers its own frame.and / but / or / nor से जुड़े विशेषण एक ही तुलना में तब समान अवस्था लेते हैं जब वाक्य का ढाँचा यह माँगे (than → उत्तरावस्था)। अलग-अलग अवस्था के विशेषण भी जुड़ सकते हैं, अगर हर एक अपने ढाँचे का उत्तर देता हो।
Both need more / most: write it once, with the first; a separate one with each is also not wrong. One with -er / -est and one with more / most: SSC keys put the -er / -est word first (friendlier and more honest). More honest and friendlier is also grammatical in real English; the order is a style preference, not a fixed error.दोनों को more / most चाहिए: उसे पहले के साथ एक बार लिखिए; दोनों के साथ अलग-अलग भी गलत नहीं। एक में -er / -est और एक में more / most: SSC की keys -er / -est वाला शब्द पहले रखती हैं (friendlier and more honest)। असली अंग्रेज़ी में more honest and friendlier भी व्याकरण-सम्मत है; यह क्रम शैली की पसंद है, निश्चित त्रुटि नहीं।
Change of state: from + positive + to + comparative (from bad to worse) or comparative + and + comparative (colder and colder). Never a superlative.स्थिति में बदलाव: from + मूलावस्था + to + उत्तरावस्था (from bad to worse) या उत्तरावस्था + and + उत्तरावस्था (colder and colder)। उत्तमावस्था कभी नहीं।
Colours take -er / -est (bluer); colours with -ish take more / most (more bluish).रंगों में -er / -est लगता है (bluer); -ish वाले रंगों में more / most लगता है (more bluish)।
half / twice / thrice + as … as (never the comparative). Two times / three times take both patterns.half / twice / thrice + as … as (उत्तरावस्था कभी नहीं)। Two times / three times के साथ दोनों ढाँचे चलते हैं।

Adverbs with degrees; non-gradable adjectives

Positive takes very, so, too, enough; comparative takes much, far, a lot, even; superlative takes by far, nearly, quite, easily. Never very + comparative.मूलावस्था के साथ very, so, too, enough; उत्तरावस्था के साथ much, far, a lot, even; उत्तमावस्था के साथ by far, nearly, quite, easily। very + उत्तरावस्था कभी नहीं।
Before a comparative adjective + noun, much / far are usual (a much better plan); no and any also work (no better choice, any better idea). Very is the error (very better).उत्तरावस्था का विशेषण + संज्ञा से पहले much / far सामान्य हैं (a much better plan); no और any भी चलते हैं (no better choice, any better idea)। Very त्रुटि है (very better)।
Adverb + the + superlative: nearly the best, by far the best. And the very best, my very best (an article or possessive before very).क्रियाविशेषण + the + उत्तमावस्था: nearly the best, by far the best। और the very best, my very best (very से पहले Article या Possessive)।
Non-gradable adjectives (unique, essential, perfect, round, universal, excellent, complete…) take no very / more / most / -er / -est.Non-gradable विशेषणों (unique, essential, perfect, round, universal, excellent, complete…) के साथ very / more / most / -er / -est नहीं लगता।
Non-gradable adjectives (unique, essential, perfect, round) normally take only absolutely, perfectly, completely, quite (not very, more, most). In emphatic writing more perfect, most unique occur; the exam treats them as errors.Non-gradable विशेषणों (unique, essential, perfect, round) के साथ सामान्यतः केवल absolutely, perfectly, completely, quite लगते हैं (very, more, most नहीं)। बल देने वाले लेखन में more perfect, most unique दिख जाते हैं; परीक्षा इन्हें त्रुटि मानती है।

Postpositive adjectives, worth, enough

An adjective for an indefinite pronoun comes after it: something special, those responsible.अनिश्चित सर्वनाम की विशेषता बताने वाला विशेषण उसके बाद आता है: something special, those responsible।
Adjective + its own complement (to + V1 or preposition + noun): noun + adjective + complement. A man happy to help.विशेषण + उसका अपना पूरक (to + V1 या preposition + noun): noun (संज्ञा) + विशेषण + पूरक। A man happy to help.
worth with a noun is always after the noun: a watch worth ₹200, a film worth watching.संज्ञा के साथ worth हमेशा संज्ञा के बाद आता है: a watch worth ₹200, a film worth watching।
enough + noun but adjective / adverb + enough. Rich enough, not enough rich.enough + संज्ञा लेकिन विशेषण / क्रियाविशेषण + enough। Rich enough, enough rich नहीं।
Before the noun: a general quality (present members). After the noun: a particular situation (members present).संज्ञा से पहले: सामान्य गुण (present members)। संज्ञा के बाद: विशेष स्थिति (members present)।
Fixed phrases keep the adjective after the noun: God Almighty, time immemorial, attorney general.स्थिर वाक्यांशों में विशेषण संज्ञा के बाद ही रहता है: God Almighty, time immemorial, attorney general।

Order of adjectives; cardinal and ordinal

Order: Opinion → Size → Age → Shape → Colour → Origin → Material → Purpose + Noun (OSASCOMP). This is the normal order; a change for emphasis or in coordinated adjectives is possible.क्रम: Opinion → Size → Age → Shape → Colour → Origin → Material → Purpose + Noun (OSASCOMP)। यह सामान्य क्रम है; बल देने के लिए या जुड़े हुए विशेषणों में बदलाव हो सकता है।
Adjectives of different kinds: no comma, no and. Adjectives of the same kind: and between them.अलग-अलग प्रकार के विशेषण: न comma (अल्पविराम), न and। एक ही प्रकार के विशेषण: उनके बीच and।
An ordinal takes the: the first man, on the second floor. For "one more", a is used: a second chance.Ordinal (क्रमवाचक) के साथ the आता है: the first man, on the second floor। "एक और" के अर्थ में a आता है: a second chance।
Cardinal before the noun: plural noun (two boys). Cardinal after the noun: singular noun (page ten).संज्ञा से पहले Cardinal (गणनावाचक): बहुवचन संज्ञा (two boys)। संज्ञा के बाद Cardinal: एकवचन संज्ञा (page ten)।
Ordinal first, cardinal second: the first three boys, the next few days.पहले Ordinal (क्रमवाचक), फिर Cardinal (गणनावाचक): the first three boys, the next few days।

Confusing pairs; measure adjectives

last = final (sequence); latest = most recent (time). Gandhiji's last book, Tharoor's latest book.last = अंतिम (क्रम); latest = हाल का (समय)। Gandhiji's last book, Tharoor's latest book।
elder / eldest = family, only before a noun; older / oldest = everything else, and with than. My elder brother, but older than me.elder / eldest = परिवार, केवल संज्ञा से पहले; older / oldest = बाकी सब, और than के साथ। My elder brother, लेकिन older than me।
farther = distance, further = additional; further is also used for distance in everyday English. In SSC exams choose farther when it is offered for physical distance. nearest = very close; next = the following one.farther = दूरी, further = अतिरिक्त; रोज़मर्रा की अंग्रेज़ी में further दूरी के लिए भी आता है। SSC परीक्षा में भौतिक दूरी के लिए farther दिया हो तो वही चुनिए। nearest = सबसे पास; next = अगला।
later = after some time; latter = the second of two, with the (the former … the latter).later का अर्थ है कुछ समय बाद; latter का अर्थ है दो में से दूसरा, जिसके साथ the लगता है (the former … the latter)।
less = smaller amount (uncountable); fewer = countable; lesser = smaller degree, only before a noun. Less is normal with measurements (less than five minutes, less than 20 kg), and no less than fifty is idiomatic.less = कम मात्रा (अगणनीय); fewer = गणनीय; lesser = कम स्तर, केवल संज्ञा से पहले। माप के साथ less सामान्य है (less than five minutes, less than 20 kg), और no less than fifty मुहावरेदार प्रयोग है।
A measurement takes the upper-range adjective: *3 cm thick*, *22 years old*, *10 metres wide*, *160 cm tall*.माप के साथ ऊपरी सीमा वाला विशेषण आता है: *3 cm thick*, *22 years old*, *10 metres wide*, *160 cm tall*।

10. Determiner Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A determiner stands before a noun and shows its reference or quantity; it is never used before a pronoun (only we all, they both, they each).निर्धारक संज्ञा से पहले आता है और उसका संदर्भ या मात्रा बताता है; सर्वनाम से पहले नहीं लगता (केवल we all, they both, they each)।
Without a noun use mine, yours, hers, theirs; two reference determiners never come together: a friend of mine.संज्ञा न हो तो mine, yours, hers, theirs लगाइए; संदर्भ के दो निर्धारक साथ नहीं आते: a friend of mine।
Some is for positive sentences, any for negative and interrogative ones; hardly, barely, without also take any.Some सकारात्मक वाक्यों के लिए, any नकारात्मक और प्रश्नवाचक के लिए; hardly, barely, without के साथ भी any आता है।
Offer, request, suggestion or an expected yes: some even in a question. Not + any means zero.प्रस्ताव, अनुरोध, सुझाव या अपेक्षित yes हो तो प्रश्न में भी some। Not + any का अर्थ शून्य है।
A number of = many (plural verb); the number of = the figure (singular verb).A number of = many (बहुवचन क्रिया); the number of = संख्या (एकवचन क्रिया)।
Either of / neither of + plural noun takes a singular verb; they are for two only (more than two: any, none).Either of / neither of + बहुवचन संज्ञा के साथ एकवचन क्रिया; ये केवल दो के लिए हैं (दो से अधिक: any, none)।
Each is for a definite number, every for an indefinite one; both take a singular noun and verb; almost / nearly go with every.Each निश्चित संख्या के लिए, every अनिश्चित के लिए; दोनों के साथ एकवचन संज्ञा और क्रिया; almost / nearly के साथ every।
Many goes with countable, much with uncountable nouns; many a takes a singular noun; a lot of is complete only with of.Many गणनीय के साथ, much अगणनीय के साथ; many a के साथ एकवचन संज्ञा; a lot of of के साथ ही पूरा है।
Few / little = almost none (negative); a few / a little = some (positive); only a few, very few.Few / little = almost none (नकारात्मक); a few / a little = कुछ तो है (सकारात्मक); only a few, very few।
The few / the little + a relative clause = all that there is; fewer for countable, less for uncountable.The few / the little + relative clause (संबंधवाचक उपवाक्य) = जितना है, सारा; गणनीय के लिए fewer, अगणनीय के लिए less।
All is for more than two, both for two; the pre-determiner comes first: all my friends, both the children, half an hour.All दो से अधिक के लिए, both दो के लिए; पूर्व-निर्धारक पहले आता है: all my friends, both the children, half an hour।
Another + singular noun, other + plural noun, the other = the remaining one; others has no noun; any other in comparison.Another + एकवचन संज्ञा, other + बहुवचन संज्ञा, the other = बचा हुआ एक; others के बाद संज्ञा नहीं; तुलना में any other।
No double negative: not … any, never not … none. To say 'nobody' or 'neither', use none / no / neither instead of all / each / every + not; keep not all when only some are meant.दोहरा निषेध नहीं: not … any, not … none कभी नहीं। 'कोई नहीं' या 'दोनों में से कोई नहीं' के लिए all / each / every + not की जगह none / no / neither लगाइए; जब केवल कुछ की बात हो तो not all रखिए।
Enough comes before a noun, but after an adjective or adverb (big enough); too … to is negative, … enough to is positive.Enough संज्ञा से पहले आता है, लेकिन विशेषण या क्रिया-विशेषण के बाद (big enough); too … to नकारात्मक है, … enough to सकारात्मक।

The basics

A determiner stands before a noun and shows its reference (a, an, the, my, this …) or its quantity (some, many, each …).निर्धारक संज्ञा से पहले आता है और उसका संदर्भ (a, an, the, my, this …) या मात्रा (some, many, each …) बताता है।
A singular countable noun never stands without a determiner. Plural and uncountable nouns may, in a general sense (Water is colourless).एकवचन गणनीय संज्ञा कभी बिना निर्धारक के नहीं आती। बहुवचन और अगणनीय संज्ञाएँ सामान्य अर्थ में आ सकती हैं (Water is colourless)।
each, every, either, neither, many a → singular noun, singular verb. few, a few, both, several, a number of → plural. little, a little, much, a great deal of → uncountable, singular verb. some, any, all, most, no, a lot of → verb follows the noun.each, every, either, neither, many a → एकवचन संज्ञा, एकवचन क्रिया। few, a few, both, several, a number of → बहुवचन। little, a little, much, a great deal of → अगणनीय, एकवचन क्रिया। some, any, all, most, no, a lot of → क्रिया संज्ञा के अनुसार।

Determiners of reference

A determiner comes before a noun, never before a pronoun. Only all, both and each may follow a plural pronoun: we all, they both, they each.निर्धारक संज्ञा से पहले आता है, सर्वनाम से पहले नहीं। केवल all, both और each बहुवचन सर्वनाम के बाद आ सकते हैं: we all, they both, they each।
My, our, your, her, their need a noun after them. Without a noun use mine, ours, yours, hers, theirs (his stays his).My, our, your, her, their के बाद संज्ञा ज़रूरी है। संज्ञा न हो तो mine, ours, yours, hers, theirs लगाइए (his वैसा ही रहता है)।
Two determiners of reference never sit before one noun: ✘ my this book. Say this book of mine.संदर्भ के दो निर्धारक एक संज्ञा से पहले साथ उचित नहीं हैं: ✘ my this book। कहिए this book of mine।
its shows possession, it's means it is. their comes before a noun, there shows place or there is / will be, they're means they are.its अधिकार दिखाता है, it's का अर्थ it is है। their संज्ञा से पहले आता है, there स्थान या there is / will be दिखाता है, they're का अर्थ they are है।

Some or Any

Some goes with positive sentences. Any goes with negative and interrogative sentences.Some सकारात्मक वाक्यों में आता है। Any नकारात्मक और प्रश्नवाचक वाक्यों में आता है।
Hardly, scarcely, barely, without are negative words, so they take any, never some or no.Hardly, scarcely, barely, without नकारात्मक शब्द हैं, इसलिए इनके साथ any आता है, some या no नहीं।
Offer, request, suggestion, permission or an expected yes: use some even in a question. Some can also stand in a negative sentence when it means a certain amount (I cannot do it without some help).प्रस्ताव, अनुरोध, सुझाव, अनुमति या अपेक्षित yes हो तो प्रश्न में भी some लगाइए। Some नकारात्मक वाक्य में भी आ सकता है, जब उसका अर्थ कोई निश्चित मात्रा हो (I cannot do it without some help)।
Not + some = some are still possible. Not + any = zero.Not + some = कुछ की गुंजाइश बाकी है। Not + any = शून्य।
Condition (if … any) and comparison (better than any…) take any. In a positive sentence, any means no limitation: any doctor can treat it.शर्त (if … any) और तुलना (better than any…) में any आता है। सकारात्मक वाक्य में any का अर्थ “कोई भी” होता है: any doctor can treat it।
Some with a singular countable noun means an unknown person or thing: Some boy is teasing him. (Some boys = a few boys.)एकवचन गणनीय संज्ञा के साथ some का अर्थ कोई अज्ञात व्यक्ति या वस्तु होता है: Some boy is teasing him। (Some boys = कुछ लड़के।)
Any + uncountable noun / singular noun → singular verb. Any + plural noun → plural verb.Any + अगणनीय संज्ञा / एकवचन संज्ञा → एकवचन क्रिया। Any + बहुवचन संज्ञा → बहुवचन क्रिया।

A number of, The number of, amount

A number of + plural noun + plural verb. It means many. (A good / great number of = a good / great many.)A number of + बहुवचन संज्ञा + बहुवचन क्रिया। इसका अर्थ many है। (A good / great number of = a good / great many।)
The number of + plural noun + singular verb. It means the figure, so the verb agrees with number.The number of + बहुवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया। इसका अर्थ “संख्या” है, इसलिए क्रिया number के अनुसार चलती है।
Number goes with countable nouns, amount with uncountable nouns. A great deal of / a good deal of take uncountable nouns only.Number गणनीय संज्ञाओं के साथ, amount अगणनीय संज्ञाओं के साथ। A great deal of / a good deal of केवल अगणनीय संज्ञाओं के साथ आते हैं।
As many as + countable plural noun. As much as + uncountable noun or amount.As many as + गणनीय बहुवचन संज्ञा। As much as + अगणनीय संज्ञा या परिमाण।

Either and Neither

Either / Neither + singular noun + singular verb. Before of: either / neither + of + plural noun + singular verb.Either / Neither + एकवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया। Of से पहले: either / neither + of + बहुवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया।
Either and neither are for exactly two. For more than two use any and none / no.Either और neither केवल दो के लिए हैं। दो से अधिक के लिए any और none / no लगाइए।
Neither and none already carry a negative. No not / n't in the same clause.Neither और none में निषेध पहले से है। उसी उपवाक्य में not / n't नहीं।
Either can also mean each of the two: either side of the road.Either का अर्थ each of the two भी हो सकता है: either side of the road।

Each and Every

Each / Every + singular noun + singular verb (and a singular pronoun in that clause).Each / Every + एकवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया (और उसी उपवाक्य में एकवचन सर्वनाम)।
Each looks at the members one by one; every looks at the whole group. With a small, fixed number each is the natural choice (each of the two hands); every one of the six sides is also correct.Each सदस्यों को एक-एक करके देखता है; every पूरे समूह को देखता है। छोटी और निश्चित संख्या में each स्वाभाविक चुनाव है (each of the two hands); every one of the six sides भी सही है।
With almost, nearly, practically, roughly, approximately use every, not each.almost, nearly, practically, roughly, approximately के साथ every का प्रयोग कीजिए, each का नहीं।
Each can be a pronoun (each of them). Every is only a determiner: every of is wrong; say every one of or each of.Each सर्वनाम हो सकता है (each of them)। Every केवल निर्धारक है: every of गलत है; every one of या each of कहें।
Every officer and every soldier takes a singular verb and his. A new clause can take a plural pronoun.Every officer and every soldier के साथ एकवचन क्रिया और his आता है। नए उपवाक्य में बहुवचन सर्वनाम आ सकता है।

Many, Much, Most, A lot of

Many + plural noun (plural verb). Much + uncountable noun (singular verb).Many + बहुवचन संज्ञा (बहुवचन क्रिया)। Much + अगणनीय संज्ञा (एकवचन क्रिया)।
Many a / an + singular noun + singular verb. A great many + plural noun + plural verb.Many a / an + एकवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया। A great many + बहुवचन संज्ञा + बहुवचन क्रिया।
Most = the majority; it goes with plural and uncountable nouns. Never most the; say all the or most of the. With than use more.Most = अधिकांश; यह बहुवचन और अगणनीय संज्ञाओं के साथ आता है। Most the कभी नहीं; all the या most of the कहें। Than के साथ more आता है।
A lot of / lots of + plural or uncountable noun, verb by the noun. Never lot of, a lots of or a lot before a noun.A lot of / lots of + बहुवचन या अगणनीय संज्ञा, क्रिया संज्ञा के अनुसार। Lot of, a lots of या संज्ञा से पहले a lot कभी नहीं।
Much always takes an uncountable noun and a singular verb: How much is the entrance fee?Much के साथ हमेशा अगणनीय संज्ञा और एकवचन क्रिया आती है: How much is the entrance fee?

Few, A few, Little, A little

Few / a few + plural countable noun. Little / a little + uncountable noun.Few / a few + बहुवचन गणनीय संज्ञा। Little / a little + अगणनीय संज्ञा।
Few / little = negative sense (almost none). A few / a little = positive sense (some).Few / little = नकारात्मक भाव (almost none)। A few / a little = सकारात्मक भाव (कुछ तो है)।
Contrast words such as despite, and requests, need a few / a little. Words such as curfew and immediately point to few / little.Despite जैसे विरोध-सूचक शब्दों और अनुरोधों में a few / a little चाहिए। Curfew और immediately जैसे शब्द few / little की ओर संकेत करते हैं।
Only a few (the article a is compulsory). No not in the same clause as few / little.Only a few (article a ज़रूरी है)। Few / little के साथ उसी उपवाक्य में not नहीं।
Little can also mean small (a little bag, a little village).Little का अर्थ “छोटा” भी होता है (a little bag, a little village)।
Few and little as determiners: few friends, few books, few students; little money, little water, little knowledge.निर्धारक के रूप में few और little: few friends, few books, few students; little money, little water, little knowledge।

The few, fewer, very, only

A relative clause makes the noun definite: the few / the little = all that there is.Relative clause (संबंधवाचक उपवाक्य) संज्ञा को निश्चित कर दे तो: the few / the little = जितना है, सारा।
Part of a noun: a few / a little + of + determiner + noun.संज्ञा का हिस्सा: a few / a little + of + निर्धारक + संज्ञा।
Very few / very little (no a). Only a few / only a little (a needed). His few friends, never his a few friends.Very few / very little (a के बिना)। Only a few / only a little (a आवश्यक)। His few friends, his a few friends कदापि नहीं।
Few → fewer → fewest (countable). Little → less → least (uncountable). No fewer than eight pedestrians.Few → fewer → fewest (गणनीय)। Little → less → least (अगणनीय)। No fewer than eight pedestrians.

All, Both, Half, Whole

All = more than two. Both = exactly two. (parents, legs, eyes, hands: both.)All = दो से अधिक। Both = ठीक दो। (parents, legs, eyes, hands: both।)
Order: all / both / half → article / possessive / demonstrative → noun. ✘ my all friends, ✔ all my friends.क्रम: all / both / half → article / possessive / demonstrative (निश्चयवाचक) → संज्ञा। ✘ my all friends, ✔ all my friends।
All / both / half + of + determiner + noun, or of + them / us / you / it (object form after of).All / both / half + of + निर्धारक + संज्ञा, या of + them / us / you / it (of के बाद कर्म रूप)।
Half an hour is the usual form; a half hour is also used (a half-hour journey with a hyphen as a modifier). The error is half a hour, an half hour or the wrong article for the noun. One and a half / a quarter + plural noun (one and a half miles).Half an hour सामान्य रूप है; a half hour भी प्रयोग होता है (a half-hour journey, योजक चिह्न के साथ विशेषक के रूप में)। त्रुटि है half a hour, an half hour या संज्ञा के लिए गलत Article। One and a half / a quarter + बहुवचन संज्ञा (one and a half miles)।
The whole + noun = the whole of + noun. Before a pronoun or the name of a place, only the whole of (the whole of it, the whole of India).The whole + संज्ञा = the whole of + संज्ञा। सर्वनाम या स्थान के नाम से पहले केवल the whole of (the whole of it, the whole of India)।
Half, whole, quarter can also be nouns: Two halves make a whole. He cut the apple into quarters.Half, whole, quarter संज्ञा भी हो सकते हैं: Two halves make a whole. He cut the apple into quarters.

Other, Another, The other, Others

Another + singular noun (one more); another is also used before a number + plural noun when the group is one extra amount (another two days, another five minutes). Other + plural noun. The other + noun (the remaining, definite one or ones).Another + एकवचन संज्ञा (एक और); another संख्या + बहुवचन संज्ञा से पहले भी आता है, जब पूरा समूह एक अतिरिक्त मात्रा हो (another two days, another five minutes)। Other + बहुवचन संज्ञा। The other + संज्ञा (बचा हुआ, निश्चित एक या सारे)।
More than one choice left: another. Only one left: the other. Trick: no article, other; a / an fits, another; the fits, the other.एक से अधिक विकल्प बचे: another। केवल एक बचा: the other। युक्ति: article नहीं तो other; a / an लग सके तो another; the लग सके तो the other।
Others is a pronoun and has no noun after it. With a noun, the word is other (other people).Others सर्वनाम है और उसके बाद संज्ञा नहीं आती। संज्ञा के साथ शब्द other होता है (other people)।
A comparison inside one group needs any other + singular noun: greater than any other poet.एक ही समूह के अंदर तुलना में any other + एकवचन संज्ञा चाहिए: greater than any other poet।
The fixed reciprocal phrases are each other and one another. Each another does not exist. One other is valid in another sense (one other reason, I have one other question) but does not mean 'mutually'.निश्चित परस्परवाचक वाक्यांश each other और one another हैं। Each another नहीं होता। One other दूसरे अर्थ में सही है (one other reason, I have one other question), पर इसका अर्थ 'आपस में' नहीं है।

No, None and Not

No + noun (verb by the noun). None of + the + noun (singular verb). No one is singular.No + संज्ञा (क्रिया संज्ञा के अनुसार)। None of + the + संज्ञा (एकवचन क्रिया)। No one एकवचन है।
No is a determiner (before a noun). None is a pronoun (alone or before of).No निर्धारक है (संज्ञा से पहले)। None सर्वनाम है (अकेला या of से पहले)।
No double negative: not … any, never not … none, no any, hardly no.दोहरा निषेध नहीं: not … any, not … none, no any, hardly no कभी नहीं।
To say 'nobody' or 'neither', use none / no / neither instead of all / each / every / any + not (the exam pattern). Be careful with the meaning: Not all students passed (some did) is different from No students passed (none did). Change all … not to none only when total negation is meant.'कोई नहीं' या 'दोनों में से कोई नहीं' कहने के लिए all / each / every / any + not की जगह none / no / neither लगाइए (परीक्षा का पैटर्न)। अर्थ का ध्यान रखिए: Not all students passed (कुछ पास हुए) और No students passed (कोई नहीं हुआ) अलग हैं। All … not को none में तभी बदलिए जब पूर्ण निषेध का अर्थ हो।
Not all of us work = only some work. None of us works = nobody works.Not all of us work = केवल कुछ काम करते हैं। None of us works = कोई नहीं करता।

Enough and two-job words

Enough + noun (determiner). Adjective / adverb + enough (adverb). Enough / enough of alone (pronoun).Enough + संज्ञा (निर्धारक)। विशेषण / क्रिया-विशेषण + enough (क्रिया-विशेषण)। Enough / enough of अकेला (सर्वनाम)।
Too + adjective + to V1 = negative result. Adjective + enough + to V1 = positive result. Into so … that: too gets not, enough does not.Too + विशेषण + to V1 = नकारात्मक परिणाम। विशेषण + enough + to V1 = सकारात्मक परिणाम। So … that में: too के साथ not, enough के साथ नहीं।
A word before a noun is a determiner; without a noun it is a pronoun (some water / some of the water).संज्ञा से पहले आने वाला शब्द निर्धारक है; संज्ञा के बिना वह सर्वनाम है (some water / some of the water)।
After pronoun + of the noun is plural or uncountable with its own determiner, or a singular countable noun that is divided into parts (half of the cake, some of the book), and the verb follows that noun.सर्वनाम + of के बाद संज्ञा बहुवचन या अगणनीय होती है और उसका अपना निर्धारक होता है, या ऐसी एकवचन गणनीय संज्ञा जो हिस्सों में बाँटी गई हो (half of the cake, some of the book), और क्रिया उसी संज्ञा के अनुसार चलती है।
No and every are determiners only. None and every one are pronouns only.No और every केवल निर्धारक हैं। None और every one केवल सर्वनाम हैं।

11. Subject-Verb Agreement Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

Singular subject → is, was, has, does, V1 + s/es. Plural subject → are, were, have, do, V1.एकवचन कर्ता → is, was, has, does, V1 + s/es। बहुवचन कर्ता → are, were, have, do, V1।
I takes am, was, have, do and plain V1; you, we, they are plural.I के साथ am, was, have, do और सादा V1; you, we, they बहुवचन हैं।
The noun after a preposition is an object, never the subject: find the real subject first.पूर्वसर्ग के बाद वाली संज्ञा कर्म है, कर्ता नहीं: पहले असली कर्ता ढूँढिए।
News, mathematics, physics, billiards, measles are singular; people, police, cattle are plural.News, mathematics, physics, billiards, measles एकवचन हैं; people, police, cattle बहुवचन हैं।
The + adjective (the poor, the rich) takes a plural verb; uncountable nouns take a singular verb.The + विशेषण (the poor, the rich) के साथ बहुवचन क्रिया; अगणनीय संज्ञाओं के साथ एकवचन क्रिया।
Group nouns: one body → singular + its; separate members → plural + their; the pronoun must match the verb.समूहवाचक संज्ञाएँ: एक इकाई → एकवचन + its; अलग-अलग सदस्य → बहुवचन + their; सर्वनाम क्रिया से मेल खाए।
Time, distance and amount as one block take a singular verb (Twenty years is a long time).समय, दूरी और राशि एक खंड हों तो एकवचन क्रिया (Twenty years is a long time)।
One of the + plural noun → singular verb; more than one + singular noun → singular verb; many a → singular.One of the + बहुवचन संज्ञा → एकवचन क्रिया; more than one + एकवचन संज्ञा → एकवचन क्रिया; many a → एकवचन।
Each, either, neither, everyone, none are singular, and the later possessive is his / her, not their.Each, either, neither, everyone, none एकवचन हैं, और बाद का Possessive his / her होता है, their नहीं।
A number of = many (plural); the number of = the figure (singular). Fractions and some, all, most follow the noun after of.A number of = many (बहुवचन); the number of = संख्या (एकवचन)। भिन्न और some, all, most of के बाद वाली संज्ञा के अनुसार चलते हैं।
After There / Here, a place phrase or a negative word, the subject comes after the verb.There / Here, स्थान वाले वाक्यांश या निषेधवाचक शब्द के बाद कर्ता, क्रिया के बाद आता है।
Two subjects with and → plural; one article for both nouns → one person; each / every → singular.And से जुड़े दो कर्ता → बहुवचन; दोनों संज्ञाओं के लिए एक article → एक व्यक्ति; each / every → एकवचन।
Either ... or, neither ... nor, not only ... but also: the verb follows the nearer subject.Either ... or, neither ... nor, not only ... but also: क्रिया निकट वाले कर्ता के अनुसार।
With, along with, as well as, together with, except do not make the subject plural: the verb follows the first noun.With, along with, as well as, together with, except से कर्ता बहुवचन नहीं होता: क्रिया पहली संज्ञा के अनुसार।
Relative pronoun as subject → the verb follows the antecedent; gerunds, infinitives and noun clauses as subjects take a singular verb.Relative pronoun (संबंधवाचक सर्वनाम) कर्ता हो → क्रिया Antecedent (पूर्वपद) के अनुसार; Gerund (क्रियावाचक संज्ञा), Infinitive (मूल क्रिया-रूप) और संज्ञा उपवाक्य कर्ता हों → एकवचन क्रिया।
In a long sentence, find the verb first, then the real subject, and bracket everything between them.लंबे वाक्य में पहले क्रिया ढूँढिए, फिर असली कर्ता, और दोनों के बीच का सब कुछ कोष्ठक में रखिए।
Much of goes with uncountable nouns; with countable plurals write many of: Many of the guidelines were ….Much of अगणनीय संज्ञाओं के साथ आता है; गणनीय बहुवचन के साथ many of लिखिए: Many of the guidelines were …।
In P–Q questions, judge each statement on its own; Both correct and Neither correct are real answers.P–Q प्रश्नों में हर कथन को अलग से जाँचिए; Both correct और Neither correct वास्तविक उत्तर हैं।

Basics: matching the subject

Singular subject → is / was / has / does / V1 + s/es. Plural subject → are / were / have / do / V1.एकवचन कर्ता → is / was / has / does / V1 + s/es। बहुवचन कर्ता → are / were / have / do / V1।
I takes am / was / have / do / V1 (I get, never I gets).I के साथ am / was / have / do / V1 (I get, कभी I gets नहीं)।
You, we, they are plural. Two names joined by and are two persons.You, we, they बहुवचन हैं। And से जुड़े दो नाम दो व्यक्ति हैं।
Only the first word of the verb carries the number: does not go, not does not goes.वचन केवल क्रिया के पहले शब्द में दिखता है: does not go, does not goes नहीं।
Change the verb to fit the subject, never the subject to fit the verb. A title or name is one thing. Subjunctive ignores agreement.क्रिया को कर्ता के अनुसार बदलिए, कर्ता को क्रिया के अनुसार नहीं। शीर्षक या नाम एक चीज़ है। Subjunctive (संभाव्यार्थक) में agreement (सामंजस्य) लागू नहीं होता।

Nouns that look different from what they are

Uncountable nouns (advice, furniture, information, luggage) are singular: no -s, no a few, singular verb.अगणनीय संज्ञाएँ (advice, furniture, information, luggage) एकवचन हैं: -s नहीं, a few नहीं, एकवचन क्रिया।
People, police, cattle, children, clergy, poultry are plural, so the verb is plural.People, police, cattle, children, clergy, poultry बहुवचन हैं, इसलिए क्रिया बहुवचन आती है।
News, mathematics, physics, billiards, measles, ethics end in -s but are singular.News, mathematics, physics, billiards, measles, ethics के अंत में -s है पर ये एकवचन हैं।
Politics / mathematics / statistics are plural when they do not name a subject.Politics / mathematics / statistics जब विषय का नाम नहीं होते, तब बहुवचन होते हैं।
The + adjective (the poor, the rich) is plural: plural verb, no -s on the adjective. A title is one thing.The + विशेषण (the poor, the rich) बहुवचन है: बहुवचन क्रिया, विशेषण में -s नहीं। शीर्षक एक चीज़ है।
Uncountable nouns (never plural): luggage, baggage, knowledge, damage, garbage, poetry, crockery, machinery, stationery, scenery, jewellery, cutlery, food, fuel, money, handicraft, work, furniture, advice, information, education, experience, hair, evidence, harm, health, bread, paper, glass, chalk, clothing, music, traffic, weather, mischief, behaviour, travel, equipment, hardware, junk, hatred.अगणनीय संज्ञाएँ (कभी बहुवचन नहीं): luggage, baggage, knowledge, damage, garbage, poetry, crockery, machinery, stationery, scenery, jewellery, cutlery, food, fuel, money, handicraft, work, furniture, advice, information, education, experience, hair, evidence, harm, health, bread, paper, glass, chalk, clothing, music, traffic, weather, mischief, behaviour, travel, equipment, hardware, junk, hatred।
Plural in meaning: people, police, children, poultry, gentry, peasantry, clergy, vermin, cattle. Singular in meaning: news, mathematics, physics, politics, measles, rickets, mumps, shambles, phonetics, billiards, dominoes, athletics, civics, linguistics, ethics.अर्थ में बहुवचन: people, police, children, poultry, gentry, peasantry, clergy, vermin, cattle। अर्थ में एकवचन: news, mathematics, physics, politics, measles, rickets, mumps, shambles, phonetics, billiards, dominoes, athletics, civics, linguistics, ethics।
The + adjective (plural): the blind, the deaf, the destitute, the poor, the dead, the rich, the wealthy, the dying, the elderly, the faithful, the homeless, the injured, the insane, the jobless, the old, the young.The + विशेषण (बहुवचन): the blind, the deaf, the destitute, the poor, the dead, the rich, the wealthy, the dying, the elderly, the faithful, the homeless, the injured, the insane, the jobless, the old, the young।

Group nouns

Group acts as one body → singular verb + it / its / itself.समूह एक इकाई की तरह काम करे → एकवचन क्रिया + it / its / itself।
Members act separately (arguing, divided) → plural verb + they / their / themselves.सदस्य अलग-अलग कार्य करें (arguing, divided) → बहुवचन क्रिया + they / their / themselves।
The verb and the pronoun must agree with each other: has ... its, were ... their.क्रिया और सर्वनाम का आपस में मेल होना चाहिए: has ... its, were ... their।
A group noun written in the plural (teams, families) always takes a plural verb.बहुवचन में लिखी समूहवाचक संज्ञा (teams, families) सदा बहुवचन क्रिया लेती है।
Group nouns: jury, team, family, committee, class, board, panel, staff.समूहवाचक संज्ञाएँ: jury, team, family, committee, class, board, panel, staff।

Time, distance and amount

Time, distance, height or amount taken as one block → singular verb (Twenty years is a long time).समय, दूरी, ऊँचाई या राशि एक खंड की तरह → एकवचन क्रिया (Twenty years is a long time)।
Counted one by one → plural verb (Twenty years have passed).एक-एक करके गिने जाएँ → बहुवचन क्रिया (Twenty years have passed)।
Measure + linking verb + a / an usually means one unit.माप + योजक क्रिया + a / an का अर्थ सामान्यतः एक इकाई होता है।
Number + of + activity (ten hours of writing): the verb follows the activity.संख्या + of + गतिविधि (ten hours of writing): क्रिया गतिविधि के अनुसार लगती है।

One of, more than one, many a

One of + the + plural noun + singular verb: the subject is one.One of + the + बहुवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया: कर्ता one है।
More than one + singular noun + singular verb.More than one + एकवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया।
More + plural noun + than one → plural verb. More than two / five + plural noun → plural verb.More + बहुवचन संज्ञा + than one → बहुवचन क्रिया। More than two / five + बहुवचन संज्ञा → बहुवचन क्रिया।
Many a + singular noun + singular verb, with a singular pronoun (his).Many a + एकवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया, और एकवचन सर्वनाम (his)।

Fractions and quantity words

Fraction / some / all / any / most / half + of + noun → the verb follows the noun after of.भिन्न / some / all / any / most / half + of + संज्ञा → क्रिया of के बाद वाली संज्ञा के अनुसार।
Much, little, less, a great deal of, a large amount of + uncountable noun → singular verb.Much, little, less, a great deal of, a large amount of + अगणनीय संज्ञा → एकवचन क्रिया।
Both, few, a few, many, several, a great many, a dozen + plural noun → plural verb.Both, few, a few, many, several, a great many, a dozen + बहुवचन संज्ञा → बहुवचन क्रिया।
A number of = many → plural verb. The number of = exact figure → singular verb.A number of = many → बहुवचन क्रिया। The number of = सटीक संख्या → एकवचन क्रिया।
Fraction words: some of, a lot of, plenty of, one third of, two fifths of, all of, most of, half of, 50%, 50% of. Plural quantity words: both, few, a few, many, a great many, a number of, a large number of, several, a dozen, a million.भिन्न-शब्द: some of, a lot of, plenty of, one third of, two fifths of, all of, most of, half of, 50%, 50% of। बहुवचन मात्रावाचक शब्द: both, few, a few, many, a great many, a number of, a large number of, several, a dozen, a million।

Each, either, neither, everyone, none

Each, either, neither, every, everyone, everybody, everything, someone, anyone, nobody, nothing, none → singular verb.Each, either, neither, every, everyone, everybody, everything, someone, anyone, nobody, nothing, none → एकवचन क्रिया।
Each / either / neither / any / none + of + plural noun → plural noun, singular verb.Each / either / neither / any / none + of + बहुवचन संज्ञा → संज्ञा बहुवचन, क्रिया एकवचन।
Each / every / either / neither / another / many a + singular noun. No of, no plural.Each / every / either / neither / another / many a + एकवचन संज्ञा। Of नहीं, बहुवचन नहीं।
Plural subject + each (They each have) → plural verb.बहुवचन कर्ता + each (They each have) → बहुवचन क्रिया।
Singular subject word → his / her / its, not their: the possessive must match the verb.एकवचन कर्ता-शब्द → his / her / its, their नहीं: जैसी क्रिया, वैसा Possessive।

There, here and reverse order

There / Here + verb + subject: the verb agrees with the noun after it.There / Here + क्रिया + कर्ता: क्रिया उसके बाद वाली संज्ञा के अनुसार।
Adverb of place + singular verb + singular noun / plural verb + plural noun.Adverb of place (स्थानवाचक क्रियाविशेषण) + एकवचन क्रिया + एकवचन संज्ञा / बहुवचन क्रिया + बहुवचन संज्ञा।
After a negative word at the start (rarely, not only, so + adjective) the helping verb comes first; the subject is after it.शुरू में निषेधवाचक शब्द (rarely, not only, so + adjective) हो तो सहायक क्रिया पहले आती है; कर्ता उसके बाद होता है।
Rewrite in the normal order (subject first), then check the verb.सामान्य क्रम में दोबारा लिखिए (पहले कर्ता), फिर क्रिया जाँचिए।

Subjects joined by and

Singular + and + singular → plural verb. A company, firm or book name is one unit.एकवचन + and + एकवचन → बहुवचन क्रिया। कंपनी, फ़र्म या पुस्तक का नाम एक इकाई है।
Article + N + and + N → one person → singular. Article + N + and + Article + N → two persons → plural.Article + N + and + N → एक व्यक्ति → एकवचन। Article + N + and + Article + N → दो व्यक्ति → बहुवचन।
Brother and sister, mother and father, uncle and aunt → always plural.Brother and sister, mother and father, uncle and aunt → सदा बहुवचन।
Bread and butter, horse and carriage, rice and curry, hammer and sickle, bag and baggage, slow and steady → singular. Time and tide → plural.Bread and butter, horse and carriage, rice and curry, hammer and sickle, bag and baggage, slow and steady → एकवचन। Time and tide → बहुवचन।
Each / every + noun + and + noun → singular verb. No + noun + and + no + noun → verb follows the noun.Each / every + संज्ञा + and + संज्ञा → एकवचन क्रिया। No + संज्ञा + and + no + संज्ञा → क्रिया संज्ञा के अनुसार।
Always plural: brother and sister, mother and father, uncle and aunt. Usually one unit: bread and butter, horse and carriage, rice and curry, hammer and sickle, macaroni and cheese, bag and baggage, slow and steady. Exception: time and tide (plural).सदा बहुवचन: brother and sister, mother and father, uncle and aunt। सामान्यतः एक इकाई: bread and butter, horse and carriage, rice and curry, hammer and sickle, macaroni and cheese, bag and baggage, slow and steady। अपवाद: time and tide (बहुवचन)।

Either ... or, neither ... nor

Either ... or / neither ... nor / not only ... but also → the verb agrees with the nearer subject.Either ... or / neither ... nor / not only ... but also → क्रिया निकट वाले कर्ता के अनुसार।
The first subject has no effect on the verb.पहले कर्ता का क्रिया पर कोई प्रभाव नहीं पड़ता।
The same concept works for a single or and a single nor.यही Concept अकेले or और अकेले nor पर भी चलता है।
Later pronouns and possessives also follow the nearer subject.बाद के सर्वनाम और Possessive भी निकट वाले कर्ता का अनुसरण करते हैं।

With, along with, as well as

Noun 1 + preposition / phrase + noun 2 → the verb follows noun 1.संज्ञा 1 + पूर्वसर्ग / वाक्यांश + संज्ञा 2 → क्रिया संज्ञा 1 के अनुसार।
Joining words: with, along with, together with, as well as, in addition to, besides, like, unlike, accompanied by, led by, except, rather than, less than, and not.जोड़ने वाले शब्द: with, along with, together with, as well as, in addition to, besides, like, unlike, accompanied by, led by, except, rather than, less than, and not।
Noun after noun (town after town) → singular noun, singular verb.Noun (संज्ञा) after noun (town after town) → एकवचन संज्ञा, एकवचन क्रिया।
Nothing but / none but + noun → the verb follows that noun.Nothing but / none but + संज्ञा → क्रिया उसी संज्ञा के अनुसार।
Everything / everyone / anything / anyone + but / except → singular verb.Everything / everyone / anything / anyone + but / except → एकवचन क्रिया।
Joining words that never make the subject plural: as well as, in addition to, besides, like, unlike, with, along with, together with, accompanied by, guided / headed / led by, except, rather than, less than, in company of, and not.जोड़ने वाले शब्द जो कर्ता को कभी बहुवचन नहीं बनाते: as well as, in addition to, besides, like, unlike, with, along with, together with, accompanied by, guided / headed / led by, except, rather than, less than, in company of, and not।

Between the subject and the verb

The real subject is never inside an of-phrase or any prepositional phrase.असली कर्ता किसी of-वाक्यांश या पूर्वसर्गीय वाक्यांश के अंदर नहीं होता।
Subject + , + appositive + , + verb → the verb agrees with the subject.कर्ता + , + Appositive + , + क्रिया → क्रिया कर्ता के अनुसार।
Remove the part between the two commas and read what is left.दो commas (अल्पविराम) के बीच का भाग हटाकर बचा वाक्य पढ़िए।
A participle phrase is a short relative clause; it does not change the subject.Participle (कृदंत) वाक्यांश छोटा Relative clause (संबंधवाचक उपवाक्य) है; यह कर्ता को नहीं बदलता।
Noun + that-clause (the fact that ...): the noun is the subject. One subject with many verbs: every verb agrees.संज्ञा + that-उपवाक्य (the fact that ...): संज्ञा ही कर्ता है। एक कर्ता की कई क्रियाएँ: हर क्रिया मेल खाएगी।

Relative pronouns

Relative pronoun as subject → the verb agrees with its antecedent (the noun before it).Relative pronoun (संबंधवाचक सर्वनाम) कर्ता हो → क्रिया उसके Antecedent (पूर्वपद) (उससे पहले वाली संज्ञा) के अनुसार।
Find the antecedent by asking: whom is this clause about?Antecedent (पूर्वपद) ढूँढने के लिए पूछिए: यह उपवाक्य किसके बारे में है?
One of those who / one of the ... who → plural verb after who; main verb follows one.One of those who / one of the ... who → who के बाद बहुवचन क्रिया; मुख्य क्रिया one के अनुसार।
Only one of the ... who → singular verb after who.Only one of the ... who → who के बाद एकवचन क्रिया।

Gerunds, infinitives, noun clauses

V1 + ing + noun: if the noun is the subject, the verb follows the noun (Working women need); if the -ing word is the subject, the verb is singular.V1 + ing + संज्ञा: संज्ञा कर्ता हो तो क्रिया संज्ञा के अनुसार (Working women need); -ing शब्द कर्ता हो तो क्रिया एकवचन।
One gerund → singular verb. Two gerunds joined by and → plural verb.एक Gerund (क्रियावाचक संज्ञा) → एकवचन क्रिया। And से जुड़े दो Gerunds → बहुवचन क्रिया।
Infinitive (to + V1) as subject → singular verb.Infinitive (to + V1) कर्ता हो → एकवचन क्रिया।
Noun clause (That ... / What ...) as subject → singular verb; the noun inside it does not decide.संज्ञा उपवाक्य (That ... / What ...) कर्ता हो → एकवचन क्रिया; उसके अंदर की संज्ञा क्रिया तय नहीं करती।

Long sentences

Find the verb → find the real subject → bracket the middle.पहले क्रिया → फिर असली कर्ता → बीच का भाग कोष्ठक में।
Of-phrase, commas, along with / as well as / together with do not change the verb.Of-वाक्यांश, अल्पविराम, along with / as well as / together with क्रिया को नहीं बदलते।
Neither … nor / not only … but also / either … or → nearer subject. All that is needed → singular.Neither … nor / not only … but also / either … or → पास वाला कर्ता। All that is needed → एकवचन।

Much, many, little, few, less, fewer

Much / little / less + uncountable → singular verb. Many / few / fewer + countable plural → plural verb.Much / little / less + अगणनीय → एकवचन क्रिया। Many / few / fewer + गणनीय बहुवचन → बहुवचन क्रिया।
Much of the guidelines is wrong; write many of the guidelines. Less mistakes is wrong; write fewer mistakes.Much of the guidelines गलत है; many of the guidelines लिखिए। Less mistakes गलत है; fewer mistakes लिखिए।

P–Q statements

Judge P and Q separately; Both correct and Neither correct are real answers.P और Q को अलग-अलग जाँचिए; Both correct और Neither correct वास्तविक उत्तर हैं।
A group noun takes a plural verb when the members act separately: The jury were divided.सदस्य अलग-अलग कार्य करें तो समूहवाचक संज्ञा के साथ बहुवचन क्रिया आती है: The jury were divided।

12. Adverb Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

An adverb describes a verb, an adjective or another adverb; find the question it answers: how, when, where, how often, to what extent.Adverb क्रिया, विशेषण या दूसरे adverb को बताता है; देखें वह किस प्रश्न का उत्तर है: how, when, where, how often, to what extent।
An adverb never comes between a verb and its object: speaks English fluently.Adverb क्रिया और कर्म के बीच कभी नहीं आता: speaks English fluently।
Action verb + adverb (performed well); linking verb + adjective (became angry); adverb before an adjective or participle (seriously injured).Action verb (क्रियावाचक क्रिया) + adverb (performed well); संयोजक क्रिया + विशेषण (became angry); विशेषण या participle (कृदंत) से पहले adverb (seriously injured)।
Fastly, straightly, oftenly do not exist; hard ≠ hardly, high ≠ highly, late ≠ lately.Fastly, straightly, oftenly होते ही नहीं; hard ≠ hardly, high ≠ highly, late ≠ lately।
For -ly adjectives (cowardly, friendly) say in a … manner or like a ….-ly विशेषणों (cowardly, friendly) के लिए in a … manner या like a … बोलिए।
No preposition before an adverb: went home, went abroad, next week; with the or my the word is a noun: to my home.Adverb से पहले preposition नहीं: went home, went abroad, next week; the या my लगने पर संज्ञा बन जाता है: to my home।
Order of adverbs: Manner → Place → Time; with go, come, enter: Place → Manner → Time; same type: specific to general.Adverbs का क्रम: Manner → Place → Time; go, come, enter के साथ: Place → Manner → Time; एक ही प्रकार के: विशिष्ट से सामान्य।
Still = continuity, yet = until now (negative or question). Frequency adverbs sit in the mid position: is always, often read, never have to.Still = निरंतरता, yet = अब तक (निषेध या प्रश्न)। बारंबारता के adverbs मध्य स्थिति में प्रयोग होते हैं: is always, often read, never have to।
Too … to, so … that, enough to: never leave the pair word out. Enough goes after the adjective.Too … to, so … that, enough to: जोड़ी का शब्द कभी मत छोड़ो। Enough विशेषण के बाद आता है।
Much + comparative or V3; very + positive degree. Too much + noun; much too + adjective.Much + तुलनात्मक या V3; very + मूल अवस्था। Too much + संज्ञा; much too + विशेषण।
Article with degree: too tall a player, quite a tall player, a very tall player.Degree के साथ article: too tall a player, quite a tall player, a very tall player।
Hardly, scarcely, barely are already negative: hardly any, never hardly no or did not hardly.Hardly, scarcely, barely पहले से निषेधात्मक हैं: hardly any, hardly no या did not hardly कभी नहीं।
Also does not normally end a sentence (use too or as well); even cannot join clauses (use even though).Also आम तौर पर वाक्य के अंत में नहीं (too या as well लगाएँ); even उपवाक्य नहीं जोड़ता (even though लगाएँ)।
Where after a place, when after a time, why after a reason; a conjunctive adverb joins by meaning: else for a warning, however for contrast, therefore for result.स्थान के बाद where, समय के बाद when, कारण के बाद why; संयोजक adverb अर्थ से जोड़ता है: चेतावनी के लिए else, विरोध के लिए however, परिणाम के लिए therefore।

Adverb: kinds, questions and positions

An adverb tells more about a verb, an adjective or another adverb. It can be a word, a phrase or a clause.Adverb किसी क्रिया, विशेषण या दूसरे adverb की विशेषता बताता है। यह शब्द, वाक्यांश या उपवाक्य हो सकता है।
Four kinds: simple, interrogative, relative, conjunctive. Interrogative adverbs: when, where, why, how. Who, whom, which, what are interrogative pronouns.चार प्रकार: simple, interrogative (प्रश्नवाचक), relative (संबंधवाचक), conjunctive। Interrogative adverbs: when, where, why, how। Who, whom, which, what प्रश्नवाचक सर्वनाम हैं।
The question test: manner how, time when, place where, frequency how often, degree to what extent.प्रश्न-परीक्षण: ढंग how, समय when, स्थान where, बारंबारता how often, मात्रा to what extent।
Four positions: front (before the subject), mid (after the subject or helping verb, before the main verb), end (after the verb and object), focus (just before the stressed word).चार स्थितियाँ: front (कर्ता से पहले), mid (कर्ता या सहायक क्रिया के बाद, मुख्य क्रिया से पहले), end (क्रिया और कर्म के बाद), focus (जिस शब्द पर ज़ोर हो उसके ठीक पहले)।
An adverb never comes between a verb and its object.Adverb क्रिया और उसके कर्म के बीच कभी नहीं आता।

Adverbs of manner

An adverb of manner answers how? It is made as adjective + ly, or as in a … manner / way / fashion.Manner का adverb how? का उत्तर है। यह adjective (विशेषण) + ly से बनता है, या in a … manner / way / fashion से।
No object after the verb: put the adverb right after the verb. ✔ He spoke politely.क्रिया के बाद कर्म नहीं है: adverb क्रिया के ठीक बाद लगाइए। ✔ He spoke politely.
Short object: adverb after the object. Long object (phrase or clause): adverb before the verb.छोटा कर्म: adverb कर्म के बाद। बड़ा कर्म (phrase या clause): adverb क्रिया से पहले।
Never between the verb and its object. ✘ She painted beautifully the wall. ✔ She painted the wall beautifully.क्रिया और कर्म के बीच कभी नहीं। ✘ She painted beautifully the wall. ✔ She painted the wall beautifully.

Adjective or adverb?

Action verb + adverb; linking verb + adjective. Linking verbs: be, become, seem, appear, turn, get, grow, taste, smell, keep, remain, prove.Action verb (क्रियावाचक क्रिया) + adverb; संयोजक क्रिया + विशेषण। Linking verbs (योजक क्रिया): be, become, seem, appear, turn, get, grow, taste, smell, keep, remain, prove।
A linking verb describes the state of the subject, not an action. Test: replace the verb by is / was.संयोजक क्रिया कर्ता की अवस्था बताती है, काम नहीं। जाँच: क्रिया की जगह is / was रखिए।
The adverb form of good is well. ✘ He sings good. ✔ He sings well.Good का adverb रूप well है। ✘ He sings good. ✔ He sings well.
An adverb comes just before the adjective or participle it describes: extremely upset, seriously injured. Some degree words need no *-ly*: very, quite, so, too (very upset).Adverb उस विशेषण या participle (कृदंत) के ठीक पहले आता है जिसे वह बताता है: extremely upset, seriously injured। कुछ मात्रा बताने वाले शब्दों को *-ly* नहीं चाहिए: very, quite, so, too (very upset)।
Before a noun only an adjective can stand. ✘ a quickly decision ✔ a quick decisionसंज्ञा से पहले केवल विशेषण आ सकता है। ✘ a quickly decision ✔ a quick decision

Look-alikes: -ly adjectives and one-form words

Adjectives ending in -ly (costly, jolly, friendly, lonely, lively, cowardly …) get no second ly. Say in a … manner / way / fashion or like a ….-ly पर समाप्त होने वाले विशेषणों (costly, jolly, friendly, lonely, lively, cowardly …) में दूसरा 'ly' नहीं लगता। in a … manner / way / fashion या like a … बोलिए।
Fast, straight, hard, high, late, early, daily, weekly … are the same as adjective and adverb. ✘ fastly ✘ straightly ✘ oftenlyFast, straight, hard, high, late, early, daily, weekly … विशेषण और adverb दोनों में एक जैसे हैं। ✘ fastly ✘ straightly ✘ oftenly
hard = with effort, hardly = scarcely. late = after time, lately = recently. high = at a height, highly = greatly.hard = मेहनत से, hardly = मुश्किल से। late = देर से, lately = हाल ही में। high = ऊँचाई पर, highly = बहुत अधिक।
Manly is not used as an adverb in standard English; use in a manly manner or manfully.Manly को standard English में adverb की तरह प्रयोग नहीं करते; in a manly manner या manfully लिखिए।
Words that are both adjective and adverb in one form: daily, hourly, weekly, monthly, yearly, fast, straight, outright.विशेषण और adverb दोनों में एक रूप वाले शब्द: daily, hourly, weekly, monthly, yearly, fast, straight, outright।
Noun → adjective → adverb phrase: coward → cowardly → in a cowardly manner (like a coward); order → orderly → in an orderly manner; man → manly → manfully.संज्ञा → विशेषण → adverb वाक्यांश: coward → cowardly → in a cowardly manner (like a coward); order → orderly → in an orderly manner; man → manly → manfully।

Adverbs of place

Adverbs of place answer where? and mostly sit at the end of the sentence.स्थान के adverbs where? का उत्तर देते हैं और अधिकतर वाक्य के अंत में प्रयोग होते हैं।
Home, abroad, here, there are adverbs: no preposition of direction after a verb of movement (went home, went abroad, come here). Other prepositions are fine: from here, at home, from abroad, in there. ✘ went to home / went to abroad ✔ went home / went abroadHome, abroad, here, there adverbs हैं: गति वाली क्रिया के बाद दिशा बताने वाला preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) नहीं लगता (went home, went abroad, come here)। दूसरे prepositions ठीक हैं: from here, at home, from abroad, in there। ✘ went to home / went to abroad ✔ went home / went abroad
With a determiner, home becomes a noun and takes to: to my home.निर्धारक (determiner) के साथ home संज्ञा बन जाता है और to लेता है: to my home।
Abroad (adverb) = in or to a foreign country; foreign (adjective) needs a noun.Abroad (adverb) = विदेश में या विदेश को; foreign (विशेषण) के बाद संज्ञा चाहिए।
High = at a height (place); highly = greatly (degree).High = ऊँचाई पर (स्थान); highly = बहुत अधिक (मात्रा)।

Adverbs of time; yet, still, already

Adverbs of time answer when? They mostly sit at the end; the new information goes last.समय के adverbs when? का उत्तर देते हैं। ये अधिकतर अंत में प्रयोग होते हैं; नई सूचना सबसे अंत में।
Still = continuity (mid position). Yet = until now, in negatives and questions. Already = by now. ✔ We still have time.Still = निरंतरता (मध्य स्थिति)। Yet = अब तक, निषेध और प्रश्नों में। Already = अब तक (पहले से)। ✔ We still have time.
No preposition before an adverb: next week, last Sunday, this Sunday, every month, home, here.Adverb से पहले preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) नहीं: next week, last Sunday, this Sunday, every month, home, here।
With the or another determiner the word is a noun, so a preposition comes: in the next week.The या कोई और निर्धारक लगने पर शब्द संज्ञा है, इसलिए preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) आता है: in the next week।
Last year = the year just gone; the year before last = two years back.Last year = बीता हुआ साल; the year before last = दो साल पहले।
Later = afterwards; latter = the second of two. Last year and the year before last are different.Later = बाद में; latter = दो में से दूसरा। Last year और the year before last अलग हैं।
Fixed phrases keep the preposition: from here, since then. Idioms take none: body and soul, heart and soul, bag and baggage.स्थिर वाक्यांशों में preposition रहता है: from here, since then। मुहावरों में कोई नहीं: body and soul, heart and soul, bag and baggage।

Order of adverbs

Most verbs: Manner → Place → Time is the normal starting order; emphasis or length can change it. In the exam, choose the option that follows MPT. ✔ She sang beautifully at home today.अधिकतर क्रियाएँ: Manner → Place → Time सामान्य शुरुआती क्रम है; ज़ोर या लंबाई से यह क्रम बदल सकता है। परीक्षा में वह विकल्प चुनें जो MPT का पालन करता हो। ✔ She sang beautifully at home today.
Verbs of movement (go, come, enter): Place → Manner → Time. ✔ He went home quickly yesterday.गति की क्रियाएँ (go, come, enter): Place → Manner → Time। ✔ He went home quickly yesterday.
Two or more time adverbs, or two or more place adverbs: specific to general (smaller to bigger). ✔ at 12 midnight on 15th August in 1947दो या अधिक समय के adverbs, या दो या अधिक स्थान के adverbs: विशिष्ट से सामान्य (छोटे से बड़े)। ✔ at 12 midnight on 15th August in 1947

Adverbs of frequency

Indefinite frequency (always, often, usually, seldom, never …): mid position. Between the helping verb and the main verb; before the main verb if there is no helping verb. Frequency adverbs can move to the front or end for emphasis (Sometimes I walk, I go there often); the exam tests the default mid position.अनिश्चित बारंबारता (always, often, usually, seldom, never …): मध्य स्थिति। सहायक और मुख्य क्रिया के बीच; सहायक क्रिया न हो तो मुख्य क्रिया से पहले। ज़ोर देने के लिए बारंबारता के adverbs आरंभ या अंत में भी जा सकते हैं (Sometimes I walk, I go there often); परीक्षा सामान्य मध्य स्थिति को परखती है।
After be-verbs (is, am, are, was, were); before have to and used to. ✔ I am always happy. ✔ We never have to wait.Be-क्रियाओं के बाद (is, am, are, was, were); have to और used to से पहले। ✔ I am always happy. ✔ We never have to wait.
Definite frequency (daily, every day, once, every month): end of the sentence.निश्चित बारंबारता (daily, every day, once, every month): वाक्य के अंत में।
Fixed partners: seldom or never, seldom if ever. Never seldom if never, seldom but never.स्थिर साथी: seldom or never, seldom if ever। Seldom if never, seldom but never कभी नहीं।
Ever sits before the main verb: I have ever met, not I have met ever. A negative is made with never, not ever.Ever मुख्य क्रिया से पहले प्रयोग होता है: I have ever met, I have met ever नहीं। निषेध never से बनता है, ever से नहीं।

Very, too, so, enough

Very + adj / adv: plain strength. Too + adj + to + V1: excess, a negative sense. So + adj + that + clause: strength with a result. Adj + enough + to + V1: sufficiency.Very + adj / adv: सादी तीव्रता। Too + adj + to + V1: आवश्यकता से अधिक, नकारात्मक भाव। So + adj + that + clause (उपवाक्य): तीव्रता और परिणाम। Adj + enough + to + V1: पर्याप्तता।
In SSC sentences so, too, as are expected with their pair word (so … that, too … to, as … as). Without the pair the sentence is not wrong in every context: He is too tall (for this door) and I am old enough are complete when the standard is understood, and He is so tall! is an exclamation. When the exam sentence leaves the pair word out, mark it. ✔ He is too tall to play with us.SSC के वाक्यों में so, too, as से उनके जोड़ी वाले शब्द की अपेक्षा की जाती है (so … that, too … to, as … as)। जोड़ी के बिना वाक्य हर संदर्भ में गलत नहीं होता: He is too tall (इस दरवाज़े के लिए) और I am old enough तब पूरे हैं जब मानक समझ में आ रहा हो, और He is so tall! एक विस्मयबोधक वाक्य है। जब परीक्षा का वाक्य जोड़ी वाला शब्द छोड़ दे, तब उसे चिह्नित कीजिए। ✔ He is too tall to play with us.
Enough comes after the adjective or adverb, before a noun. ✘ isn't enough big ✔ isn't big enoughEnough विशेषण या adverb के बाद आता है, संज्ञा से पहले। ✘ isn't enough big ✔ isn't big enough
After too the infinitive is to + V1, and a passive sense gives to be + V3. ✔ too heavy to be donetoo के बाद infinitive (मूल क्रिया-रूप) to + V1 होता है, और कर्मवाच्य का भाव हो तो to be + V3। ✔ too heavy to be done
Two degree adverbs for one adjective are wrong: ✘ quite too simple. Drop one.एक विशेषण के लिए दो degree adverbs (परिमाणवाचक क्रियाविशेषण) गलत हैं: ✘ quite too simple। एक हटाइए।
An adverb of degree after a verb works only with a verb that can have a degree: ✔ understood a little bit; ✘ passed the exam a little bit.क्रिया के बाद degree का adverb केवल उस क्रिया के साथ चलता है जिसमें मात्रा हो सकती है: ✔ understood a little bit; ✘ passed the exam a little bit।
Result → so … that; no result → very. With so … that, ability is shown by can (present) and could (past).परिणाम हो → so … that; परिणाम नहीं → very। So … that के साथ क्षमता can (वर्तमान) और could (भूतकाल) से दिखती है।

Much, quite, such, the article, too much / much too

Very + positive degree or -ing adjective; much + comparative or V3 that still has a passive (event) meaning: much acclaimed, much admired. Participles that have become adjectives take very: very tired, very pleased, very surprised. ✔ much better ✔ much acclaimedVery + मूल अवस्था या -ing विशेषण; much + तुलनात्मक अवस्था या ऐसी V3 जिसमें अब भी कर्मवाच्य (event) का अर्थ है: much acclaimed, much admired। जो participles (कृदंत) विशेषण बन चुके हैं, उनके साथ very आता है: very tired, very pleased, very surprised। ✔ much better ✔ much acclaimed
For a verb, never very alone: very much.क्रिया के लिए very अकेला कभी नहीं: very much।
Fairly usually goes with pleasant qualities and rather with unpleasant ones, but rather good and fairly bad also occur; rather can also mean 'a little more than usual'. In the exam, rather less is the key, not fairly less.Fairly प्रायः सुखद गुणों के साथ और rather अप्रिय गुणों के साथ आता है, पर rather good और fairly bad भी मिलते हैं; rather का अर्थ 'सामान्य से थोड़ा अधिक' भी हो सकता है। परीक्षा में कुंजी rather less है, fairly less नहीं।
So / as / too / this / that / how + adj + a + noun. Such / quite / many / what + a + adj + noun. a / an + very / really + adj + noun.So / as / too / this / that / how + adj + a + noun (संज्ञा)। Such / quite / many / what + a + adj + noun। a / an + very / really + adj + noun।
Too much + noun; much too + adjective / adverb. To much does not exist.Too much + संज्ञा; much too + विशेषण / adverb। To much कुछ नहीं होता।
A degree adverb stands right before the word it stresses: incredibly fast, reasonably cheap.Degree का adverb उस शब्द के ठीक पहले रहता है जिस पर ज़ोर देता है: incredibly fast, reasonably cheap।

Focus, sentence and viewpoint adverbs

A focus adverb stands just before the word it stresses. The meaning of only changes with its place.Focus adverb उस शब्द के ठीक पहले प्रयोग होता है जिस पर ज़ोर देता है। Only की जगह बदलने से अर्थ बदल जाता है।
Also usually sits before the verb or at the start; at the end of a sentence it is uncommon, and too or as well is preferred (the exam key). ✘ a pencil also ✔ a pencil tooAlso प्रायः क्रिया से पहले या आरंभ में आता है; वाक्य के अंत में यह कम प्रचलित है, और too या as well को वरीयता दी जाती है (परीक्षा की कुंजी)। ✘ a pencil also ✔ a pencil too
Even is an adverb; to join clauses use even though.Even adverb है; उपवाक्य जोड़ने के लिए even though प्रयोग कीजिए।
Specially = for a purpose; especially = particularly. Exactly = precisely; namely introduces exact items.Specially = किसी उद्देश्य से; especially = विशेष रूप से। Exactly = ठीक-ठीक; namely ठीक-ठीक वस्तुएँ बताता है।
Sentence adverbs (fortunately, honestly, generally, probably) and viewpoint adverbs (personally, technically) start the sentence with a comma.Sentence adverbs (fortunately, honestly, generally, probably) और viewpoint adverbs (personally, technically) अल्पविराम के साथ वाक्य के आरंभ में आते हैं।
Maybe (one word) = perhaps; may be (two words) = helping verb + be.Maybe (एक शब्द) = perhaps; may be (दो शब्द) = सहायक क्रिया + be।

Negation and affirmation

Negative adverbs (not, never, seldom, rarely …) mostly come before the verb; little and nowhere come after the verb.निषेध के adverbs (not, never, seldom, rarely …) अधिकतर क्रिया से पहले आते हैं; little और nowhere क्रिया के बाद।
One negative per clause. Two negatives can be meaningful in good English (not uncommon); that is different from the error cannot hardly. ✘ should not go nowhere ✔ should not go anywhereएक उपवाक्य में एक ही निषेध। अच्छी अंग्रेज़ी में दो निषेध अर्थपूर्ण भी हो सकते हैं (not uncommon); यह cannot hardly वाली त्रुटि से अलग बात है। ✘ should not go nowhere ✔ should not go anywhere
Hardly, scarcely, barely are already negative: no not, no no, no never with them. Use hardly any.Hardly, scarcely, barely पहले से निषेधात्मक हैं: इनके साथ न not, न no, न never। hardly any लगाइए।
Forbid takes no not: ✘ forbade him not to enter.Forbid के साथ not नहीं: ✘ forbade him not to enter।
Affirmation adverbs (certainly, surely, definitely, indeed) come after the helping verb, or at the start. Use the adverb, not sure.पुष्टि के adverbs (certainly, surely, definitely, indeed) सहायक क्रिया के बाद, या आरंभ में आते हैं। Adverb लगाएँ, sure नहीं।

Relative and conjunctive adverbs

A relative adverb follows a noun of place, time, reason or manner: place + where, time + when, reason + why. It can be dropped informally. The joining word depends on its job in the clause: the place where we stayed (adverb) but the place which we visited (object).संबंधवाचक adverb स्थान/समय/कारण/ढंग वाली संज्ञा के बाद आता है: place + where, time + when, reason + why। अनौपचारिक में हटाया जा सकता है। जोड़ने वाला शब्द कौन-सा आएगा, यह उपवाक्य में उसके काम पर निर्भर है: the place where we stayed (adverb) लेकिन the place which we visited (कर्म)।
✘ the way how ✔ the way in which / the way. Who, whom, which, that are relative pronouns, not adverbs.✘ the way how ✔ the way in which / the way। Who, whom, which, that संबंधवाचक सर्वनाम हैं, adverbs नहीं।
Wherever = at any place; whenever = at any time. No matter + how / where / what + clause.Wherever = किसी भी स्थान पर; whenever = किसी भी समय। No matter + how / where / what + उपवाक्य।
A conjunction joins grammatically and takes no full stop or semicolon. A conjunctive adverb joins by meaning and comes after a full stop or semicolon.Conjunction (संयोजक) व्याकरण से जोड़ता है और उसके साथ पूर्ण विराम या अर्द्धविराम नहीं आता। Conjunctive adverb (संयोजक क्रियाविशेषण) अर्थ से जोड़ता है और पूर्ण विराम या अर्द्धविराम के बाद आता है।
Addition: moreover, furthermore, besides, also. Contrast: however, nevertheless, still, on the contrary. Result: therefore, thus, hence, consequently.जोड़: moreover, furthermore, besides, also। विरोध: however, nevertheless, still, on the contrary। परिणाम: therefore, thus, hence, consequently।
A warning takes else / otherwise; continuity takes still. The tense must match the story.चेतावनी के लिए else / otherwise; निरंतरता के लिए still। काल कहानी से मेल खाना चाहिए।

Confusing adverbs

Altogether = completely, in total; all together = as one group.Altogether = पूरी तरह, कुल मिलाकर; all together = सब एक साथ।
Nearly = almost (before a number); near = close. At least = the minimum; at last = finally.Nearly = लगभग (संख्या से पहले); near = पास। At least = कम से कम; at last = अंततः।
Fairly = positive colour; rather = negative colour. Quite = to a degree; quiet = silent.Fairly = सकारात्मक भाव; rather = नकारात्मक भाव। Quite = काफ़ी; quiet = शांत।
Still = continuity; yet = until now (negative or question); already = by now.Still = निरंतरता; yet = अब तक (निषेध या प्रश्न); already = अब तक (पहले से)।
Hard = with effort, hardly = scarcely. Late = after time, lately = recently. High = at a height, highly = greatly. Close = near, closely = carefully.Hard = मेहनत से, hardly = मुश्किल से। Late = देर से, lately = हाल ही में। High = ऊँचाई पर, highly = बहुत अधिक। Close = पास, closely = ध्यान से।
Specially = for a purpose; especially = particularly. Everyday (adjective) = ordinary; every day (adverb) = daily.Specially = किसी उद्देश्य से; especially = विशेष रूप से। Everyday (विशेषण) = रोज़मर्रा का; every day (adverb) = प्रतिदिन।
Sometime = at some point; sometimes = occasionally; some time = a period. Write all right in two words.Sometime = किसी समय; sometimes = कभी-कभी; some time = कुछ अवधि। All right दो शब्दों में लिखिए।
Pairs to remember: dead / deadly / fatally, deep / deeply, direct / directly, free / freely, just / justly, loud / loudly / aloud, low / lowly, right / rightly, sharp / sharply, wide / widely.याद रखने योग्य जोड़े: dead / deadly / fatally, deep / deeply, direct / directly, free / freely, just / justly, loud / loudly / aloud, low / lowly, right / rightly, sharp / sharply, wide / widely।

13. Inversion Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

Inversion means putting the helping verb before the subject; the structure looks like a question but the meaning is a statement.Inversion का अर्थ सहायक क्रिया को कर्ता से पहले रखना है; बनावट प्रश्न जैसी, अर्थ कथन का।
A negative word at the start must stay linked to its verb, so the helping verb jumps ahead.आरंभ का निषेधवाची शब्द अपनी क्रिया से जुड़ा रहना चाहिए, इसलिए सहायक क्रिया आगे आ जाती है।
No helping verb? Use do / does / did + V1, and keep the original tense.सहायक क्रिया नहीं है? do / does / did + V1 लगाइए, और मूल काल रखिए।
No sooner … than; hardly / scarcely / barely … when. Never cross the pairs.No sooner … than; hardly / scarcely / barely … when। जोड़ियों को कभी न मिलाइए।
Hardly / no sooner + had + subject + V3; after did always V1.Hardly / no sooner + had + कर्ता + V3; did के बाद सदैव V1।
Hardly in its normal place (had hardly reached) needs no inversion.Hardly अपनी सामान्य जगह पर (had hardly reached) हो तो उलटाव नहीं।
Never, seldom, rarely, little at the start: Never have I seen, Little did I know.आरंभ में Never, seldom, rarely, little: Never have I seen, Little did I know।
In no way, on no account, under no circumstances, at no cost invert; invert only if the negative word negates the verb.In no way, on no account, under no circumstances, at no cost में उलटाव; तभी जब निषेधवाची शब्द क्रिया का निषेध करे।
Not until + clause: invert the main clause: Not until 5 pm did he call me.Not until + उपवाक्य: मुख्य उपवाक्य में उलटाव: Not until 5 pm did he call me।
Not only / neither / nor at the start of a clause take inversion: Not only did she forget, nor did I.उपवाक्य के आरंभ में Not only / neither / nor उलटाव लेते हैं: Not only did she forget, nor did I।
Only + adverb / phrase / clause: invert the main clause, never the if / when clause.Only + क्रिया-विशेषण / वाक्यांश / उपवाक्य: मुख्य उपवाक्य में उलटाव, if / when उपवाक्य में कभी नहीं।
So + adjective + linking verb and Such was …: the whole verb moves; with an action verb only the helping verb moves.So + विशेषण + linking verb और Such was …: पूरी क्रिया आगे; action verb (क्रियावाचक क्रिया) हो तो केवल सहायक क्रिया।
Conditionals drop if: Should he come, Were I a bird, Had I worked hard.Conditionals (शर्तवाचक) में if हट जाता है: Should he come, Were I a bird, Had I worked hard।
Full inversion: place adverb + movement / place verb + noun subject; the verb agrees with that noun; never with a pronoun.Full inversion: स्थानवाचक क्रिया-विशेषण + गति / स्थिति की क्रिया + संज्ञा कर्ता; क्रिया उसी संज्ञा से मेल खाती है; सर्वनाम के साथ कभी नहीं।
After inversion the verb agrees with the subject that follows: Rarely if ever has there been a time.उलटाव के बाद क्रिया उस कर्ता से मेल खाती है जो पीछे आता है: Rarely if ever has there been a time।
Hardly ever, rarely if ever, nowhere and not once are negative openers too: Not once did he apologise.Hardly ever, rarely if ever, nowhere और not once भी निषेधवाची आरंभिक शब्द हैं: Not once did he apologise।
Only when he apologised did Radhika forgive him: the when clause stays normal, the main clause is inverted.Only when he apologised did Radhika forgive him: when वाला उपवाक्य सामान्य रहता है, मुख्य उपवाक्य उलटा होता है।

What inversion does

Inversion changes the order of the subject and the verb. The structure is interrogative, the meaning is assertive. ✔ Never does she sing.Inversion कर्ता और क्रिया का क्रम बदल देता है। बनावट प्रश्नवाचक होती है, अर्थ कथनात्मक। ✔ Never does she sing.
Reason: a negative word at the start must stay linked to the verb it negates, so the helping verb jumps in front of the subject. ✔ Never do I go there.कारण: आरंभ में आया निषेधवाची शब्द उसी क्रिया से जुड़ा रहना चाहिए जिसका वह निषेध करता है, इसलिए सहायक क्रिया कर्ता से पहले आ जाती है। ✔ Never do I go there.
Partial inversion: helping verb + subject + main verb. Full inversion: (helping verb +) main verb + subject.Partial inversion: सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता + मुख्य क्रिया। Full inversion: (सहायक क्रिया +) मुख्य क्रिया + कर्ता।
No helping verb? Bring do / does / did and use V1. Keep the tense of the original sentence. Passive: was / were.सहायक क्रिया नहीं है? do / does / did लाइए और V1 लगाइए। मूल वाक्य का काल रखिए। कर्मवाच्य में was / were।
Partial inversion is done in the main clause. The only subordinate-clause inversion is in conditionals.आंशिक उलटाव मुख्य उपवाक्य में होता है। आश्रित उपवाक्य में उलटाव केवल conditionals (शर्तवाचक) में होता है।

No sooner: inversion and verb form

No sooner + had + subject + V3 … than + past indefinite.No sooner + had + कर्ता + V3 … than + Past Indefinite (सामान्य भूत काल)।
No sooner + did + subject + V1 … than + past indefinite.No sooner + did + कर्ता + V1 … than + Past Indefinite (सामान्य भूत काल)।
Never write the subject before the helping verb: No sooner he had is wrong; No sooner had he is right.सहायक क्रिया से पहले कर्ता कभी नहीं: No sooner he had गलत है; No sooner had he सही है।
Keep the tense of the original sentence when choosing between had and did.had और did में चुनते समय मूल वाक्य का काल रखिए।
Hardly / no sooner pairs use the past perfect in the first clause and the past indefinite in the second. ✔ No sooner had I reached the platform than the train left.Hardly / no sooner की जोड़ियों में पहला उपवाक्य Past Perfect (पूर्ण भूत काल) में और दूसरा Past Indefinite (सामान्य भूत काल) में होता है। ✔ No sooner had I reached the platform than the train left.

No sooner … than

No sooner … than is the only correct pair.No sooner … than ही सही जोड़ी है।
When, that, then, and and but are all wrong after no sooner.no sooner के बाद when, that, then, and, but सब गलत हैं।
The clause after than keeps its normal order.than के बाद का उपवाक्य अपना सामान्य क्रम रखता है।

Hardly / scarcely / barely … when

Hardly / scarcely / barely + had + subject + V3 … when + past indefinite.Hardly / scarcely / barely + had + कर्ता + V3 … when + Past Indefinite।
The partner is when (before is acceptable, but when is best). It is never than, then, that or but.साथी when है (before चल जाता है, पर when सर्वोत्तम)। यह कभी than, then, that या but नहीं होता।
If hardly sits after the helping verb (had hardly), the sentence is normal and needs no inversion.hardly यदि सहायक क्रिया के बाद आया है (had hardly), तो वाक्य सामान्य है और उलटाव नहीं चाहिए।
Hardly is the word, not hard.शब्द hardly है, hard नहीं।

Hardly and no sooner together

Hardly / scarcely / barely … when and no sooner … than: never cross the pairs.Hardly / scarcely / barely … when और no sooner … than: जोड़ियों को कभी आपस में न मिलाइए।
As soon as has no inversion and no than / when.As soon as में न उलटाव है, न than / when।
The word is sooner, not soon.शब्द sooner है, soon नहीं।

Never, seldom, rarely, little

Never / seldom / rarely / little + helping verb + subject + main verb.Never / seldom / rarely / little + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता + मुख्य क्रिया।
Never before / never in my life + helping verb + subject.Never before / never in my life + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता।
No helping verb in the normal sentence: bring do / does / did and use V1.सामान्य वाक्य में सहायक क्रिया नहीं है: do / does / did लाइए और V1 लगाइए।
With there as subject: has there been, was there.there कर्ता हो तो: has there been, was there।

Expressions with 'no'

Preposition + no + noun at the start (in no way, on no account, under no circumstances, at no cost) ⇒ helping verb before the subject.आरंभ में Preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) + no + noun (संज्ञा) (in no way, on no account, under no circumstances, at no cost) ⇒ सहायक क्रिया कर्ता से पहले।
Invert only when the negative word negates the verb.उलटाव तभी जब निषेधवाची शब्द क्रिया का निषेध करे।
In no time does not always negate the verb: In no time I can complete this task is also correct.In no time सदैव क्रिया का निषेध नहीं करता: In no time I can complete this task भी सही है।

Expressions with 'not'

Not until … + helping verb + subject + main verb. The inversion is in the main clause.Not until … + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता + मुख्य क्रिया। उलटाव मुख्य उपवाक्य में होता है।
Not even a word / not a single thing / not for one moment + helping verb + subject.Not even a word / not a single thing / not for one moment + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता।
Keep the tense; in the passive use was / were, not had.काल वही रखिए; कर्मवाच्य में was / were लगाइए, had नहीं।
Not far from here does not negate the verb, so there is no inversion.Not far from here क्रिया का निषेध नहीं करता, इसलिए उलटाव नहीं।
Not until the data was independently verified was it accepted. (passive: was, not had)Not until the data was independently verified was it accepted. (कर्मवाच्य में was, had नहीं)

Not only, neither, nor

Not only + helping verb + subject + main verb … but (subject) also …Not only + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता + मुख्य क्रिया … but (कर्ता) also …
Neither / nor + helping verb + subject.Neither / nor + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता।
The helping verb follows the tense of the first clause.सहायक क्रिया पहले उपवाक्य के काल के अनुसार होती है।

Only

Only + adverb / preposition phrase + helping verb + subject + main verb.Only + क्रिया-विशेषण / पूर्वसर्ग वाक्यांश + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता + मुख्य क्रिया।
Only + if / when / after + clause, then invert the main clause only.Only + if / when / after + उपवाक्य हो, तो केवल मुख्य उपवाक्य को उलटिए।
If there is no helping verb, use do / does / did and V1: Only then did she realise.सहायक क्रिया न हो, तो do / does / did और V1 लगाइए: Only then did she realise।

So and such

So + adjective + linking verb + subject + that … (whole verb moves).So + विशेषण + linking verb (योजक क्रिया) + कर्ता + that … (पूरी क्रिया आगे)।
Such + is / are / was / were + noun + that … (whole verb moves).Such + is / are / was / were + संज्ञा + that … (पूरी क्रिया आगे)।
So + adverb of manner + helping verb + subject + V1 (only the helping verb moves).So + रीतिवाचक क्रिया-विशेषण + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता + V1 (केवल सहायक क्रिया आगे)।
To such an extent / degree + helping verb + subject + V1.To such an extent / degree + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता + V1।

Conditionals

First conditional: Should + subject + V1, … will / shall + V1.First conditional (प्रथम शर्तवाचक): Should + कर्ता + V1, … will / shall + V1।
Second conditional: Were + subject (+ to + V1), … would + V1.Second conditional (द्वितीय शर्तवाचक): Were + कर्ता (+ to + V1), … would + V1।
Third conditional: Had + subject + V3, … would have + V3.Third conditional (तृतीय शर्तवाचक): Had + कर्ता + V3, … would have + V3।
The if is dropped. It is never kept together with the inverted verb.if हट जाता है। उलटी क्रिया के साथ इसे नहीं रखते।

Full inversion

Adverb of place + verb of movement / place + noun subject.स्थानवाचक क्रिया-विशेषण + गति / स्थिति की क्रिया + संज्ञा कर्ता।
No full inversion with a transitive verb or a pronoun subject.सकर्मक क्रिया या सर्वनाम कर्ता के साथ full inversion नहीं।
The verb agrees with the subject that follows it: Here lie the books.क्रिया बाद में आने वाले कर्ता के अनुसार चलती है: Here lie the books।
Narration: "…", said + noun is allowed, "…", said he is not.Narration (कथन): "…", said + संज्ञा चलता है, "…", said he नहीं।

Optative sentences and introductory adjectives

Optative: May + subject + V1; Long live + noun.इच्छासूचक: May + कर्ता + V1; Long live + संज्ञा।
Comparative adjective at the start: More + adjective + than … + linking verb + subject.आरंभ में तुलनात्मक विशेषण: More + adjective (विशेषण) + than … + linking verb (योजक क्रिया) + कर्ता।
Participle at the start (V1+ing / V3): participle phrase + linking verb + subject.आरंभ में participle (V1+ing / V3): participle phrase (कृदंत पदबंध) + linking verb (योजक क्रिया) + कर्ता।
The verb agrees with the subject that follows.क्रिया बाद में आने वाले कर्ता के अनुसार चलती है।

Pairs to remember

Hardly / scarcely / barely … when (before is acceptable, when is best).Hardly / scarcely / barely … when (before चलता है, when सर्वोत्तम)।
No sooner … than.No sooner … than।
Not only … but also; neither … nor.Not only … but also; neither … nor।

Checking an exam question, step by step

1. Find the word at the start: hardly, scarcely, barely, never, rarely, seldom, little, not only, no sooner, not until, only, so, such.1. आरंभ का शब्द ढूँढिए: hardly, scarcely, barely, never, rarely, seldom, little, not only, no sooner, not until, only, so, such।
2. Ask whose word it is. If it negates the verb, invert. If it modifies something else, do not invert.2. पूछिए कि यह शब्द किसका है। क्रिया का निषेध करे, तो उलटिए। कुछ और बदले, तो न उलटिए।
3. Check the helping verb after the subject position: I with have, V3 after had, V1 after did.3. कर्ता के स्थान के बाद सहायक क्रिया जाँचिए: I के साथ have, had के बाद V3, did के बाद V1।
4. Check the pair: hardly / scarcely … when; no sooner … than; not only … but also.4. जोड़ी जाँचिए: hardly / scarcely … when; no sooner … than; not only … but also।
5. Match the tense with the other clause, and keep the tense of the original sentence.5. दूसरे उपवाक्य के काल से मिलाइए, और मूल वाक्य का काल रखिए।
6. When two options look alike, check the logic and not the look. The examiner often adds a look-alike to the right option.6. दो विकल्प एक जैसे दिखें, तो रूप नहीं, तर्क देखिए। परीक्षक प्रायः सही विकल्प जैसा एक और विकल्प रख देता है।

Hardly ever, rarely if ever, nowhere, not once

Hardly ever / scarcely ever / rarely if ever / seldom if ever + helping verb + subject + main verb.Hardly ever / scarcely ever / rarely if ever / seldom if ever + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता + मुख्य क्रिया।
Nowhere (else) / not once + helping verb + subject + main verb.Nowhere (else) / not once + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता + मुख्य क्रिया।

The verb after the opener

The helping verb agrees with the subject that comes after it: Rarely if ever has there been a time.सहायक क्रिया उस कर्ता से मेल खाती है जो उसके बाद आता है: Rarely if ever has there been a time।
In Only when … did … and Not until … did …, the first clause stays normal and the main clause is inverted.Only when … did … और Not until … did … में पहला उपवाक्य सामान्य रहता है और मुख्य उपवाक्य उलटा होता है।
Not only + helper + subject … but (subject) also …: only the first part is inverted. It was not until … that … has no inversion.Not only + सहायक + कर्ता … but (कर्ता) also …: केवल पहला भाग उलटा होता है। It was not until … that … में उलटाव नहीं होता।

P–Q statements

Judge P and Q separately; Both correct and Neither correct are real answers.P और Q को अलग-अलग जाँचिए; Both correct और Neither correct वास्तविक उत्तर हैं।
Order of checks: SVA → tense / conditional → preposition / redundancy → pronoun case.जाँच का क्रम: SVA → काल / शर्त → पूर्वसर्ग / अनावश्यक शब्द → सर्वनाम रूप।

14. Conjunction Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A conjunction joins; co-ordinating conjunctions join equal parts (FANBOYS), sub-ordinating conjunctions join a dependent part to a main part.संयोजक जोड़ता है; समुच्चयबोधक संयोजक बराबर के भागों को जोड़ते हैं (FANBOYS), आश्रित संयोजक निर्भर भाग को मुख्य भाग से जोड़ते हैं।
And adds one idea to another; but marks a contrast the speaker sees.And एक विचार में दूसरा जोड़ता है; but बोलने वाले को दिखने वाला विरोध दिखाता है।
A co-ordinating conjunction joins two parts; the exam checks unlike parts and stacked conjunctions, not a sentence that starts with And / But.समुच्चयबोधक संयोजक दो भागों को जोड़ता है; परीक्षा बेमेल भाग और साथ लगे दो संयोजक देखती है, यह नहीं कि वाक्य And / But से शुरू हुआ है।
Same rank on both sides of and: -ing with -ing, V2 with V2, noun with noun.And के दोनों ओर समान स्तर: -ing के साथ -ing, V2 के साथ V2, संज्ञा के साथ संज्ञा।
Either … or, neither … nor; the verb agrees with the nearer subject.Either … or, neither … nor; क्रिया निकट वाले कर्ता से मेल खाती है।
Not only … but also (never and also); with not only at the start, use inversion.Not only … but also (and also कभी नहीं); आरंभ में not only हो तो उलटा क्रम लगाइए।
No sooner … than; hardly / scarcely … when.No sooner … than; hardly / scarcely … when।
Although / though … yet or a comma, never but; despite takes a noun, although takes a clause.Although / though … yet या अल्पविराम, but कभी नहीं; despite के बाद संज्ञा, although के बाद उपवाक्य।
Too … to is negative; enough … to is positive; one phrase never has both.Too … to नकारात्मक है; enough … to सकारात्मक है; एक वाक्यांश में दोनों कभी साथ नहीं आते।
Because / as / since are not followed by so or therefore in the same clause pair; if … then is correct.Because / as / since के बाद उसी उपवाक्य-जोड़ी में so या therefore नहीं; if … then सही है।
A conjunctive adverb (however, therefore) needs a full stop or semicolon before it; a comma works only with a real conjunction like so, but.संयोजक क्रिया-विशेषण (however, therefore) से पहले पूर्ण विराम या अर्धविराम चाहिए; अल्पविराम केवल so, but जैसे असली संयोजक के साथ चलता है।
After when, if, until, as soon as the clause takes the present tense for the future; unless takes no not; after until a not is normally unnecessary.When, if, until, as soon as के बाद उपवाक्य में भविष्य के लिए वर्तमान काल; unless के साथ not नहीं; until के बाद not सामान्यतः अनावश्यक है।
Lest + subject + should + V1 (or the bare form: lest he fall); for warnings use lest, otherwise, or else.Lest + कर्ता + should + V1 (या मूल रूप: lest he fall); चेतावनी के लिए lest, otherwise, or else।
Whether (not if) after a preposition, before to and with or; after a wh-word the order is a statement.पूर्वसर्ग के बाद, to से पहले और or के साथ whether (if नहीं); wh-शब्द के बाद कथन क्रम।

Types of conjunctions

Co-ordinating (FANBOYS): for, and, nor, but, or, yet, so. They join parts of the same rank.समुच्चयबोधक (FANBOYS): for, and, nor, but, or, yet, so। ये समान स्तर के भागों को जोड़ते हैं।
Co-relative: either … or, neither … nor, not only … but also, both … and. A special form of co-ordinating conjunctions.सहसंबंधी: either … or, neither … nor, not only … but also, both … and। समुच्चयबोधक संयोजकों का विशेष रूप।
Sub-ordinating: every conjunction that is not co-ordinating. The clause it begins depends on the main clause.आश्रित: वह हर संयोजक जो समुच्चयबोधक नहीं है। इससे शुरू होने वाला उपवाक्य मुख्य उपवाक्य पर निर्भर रहता है।
Two clauses need one conjunction; three clauses need two.दो उपवाक्यों के लिए एक संयोजक; तीन उपवाक्यों के लिए दो।

Co-ordinating conjunctions

There are seven co-ordinating conjunctions, remembered as FANBOYS: for, and, nor, but, or, yet, so.समुच्चयबोधक संयोजक कुल सात हैं, जिन्हें FANBOYS से याद रखते हैं: for, and, nor, but, or, yet, so।
A co-ordinating conjunction joins parts of the same rank: word with word, phrase with phrase, clause with clause.समुच्चयबोधक संयोजक समान स्तर के भागों को जोड़ता है: शब्द से शब्द, पदबंध से पदबंध, उपवाक्य से उपवाक्य।
And adds one idea to another; but marks a contrast that the speaker sees. Whether two qualities contrast depends on what the speaker expects, not on the words being 'good' or 'bad'. He is poor and honest and He is poor but honest are both grammatical; but adds the idea that this is a surprise.And एक विचार में दूसरा जोड़ता है; but वह विरोध दिखाता है जो बोलने वाले को दिखता है। दो गुण विरोध में हैं या नहीं, यह इस पर निर्भर है कि बोलने वाला क्या अपेक्षा करता है, इस पर नहीं कि शब्द 'अच्छे' हैं या 'बुरे'। He is poor and honest और He is poor but honest दोनों व्याकरण-सम्मत हैं; but में यह भाव जुड़ जाता है कि यह आश्चर्य की बात है।
For gives a reason, nor adds a negative, or gives a choice, yet gives a surprise, so gives a result.For कारण देता है, nor निषेध जोड़ता है, or विकल्प देता है, yet आश्चर्य देता है, so परिणाम देता है।
Not only … but also joins ideas of the same kind, so it is not a contrast.Not only … but also एक जैसी बातों को जोड़ता है, इसलिए यह विरोध नहीं है।
A co-ordinating conjunction joins two parts of a sentence. And and but can also begin a sentence in good writing (But if you agree, we can proceed). SSC error-spotting questions test a conjunction joining unlike parts, not a conjunction at the start of a sentence.समुच्चयबोधक संयोजक वाक्य के दो भागों को जोड़ता है। And और but अच्छे लेखन में वाक्य शुरू भी कर सकते हैं (But if you agree, we can proceed)। SSC के त्रुटि-पहचान प्रश्नों में यह परखा जाता है कि संयोजक बेमेल भागों को जोड़ रहा है या नहीं, यह नहीं कि वाक्य संयोजक से शुरू हुआ है।
A comma may come before it, and it is usual before but. In a list write A, B and C.इससे पहले अल्पविराम आ सकता है, और but से पहले प्रायः आता है। सूची में A, B and C लिखिए।
One conjunction for two clauses. The accepted pairs are and yet, and so, and thus.दो उपवाक्यों के लिए एक संयोजक। मान्य जोड़े हैं and yet, and so, and thus।
Same rank on both sides: subject–subject, object–object, V2–V2, -ing–-ing, adjective–adjective.दोनों ओर समान स्तर: कर्ता–कर्ता, कर्म–कर्म, V2–V2, -ing–-ing, विशेषण–विशेषण।

Co-relative conjunctions

Either … or gives a choice. Neither … nor refuses both. Other partners (either … and, neither … or, neither … not) are wrong.Either … or विकल्प देता है। Neither … nor दोनों को मना करता है। अन्य साथी (either … and, neither … or, neither … not) गलत हैं।
The pair joins same-rank parts and stands right before each of them.जोड़ा समान स्तर के भागों को जोड़ता है और हर भाग से ठीक पहले आता है।
With two subjects, the verb agrees with the nearer subject.दो कर्ता हों तो क्रिया निकट वाले कर्ता के अनुसार लगती है।
After the pair, both sides carry the same form: V1 with V1, V2 with V2.जोड़े के बाद दोनों ओर समान रूप आता है: V1 के साथ V1, V2 के साथ V2।
Not only … but also adds to a fact. Wrong partners: and also, but even, yet also.Not only … but also तथ्य में कुछ और जोड़ता है। गलत साथी: and also, but even, yet also।
Both sides are of the same rank. Not only stands right before the first item.दोनों ओर समान स्तर होता है। Not only पहले पद से ठीक पहले आता है।
Other words may stand between but and also. Only can become just. A final also becomes too / as well.But और also के बीच दूसरे शब्द आ सकते हैं। Only की जगह just आ सकता है। अंत वाला also too / as well बन जाता है।
Not only at the start of a clause, with a fronted adverbial meaning, takes inversion (Not only did she sing, she also danced). With a coordinated subject there is no inversion (Not only Radhika but also Aman came; the verb agrees with the nearer subject).उपवाक्य के आरंभ में Not only, जब वह आगे लाए गए क्रिया-विशेषक के अर्थ में हो, उलटा क्रम (inversion) लेता है (Not only did she sing, she also danced)। जुड़े हुए कर्ता के साथ उलटा क्रम नहीं होता (Not only Radhika but also Aman came; क्रिया निकट वाले कर्ता से मेल खाती है)।
Both … and takes a plural verb. Both … from and both … to are wrong.Both … and के साथ बहुवचन क्रिया आती है। Both … from और both … to गलत हैं।

Fixed pairs

Learn each pair as one unit: between … and, from … to, both … and, whether … or, rather … than, other … than, nothing else but / nothing else than / nothing other than, as … as, so … as. Nothing else than and nothing other than are established; else … but is the usual exam pattern.हर जोड़े को एक इकाई की तरह याद करें: between … and, from … to, both … and, whether … or, rather … than, other … than, nothing else but / nothing else than / nothing other than, as … as, so … as। Nothing else than और nothing other than स्थापित रूप हैं; else … but परीक्षा का सामान्य पैटर्न है।
Between … and means at some point inside the window; from … to means all through it.Between … and का अर्थ अवधि के भीतर किसी क्षण पर; from … to का अर्थ पूरे समय।
After not / never use or to negate both things. And is possible only for one compound noun.Not / never के बाद दोनों का निषेध करने के लिए or लगाइए। And केवल एक यौगिक संज्ञा के लिए चलता है।
Whether … or (not) = is or is not. Either … or = one of two.Whether … or (not) = है या नहीं। Either … or = दो में से एक।
Than goes with comparatives, rather and other: more … than, rather … than, other … than. Else goes with but in the exam pattern; than also follows else in common use (nothing else than a miracle).Than तुलनात्मक रूपों, rather और other के साथ आता है: more … than, rather … than, other … than। Else के साथ परीक्षा के पैटर्न में but आता है; सामान्य प्रयोग में else के बाद than भी आता है (nothing else than a miracle)।
No sooner … than. Never no sooner … when / then / that.No sooner … than। No sooner … when / then / that कभी नहीं।
Hardly / Scarcely / Barely … when (or before). Never hardly … than.Hardly / Scarcely / Barely … when (या before)। Hardly … than कभी नहीं।
First clause: had + V3 (or did + V1 after inversion). Second clause: simple past.पहला उपवाक्य: had + V3 (उलटे क्रम में did + V1 भी)। दूसरा उपवाक्य: simple past (सामान्य भूत काल)।
A sentence that begins with these words takes inversion. In the middle of a sentence there is none.इन शब्दों से शुरू होने वाले वाक्य में उलटा क्रम होता है। वाक्य के बीच में नहीं होता।

Sub-ordinating conjunctions and contrast

Every conjunction that is not in FANBOYS is sub-ordinating. The clause it begins depends on the main clause and can come before or after it.FANBOYS में न आने वाला हर संयोजक आश्रित है। इससे शुरू होने वाला उपवाक्य मुख्य उपवाक्य पर निर्भर रहता है और उससे पहले या बाद में आ सकता है।
Time: when, while, before, after, since, until, as soon as, as long as, whenever, as, once.समय: when, while, before, after, since, until, as soon as, as long as, whenever, as, once।
Condition: if, unless (= if not), in case, provided that, even if, only if.शर्त: if, unless (= if not), in case, provided that, even if, only if।
Because gives a reason, than a comparison, so … that a result, although / though / even though / whereas a contrast, as if / as though an imaginary situation.Because कारण देता है, than तुलना, so … that परिणाम, although / though / even though / whereas विरोध, as if / as though काल्पनिक स्थिति।
Clauses are of three kinds: noun (subject, object, complement), adjective (about a noun) and adverb (time, reason, condition, contrast, purpose, result, comparison, place, manner).उपवाक्य तीन प्रकार के होते हैं: संज्ञा (कर्ता, कर्म, पूरक), विशेषण (संज्ञा के बारे में) और क्रिया-विशेषण (समय, कारण, शर्त, विरोध, उद्देश्य, परिणाम, तुलना, स्थान, ढंग)।
Although / though / even though = despite the fact that. Only one joining word: after the clause use yet or a comma, never but.Although / though / even though = इस तथ्य के बावजूद कि। केवल एक जोड़ने वाला शब्द: उपवाक्य के बाद yet या अल्पविराम, but कभी नहीं।
Though can end a sentence (as an adverb). Although cannot.Though वाक्य के अंत में आ सकता है (क्रिया-विशेषण की तरह)। Although नहीं आ सकता।
These words are followed by a clause. Before a noun phrase use despite / in spite of (not despite of). A reduced clause is also accepted after although: Although tired, she continued.इनके बाद उपवाक्य आता है। संज्ञा-पदबंध से पहले despite / in spite of लगाएँ (despite of नहीं)। Although के बाद संक्षिप्त उपवाक्य भी चलता है: Although tired, she continued।
Even though = a fact; even if = an opposite condition. Even alone is not a conjunction.Even though = तथ्य; even if = विपरीत शर्त। अकेला even संयोजक नहीं है।
Whereas / while set two different things against each other.Whereas / while दो अलग चीज़ों को आमने-सामने रखते हैं।

Result, reason and conjunctive adverbs

So + adjective/adverb + that and such + a/an + adjective + noun + that show a result.So + विशेषण/क्रिया-विशेषण + that और such + a/an + विशेषण + संज्ञा + that परिणाम दिखाते हैं।
Too + adj/adv + to + V1 = cannot do. It means so + adj/adv + that + sub + can't + V1.Too + adj/adv + to + V1 = नहीं कर सकता। इसका अर्थ है so + adj/adv + that + sub + can't + V1।
Adj/adv + enough + to + V1 = can do. It means so + adj/adv + that + sub + can + V1.Adj/adv + enough + to + V1 = कर सकता है। इसका अर्थ है so + adj/adv + that + sub + can + V1।
Too (negative) and enough (positive) do not come together in one phrase. Too … than is wrong. So … to is wrong in the pattern so tall to reach, but Would you be so kind as to help? is a separate fixed pattern.Too (नकारात्मक) और enough (सकारात्मक) एक वाक्यांश में साथ नहीं आते। Too … than गलत है। So … to so tall to reach वाले पैटर्न में गलत है, पर Would you be so kind as to help? एक अलग निश्चित पैटर्न है।
Name the reason and the result. Expected reason: as, since, because, for. Unexpected reason: although, though, whereas.कारण और परिणाम का नाम लो। अपेक्षित कारण: as, since, because, for। अनपेक्षित कारण: although, though, whereas।
Expected result: so, hence, therefore, thus. Unexpected result: but, yet, still, however, nevertheless.अपेक्षित परिणाम: so, hence, therefore, thus। अनपेक्षित परिणाम: but, yet, still, however, nevertheless।
Because / as / since is not followed by so, therefore, that's why in the same clause pair. If … then is correct (If you return the book by Friday, then the librarian will not charge a fine); then can be left out and adds emphasis to the result. When … then is fine too.Because / as / since के बाद उसी उपवाक्य-जोड़ी में so, therefore, that's why नहीं आते। If … then सही है (If you return the book by Friday, then the librarian will not charge a fine); then हटाया भी जा सकता है और परिणाम पर ज़ोर देता है। When … then भी ठीक है।
A conjunction can join two clauses with a comma. A conjunctive adverb needs . or ; before it.संयोजक अल्पविराम से दो उपवाक्य जोड़ सकता है। संयोजक क्रिया-विशेषण से पहले . या ; चाहिए।
One conjunction + one conjunctive adverb may sit together: and yet, and so, and thus.एक संयोजक + एक संयोजक क्रिया-विशेषण साथ आ सकते हैं: and yet, and so, and thus।

Time, condition, purpose and warning

After when, before, after, until, as soon as, once, if, unless the clause takes the present tense for the future, not will / shall.When, before, after, until, as soon as, once, if, unless के बाद उपवाक्य में भविष्य के लिए वर्तमान काल आता है, will / shall नहीं।
Unless = if … not, until = up to that time. Do not add not after unless (it already means 'if … not'). After until a not is normally unnecessary; it is correct only when the endpoint itself is negative (Wait until it is not raining).Unless = if … not, until = उस समय तक। Unless के बाद not मत जोड़ें (इसमें 'if … not' पहले से है)। Until के बाद not सामान्यतः अनावश्यक होता है; वह तभी सही है जब अंतिम बिंदु स्वयं निषेधात्मक हो (Wait until it is not raining)।
If = condition (act when it happens). In case = precaution (act now, before it happens).If = शर्त (हो तब करें)। In case = एहतियात (पहले ही कर लें)।
When takes a point or a long duration; while takes a long, usually continuous action. I was sleeping while he called is wrong.When के बाद क्षण या लंबी अवधि; while के बाद लंबी, प्रायः चलती हुई क्रिया। I was sleeping while he called गलत है।
Only if begins a sentence and takes inversion.Only if से वाक्य शुरू होता है और उसमें उलटा क्रम आता है।
Purpose: to + V1 / in order to + V1 / so as to + V1, or so that / in order that + sub + can, may, could, might + V1.उद्देश्य: to + V1 / in order to + V1 / so as to + V1, या so that / in order that + sub + can, may, could, might + V1।
Present main verb: can / may. Past main verb: could / might. Not should.वर्तमान मुख्य क्रिया: can / may। भूतकाल की मुख्य क्रिया: could / might। Should नहीं।
So that = purpose. So … that = result. So then is wrong.So that = उद्देश्य। So … that = परिणाम। So then गलत है।
Lest + subject + should + V1 or the bare form (lest he fall). Never lest … will / may / would, and do not add not after lest.Lest + कर्ता + should + V1 या मूल रूप (lest he fall)। Lest … will / may / would कभी नहीं, और lest के बाद not मत जोड़िए।
Warning: lest, otherwise, or else. And does not warn.चेतावनी: lest, otherwise, or else। And चेतावनी नहीं देता।

Conjunction or preposition; that, if, whether

Conjunction + clause; preposition + noun phrase.संयोजक + उपवाक्य; पूर्वसर्ग + संज्ञा-पदबंध।
Pairs: because of / because, without / unless, in case of / in case, despite / though, during / while.जोड़े: because of / because, without / unless, in case of / in case, despite / though, during / while।
Due to / owing to are prepositions, so due to she is is wrong.Due to / owing to पूर्वसर्ग हैं, इसलिए due to she is गलत है।
Despite of is wrong; write despite or in spite of.Despite of गलत है; despite या in spite of लिखिए।
Before/after/since: nothing after = adverb, noun = preposition, subject + verb = conjunction.Before/after/since: बाद में कुछ नहीं = क्रिया-विशेषण, संज्ञा = पूर्वसर्ग, कर्ता + क्रिया = संयोजक।
That = certainty. If / whether = uncertainty.That = निश्चितता। If / whether = अनिश्चितता।
Use whether (not if) after a preposition, before a *to*-infinitive, and when or not comes directly after it (whether or not she was coming). I asked if she was coming or not is also acceptable; the exam prefers whether.Whether (if नहीं) लगाएँ: पूर्वसर्ग के बाद, *to*-infinitive (मूल क्रिया-रूप) से पहले, और जब or not सीधे उसके बाद आए (whether or not she was coming)। I asked if she was coming or not भी स्वीकार्य है; परीक्षा में whether को वरीयता दी जाती है।
A wh-word that joins two clauses is followed by a statement (subject + verb). A noun clause is never a question.दो उपवाक्यों को जोड़ने वाले wh-शब्द के बाद कथन (कर्ता + क्रिया) आता है। संज्ञा उपवाक्य कभी प्रश्न नहीं होता।
After overlook, disregard, conceal, dispute a that clause usually needs the fact that (overlook the fact that …). Do not add the fact that as a universal repair; each verb has its own pattern.Overlook, disregard, conceal, dispute के बाद that उपवाक्य को प्रायः the fact that चाहिए (overlook the fact that …)। The fact that को हर जगह का सर्वसामान्य उपाय मत बनाएँ; हर क्रिया का अपना पैटर्न है।
That = conjunction if the clause after it is complete (can become the fact that). That = relative pronoun if it is the subject or object (can become which / who / whom).That = संयोजक यदि उसके बाद उपवाक्य पूरा है (the fact that बन सकता है)। That = relative pronoun (संबंधवाचक सर्वनाम) यदि वह कर्ता या कर्म है (which / who / whom बन सकता है)।

15. Preposition Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A preposition shows the relation of a noun or pronoun to another word; the word after it is its object.Preposition संज्ञा या सर्वनाम का दूसरे शब्द से संबंध दिखाती है; उसके बाद का शब्द उसका object (कर्म) होता है।
In is for area and volume, on for a surface or line, at for a point.In क्षेत्र और आयतन के लिए, on सतह या रेखा के लिए, at बिंदु के लिए।
Time: in months, years and seasons; on days and dates; at clock time and night.समय: in महीनों, वर्षों और ऋतुओं के साथ; on दिन और तारीख के साथ; at घड़ी के समय और night के साथ।
In time means early enough; on time means punctual.In time यानी काम के लिए समय रहते; on time यानी ठीक समय पर।
For takes a period, since takes a point of time; by means not later than, until means up to.For के साथ अवधि, since के साथ समय-बिंदु; by यानी उस समय तक या उससे पहले, until यानी उस समय तक लगातार।
Home, abroad, here, there, upstairs and the like are adverbs: no to before them (went home, not went to home).Home, abroad, here, there, upstairs जैसे शब्द क्रियाविशेषण हैं: इनसे पहले to नहीं (went home, went to home नहीं)।
Between is for two, among is for more than two.Between दो के लिए, among दो से अधिक के लिए।
Due to follows a noun or be; owing to and because of begin an adverbial phrase.Due to संज्ञा या be के बाद आता है; owing to और because of क्रिया-विशेषण वाला phrase (पदबंध) शुरू करते हैं।
Despite and in spite of are followed by a noun or V1 + ing, never by of after despite or by but later.Despite और in spite of के बाद संज्ञा या V1 + ing; despite के बाद of नहीं, और आगे but नहीं।
After a preposition use the objective case (between you and me) and V1 + ing.Preposition के बाद कर्म कारक रूप (between you and me) और V1 + ing।
Senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior, prefer take to, never than.Senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior, prefer के साथ to, than कभी नहीं।
Feelings of fear, doubt and pride take of; pleasure and supply take with.डर, शक और गर्व की भावनाओं के साथ of; प्रसन्नता और आपूर्ति के साथ with।
Attitude words take to; separation words take from; field words take in; basis words take on; purpose words take for.रवैये वाले शब्दों के साथ to; अलगाव वाले के साथ from; क्षेत्र वाले के साथ in; आधार वाले के साथ on; उद्देश्य वाले के साथ for।
Learn the fixed words in groups by meaning, with their one preposition, not as a heap of phrases.पक्के शब्दों को अर्थ के समूहों में उनके एक preposition के साथ सीखें, वाक्यांशों के ढेर की तरह नहीं।

Time: in, on, at, and the time words

At for a clock point: at 9 o'clock, at noon, at midnight, at night, at dawn.घड़ी के बिंदु के लिए at: at 9 o'clock, at noon, at midnight, at night, at dawn।
On for a named day or a date: on Sunday, on 2nd May, on his birthday.किसी दिन के नाम या तारीख के लिए on: on Sunday, on 2nd May, on his birthday।
In for a length of time: in 5 minutes, in January, in 2010, in winter, in the 1990s.समय की अवधि के लिए in: in 5 minutes, in January, in 2010, in winter, in the 1990s।
Plain part of the day takes in the morning; a particular morning (with an adjective, a day's name or of) takes on a / on the morning.सादा दिन-भाग: in the morning; विशेष सुबह (विशेषण, दिन का नाम या of के साथ): on a / on the morning।
A festival day takes on (on Diwali); the whole festival season takes at (at Christmas).त्योहार का दिन on (on Diwali); पूरा त्योहार-काल at (at Christmas)।
In time = early enough for the purpose (We reached in time for the show); on time = exactly at the scheduled time; at the right time = at the proper moment.In time = उस काम के लिए पर्याप्त समय रहते (We reached in time for the show); on time = ठीक निर्धारित समय पर; at the right time = उचित क्षण पर।
In the end / in the beginning stand alone; before of + noun use at the end of / at the beginning of.In the end / in the beginning अकेले आते हैं; आगे of + संज्ञा हो तो at the end of / at the beginning of।
By = done by when (a deadline); until / till = how long a situation lasts. Do not add not after until (the usual exam error); Till can begin a sentence in everyday English (Till now, …).By = कब तक हो जाएगा (समय-सीमा); until / till = स्थिति कब तक चलेगी। Until के बाद not न जोड़ें (परीक्षा की आम त्रुटि); Till रोज़मर्रा की अंग्रेज़ी में वाक्य के आरंभ में भी आ सकता है (Till now, …)।
For + period (for ten years); since + point (since 2020).For + अवधि (for ten years); since + बिंदु (since 2020)।
From ... to / until / till or between ... and for time; only from ... to when time is not the subject.समय के लिए from ... to / until / till या between ... and; समय की बात न हो तो केवल from ... to।
During = at some point inside a period, or for the whole of it (during the war); throughout stresses start to end.During = अवधि के भीतर किसी बिंदु पर, या पूरी अवधि में (during the war); throughout आरंभ से अंत तक पर ज़ोर देता है।

Place and movement

Surface or line = on; area or volume = in; point = at.सतह या रेखा = on; क्षेत्र या आयतन = in; बिंदु = at।
A house number, a corner, a bus stop, a door, an airport or a station is a point: at.मकान-नंबर, मोड़, बस-स्टॉप, दरवाज़ा, हवाई अड्डा या स्टेशन एक बिंदु है: at।
On the top of = on the outside; at the top of = in the upper part, inside.On the top of = बाहर, ऊपर; at the top of = ऊपरी भाग में, अंदर।
Inside is mainly for place; inside an hour (= within an hour) occurs in informal English, but SSC keys use within. Within is also used for a range or limit (within walking distance).Inside मुख्यतः स्थान के लिए है; inside an hour (= within an hour) अनौपचारिक अंग्रेज़ी में मिलता है, पर SSC की कुंजी में within आता है। Within सीमा के लिए भी आता है (within walking distance)।
Goal: point = to, surface = onto, space with a boundary = into.लक्ष्य: बिंदु = to, सतह = onto, सीमा वाला स्थान = into।
Source: point = from, surface = off, space with a boundary = out of.स्रोत: बिंदु = from, सतह = off, सीमा वाला स्थान = out of।
Path: line = along, surface = across, 3D space = through, point = past.मार्ग: रेखा = along, सतह = across, 3D स्थान = through, बिंदु = past।
To = destination; towards = direction only. Far from for negative or question; a long way from for positive.To = गंतव्य; towards = केवल दिशा। निषेध या प्रश्न में far from; सकारात्मक वाक्य में a long way from।

Transport, by and with, of and off

No article: by bus, by train, by phone, by post. With an article or determiner: on (bus, train, plane, ship, bike, horse) or in (car, taxi, auto, helicopter, ambulance).Article नहीं: by bus, by train, by phone, by post। Article या determiner (निर्धारक) हो तो on (bus, train, plane, ship, bike, horse) या in (car, taxi, auto, helicopter, ambulance)।
Walking is on foot; handing something over in person is by hand; a speaker on a call is on the phone.पैदल चलना on foot; हाथ से देना by hand; कॉल पर बात on the phone।
By = doer in the passive, means, cause; with = tool or instrument.By = कर्मवाच्य का कर्ता, साधन, कारण; with = औज़ार या उपकरण।
Of = relation; off = away from, detached. The verb is dispose of.Of = संबंध; off = दूर, अलग। क्रिया dispose of है।

Position pairs

Over / under = directly above or below, or covering; above / below = height, level, rank, amount.Over / under = ठीक ऊपर या नीचे, या ढकना; above / below = ऊँचाई, स्तर, पद, मात्रा।
Beside = next to; besides = in addition to; except = excluding; apart from = both.Beside = बगल में; besides = के अलावा (भी); except = को छोड़कर; apart from = दोनों अर्थ।
Before an authority (king, judge, court) use before, not in front of. Behind = at the back.अधिकारी / सत्ता (राजा, न्यायाधीश, न्यायालय) के सामने before, in front of नहीं। Behind = पीछे।
In front of = outside, separate; in the front of = the front part of the thing itself.In front of = बाहर, अलग; in the front of = उसी वस्तु का अगला भाग।
Near and near to are both used as prepositions (near the station, near to the station). Near is the shorter, preferred form, and SSC keys treat near to before a place or person as the error. Choose near in the exam.Near और near to दोनों संबंधबोधक (preposition) की तरह चलते हैं (near the station, near to the station)। Near छोटा और पसंदीदा रूप है, और SSC की कुंजी में स्थान या व्यक्ति से पहले near to को त्रुटि माना जाता है। परीक्षा में near चुनिए।
In control of / in possession of = active; in the control of / in the possession of = passive.In control of / in possession of = सक्रिय; in the control of / in the possession of = निष्क्रिय।

Between, among, amid

Between = two things, or things named one by one, or a mutual relation. Among = a group or crowd. Amid = an atmosphere (uncountable or abstract noun).Between = दो वस्तुएँ, या एक-एक करके नाम ली गई, या आपसी संबंध। Among = समूह या भीड़। Amid = वातावरण (अगणनीय या भाववाचक संज्ञा)।
Between pairs with and, takes a plural noun, and never takes each / every.Between का जोड़ा and से बनता है, उसके बाद बहुवचन संज्ञा आती है, और each / every कभी नहीं आता।
After difference, distinction, contrast the word is between. Distribute takes among (a group) or between (two): distribute the sweets among the students.Difference, distinction, contrast के बाद between आता है। Distribute के साथ among (समूह) या between (दो) आता है: distribute the sweets among the students।
Among = amongst and amid = amidst; no vowel or consonant condition decides which one to use.Among = amongst और amid = amidst; स्वर या व्यंजन की कोई शर्त नहीं है।

Reason, contrast and opinion

Due to = owing to = because of. A sentence may begin with due to.Due to = owing to = because of। वाक्य due to से शुरू हो सकता है।
Despite = in spite of. Never write despite of; write in spite of or despite.Despite = in spite of। despite of कभी नहीं; in spite of या despite लिखिए।
Instead of = alternative; in spite of = contrast.Instead of = विकल्प; in spite of = विरोध।
According to = as stated by somebody else. Own opinion: in my opinion / from my point of view / I think.According to = किसी और के कहे अनुसार। अपना मत: in my opinion / from my point of view / I think।

Important concepts: what follows and what to remove

A pronoun after a preposition is in the objective case: between you and me, about Ram and her.Preposition के बाद सर्वनाम कर्म-कारक में: between you and me, about Ram and her।
A verb after a preposition takes V1 + ing: good at playing, afraid of sleeping.Preposition के बाद क्रिया V1 + ing लेती है: good at playing, afraid of sleeping।
In be used to, look forward to, with a view to, accustomed to, devoted to, object to, addicted to, in addition to the to is a preposition: V1 + ing follows. (Used to + V1 without be is the past habit: I used to work.)be used to, look forward to, with a view to, accustomed to, devoted to, object (कर्म) to, addicted to, in addition to में to संबंधबोधक (preposition) है: इसके बाद V1 + ing आती है। (be के बिना used to + V1 पुरानी आदत है: I used to work।)
Two words with different prepositions joined by a conjunction need both prepositions. No preposition before a that clause (I am sure that he will come, not sure of that he will come). I am sure of that is correct when that is a pronoun meaning 'it'.अलग-अलग prepositions वाले दो शब्दों को योजक से जोड़ा जाए, तो दोनों prepositions लिखिए। That उपवाक्य से पहले preposition नहीं (I am sure that he will come, sure of that he will come नहीं)। I am sure of that तब सही है जब that सर्वनाम हो और 'it' का अर्थ दे।
Before whom / which a preposition is allowed; before that it is not. A verbal preposition (including, regarding) takes no second preposition.whom / which से पहले preposition आ सकती है; that से पहले नहीं। Verbal preposition (including, regarding) के साथ दूसरी preposition नहीं आती।
No preposition before an adverb: last Monday, next month, this evening, every Tuesday, abroad, home.क्रियाविशेषण से पहले preposition नहीं: last Monday, next month, this evening, every Tuesday, abroad, home।
Home alone is an adverb (go home); with a possessive it is a noun (go to his home).Home अकेला क्रियाविशेषण है (go home); अधिकार-सूचक के साथ संज्ञा है (go to his home)।
The verb agrees with the first subject when with, along with, as well as, besides, like, except, rather than join a second noun.with, along with, as well as, besides, like, except, rather than दूसरी संज्ञा जोड़ें तो क्रिया पहले कर्ता के अनुसार चलती है।
Transitive verbs take the object directly: reach London, discuss the issue, enter the room, demand money, order a pizza.सकर्मक क्रियाएँ कर्म सीधे लेती हैं: reach London, discuss the issue, enter the room, demand money, order a pizza।
Inform, request, advise take no to before the person; explain, describe, suggest, propose do take to. Provide sb with sth or provide sth to sb.Inform, request, advise के बाद व्यक्ति से पहले to नहीं; explain, describe, suggest, propose के साथ to आता है। Provide sb with sth या provide sth to sb।

Words with different prepositions

Angry with a person is the exam choice; angry at a thing or an event (angry at the delay); angry at a person also occurs.परीक्षा में व्यक्ति के लिए angry with चुनें; angry at वस्तु या घटना के लिए (angry at the delay); angry at a person भी मिलता है।
Surprised at or surprised by both occur; the exam uses by after a voice change. Grateful = thanks (grateful to you for …, grateful that …); thankful = relief.Surprised at और surprised by दोनों मिलते हैं; वाच्य बदलने के बाद परीक्षा में by आता है। Grateful = आभार (grateful to you for …, grateful that …); thankful = राहत।
Agree with a person; agree / assent / accede to a request, proposal or terms; agree on a matter.Agree with व्यक्ति; agree / assent / accede to अनुरोध, प्रस्ताव या शर्तें; agree on कोई विषय।
Differ with = disagree; differ from / different from = unlike.Differ with = असहमत होना; differ from / different from = भिन्न।
Die of a disease, die from an injury or overdose, die in a war or accident, die for a cause. Decline (refuse) takes no preposition.Die of बीमारी, die from चोट या overdose, die in युद्ध या दुर्घटना, die for किसी उद्देश्य के लिए। Decline (मना करना) के साथ preposition नहीं।
Made of (visible material), made from (changed material), made with (an ingredient).Made of (दिखने वाला पदार्थ), made from (बदला हुआ पदार्थ), made with (एक सामग्री)।
Comply with, adhere to, abide by, conform to the rules.नियमों के लिए comply with, adhere to, abide by, conform to।
Blind in one eye, blind to a fault; suffer from an illness, suffer a loss; believe in God, believe a story.एक आँख में blind in, गलती के लिए blind to; रोग से suffer from, हानि suffer करना; ईश्वर में believe in, कहानी को believe (बिना preposition)।
Key to, solution to, answer to (noun). Deal in goods, deal with people and problems.Key to, solution to, answer to (संज्ञा)। माल में deal in, लोगों और समस्याओं से deal with।
Attend a class (no preposition), attend to a task or a customer / person who needs help, attend on a person in service; consist of parts, consist in a quality.कक्षा के लिए attend (preposition नहीं), काम या ऐसे ग्राहक / व्यक्ति के लिए जिसे सहायता चाहिए attend to, सेवा में लगे व्यक्ति के लिए attend on; भागों के लिए consist of, गुण के लिए consist in।

Fixed prepositions: words with different meanings

Charge with a crime (verb), charge of a crime (noun), charge for a service.अपराध पर charge with (क्रिया), charge of (संज्ञा), सेवा के लिए charge for।
Good at a skill, good for health, good to people.कौशल में good at, स्वास्थ्य के लिए good for, लोगों के प्रति good to।
Quarrel with a person, quarrel over a matter; compete with a person, compete for a prize, compete in a contest.व्यक्ति से quarrel with, विषय पर quarrel over; व्यक्ति से compete with, पुरस्कार के लिए compete for, प्रतियोगिता में compete in।
Search for a thing, search a place, inquire into a matter, inquire after a person's health.वस्तु के लिए search for, स्थान के लिए search, विषय की जाँच inquire into, व्यक्ति का हाल inquire after।
Abstain from, abound in / with, enter into an agreement, enter a room, heir to a thing, heir of a person.Abstain from, abound in / with, समझौते में enter into, कमरे में enter, वस्तु का heir to, व्यक्ति का heir of।

Fixed prepositions: of, with, to, from, in, on, for

Feelings of fear, doubt, pride and knowledge take of: afraid of, aware of, proud of, jealous of, ignorant of, suspicious of.डर, संदेह, गर्व और ज्ञान के भाव के साथ of: afraid of, aware of, proud of, jealous of, ignorant of, suspicious of।
Accused of, acquitted of, convicted of, guilty of, innocent of, deprived of, devoid of, full of all take of.Accused of, acquitted of, convicted of, guilty of, innocent of, deprived of, devoid of, full of सब के साथ of।
Of + gerund: confident of winning, capable of doing, fond of singing.Of + gerund (क्रियावाचक संज्ञा): confident of winning, capable of doing, fond of singing।
Pleasure, supply and company take with: pleased with, satisfied with, delighted with, busy with, crowded with, endowed with, familiar with, comply with, cope with, part with. Pleased also takes about (a situation) and at (an event), chosen by meaning.प्रसन्नता, आपूर्ति और साथ के लिए with: pleased with, satisfied with, delighted with, busy with, crowded with, endowed with, familiar with, comply with, cope with, part with। Pleased के साथ about (कोई स्थिति) और at (कोई घटना) भी आता है; अर्थ देखकर चुनिए।
Attitude and relation take to: indifferent to, kind to, rude to, married to, opposed to, addicted to, devoted to.रवैये और संबंध के लिए to: indifferent to, kind to, rude to, married to, opposed to, addicted to, devoted to।
Separation, difference and protection take from: free from, safe from, absent from, different from, refrain from, prevent from.अलगाव, अंतर और बचाव के लिए from: free from, safe from, absent from, different from, refrain from, prevent from।
A field or involvement takes in: interested in, expert in, rich in, weak in, succeed in, participate in. Basis and focus take on: depend on, rely on, insist on, keen on.क्षेत्र या संलग्नता के लिए in: interested in, expert in, rich in, weak in, succeed in, participate in। आधार और ध्यान के लिए on: depend on, rely on, insist on, keen on।
Purpose, reason and suitability take for: eligible for, fit for, famous for, responsible for, ready for, qualified for.उद्देश्य, कारण और उपयुक्तता के लिए for: eligible for, fit for, famous for, responsible for, ready for, qualified for।
Senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior, preferable and prefer take to, never than.Senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior, preferable और prefer के साथ to आता है, than कभी नहीं।

The full list: of

Nouns + of (9) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Assurance of | Charge of | Distrust of | Doubt of | | Experience of | Failure of | Proof of | Result of | | Want of | | | | Adjectives + of (33) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Accused of | Acquitted of | Afraid of | Aware of | | Cautious of | Certain of | Characteristic of | Composed of | | Confident of | Conscious of | Convicted of | Convinced of | | Deprived of | Desirous of | Devoid of | Diffident of | | Envious of | Fearful of | Fond of | Greedy of | | Guilty of | Ignorant of | Innocent of | Negligent of | | Productive of | Proud of | Sensible of | Sick of | | Suspicious of | Tolerant of | Void of | Weary of | | Worthy of | | | | Verbs and a few nouns + of (9) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Beware of | Complain of | Die of | Despair of | | Disapprove of | Dispose of | Dream of | Judge of | | Taste of | | | |संज्ञाएँ (Nouns) + of (9) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Assurance of | का आश्वासन | Charge of | का आरोप | | Distrust of | पर अविश्वास | Doubt of | पर संदेह | | Experience of | का अनुभव | Failure of | की असफलता | | Proof of | का प्रमाण | Result of | का परिणाम | | Want of | का अभाव, की कमी | | | विशेषण (Adjectives) + of (33) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Accused of | का आरोपी | Acquitted of | से बरी | | Afraid of | से डरना | Aware of | से अवगत | | Cautious of | से सावधान | Certain of | के बारे में निश्चित | | Characteristic of | की विशेषता | Composed of | से मिलकर बना | | Confident of | पर आत्मविश्वास | Conscious of | के प्रति सचेत | | Convicted of | का दोषी | Convinced of | से आश्वस्त | | Deprived of | से वंचित | Desirous of | के इच्छुक | | Devoid of | से रहित | Diffident of | के प्रति संकोची | | Envious of | से ईर्ष्यालु | Fearful of | से भयभीत | | Fond of | का शौकीन | Greedy of | का लालची | | Guilty of | का दोषी | Ignorant of | से अनभिज्ञ | | Innocent of | से निर्दोष | Negligent of | की उपेक्षा करने वाला | | Productive of | को उत्पन्न करने वाला | Proud of | पर गर्व | | Sensible of | से अवगत/सचेत | Sick of | से परेशान | | Suspicious of | पर संदेह | Tolerant of | के प्रति सहनशील | | Void of | से खाली | Weary of | से थका हुआ, ऊबा हुआ | | Worthy of | के योग्य | | | क्रियाएँ और कुछ संज्ञाएँ + of (9) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Beware of | से सावधान | Complain of | की शिकायत | | Die of | से मरना | Despair of | से निराश होना | | Disapprove of | को अस्वीकार करना | Dispose of | का निपटान करना | | Dream of | का सपना देखना | Judge of | का अच्छा परखने वाला, जानकार | | Taste of | का स्वाद | | |

The full list: with

Nouns + with (8) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Acquaintance with | Alliance with | Bargain with | Comparison with | | Conformity with | Enmity with | Intimacy with | Relation with | Adjectives + with (25) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Afflicted with | Beset with | Busy with | Compatible with | | Compliant with | Contemporary with | Content with | Contrasted with | | Conversant with | Crowded with | Delighted with | Disgusted with | | Drenched with | Endowed with | Familiar with | Fired with | | Gifted with | Infected with | Inspired with | Intimate with | | Invested with | Overcome with | Pleased with | Popular with | | Satisfied with | | | | Verbs + with (13) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Associate with | Bear with | Comply with | Cope with | | Correspond with | Credit with | Disagree with | Fill with | | Intrigue with | Part with | Quarrel with | Side with | | Sympathize with | | | |संज्ञाएँ (Nouns) + with (8) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Acquaintance with | से परिचय | Alliance with | के साथ गठबंधन | | Bargain with | के साथ सौदा | Comparison with | की तुलना | | Conformity with | की अनुरूपता | Enmity with | के साथ दुश्मनी | | Intimacy with | के साथ घनिष्ठता | Relation with | के साथ संबंध | विशेषण (Adjectives) + with (25) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Afflicted with | से पीड़ित | Beset with | से घिरा | | Busy with | में व्यस्त | Compatible with | के अनुरूप | | Compliant with | के अनुरूप/नियमानुसार | Contemporary with | के समकालीन | | Content with | से संतुष्ट | Contrasted with | के विपरीत | | Conversant with | से परिचित | Crowded with | से भरा | | Delighted with | से प्रसन्न | Disgusted with | से घृणा | | Drenched with | से भीगा हुआ | Endowed with | से संपन्न | | Familiar with | से परिचित | Fired with | से उत्साहित | | Gifted with | से संपन्न | Infected with | से संक्रमित | | Inspired with | से प्रेरित | Intimate with | के साथ घनिष्ठ | | Invested with | को (अधिकार आदि) सौंपा गया | Overcome with | से अभिभूत | | Pleased with | से प्रसन्न | Popular with | के बीच लोकप्रिय | | Satisfied with | से संतुष्ट | | | क्रियाएँ (Verbs) + with (13) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Associate with | के साथ जुड़ना | Bear with | के प्रति धैर्य रखना | | Comply with | का पालन करना | Cope with | का सामना करना | | Correspond with | के अनुरूप होना | Credit with | का श्रेय देना | | Disagree with | से असहमत होना | Fill with | से भरना | | Intrigue with | के साथ साजिश करना | Part with | से अलग होना | | Quarrel with | के साथ झगड़ा | Side with | का पक्ष लेना | | Sympathize with | के साथ सहानुभूति रखना | | |

The full list: to

Nouns + to (28) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Access to | Accession to | Allegiance to | Alternative to | | Antidote to | Antipathy to | Approach to | Assent to | | Attachment to | Attention to | Concession to | Encouragement to | | Exception to | Incentive to | Indifference to | Invitation to | | Key to | Likeness to | Limit to | Obedience to | | Objection to | Obstruction to | Opposition to | Reference to | | Sequel to | Submission to | Supplement to | Temptation to | Adjectives + to (52) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Acceptable to | Accessible to | Accustomed to | Addicted to | | Adequate to | Affectionate to | Agreeable to | Applicable to | | Appropriate to | Common to | Committed to | Condemned to | | Comfortable to | Deaf to | Devoted to | Due to | | Equal to | Essential to | Exposed to | Faithful to | | Hostile to | Indebted to | Indifferent to | Inimical to | | Irrelevant to | Favourable to | Hurtful to | Liable to | | Limited to | Natural to | Necessary to | Obedient to | | Obliged to | Opposite to | Painful to | Peculiar to | | Pertinent to | Preferable to | Prior to | Profitable to | | Prone to | Related to | Relevant to | Responsible to | | Restricted to | Sacred to | Sensitive to | Subject to | | Suitable to | Suited to | Supplementary to | True to | Verbs + to (22) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Accede to | Adapt to | Adhere to | Apologize to | | Appoint to | Attain to | Attend to | Attribute to | | Belong to | Conform to | Consent to | Contribute to | | Lead to | Listen to | Object to | Occur to | | Prefer to | Refer to | Succumb to | Surrender to | | Testify to | Yield to | | |संज्ञाएँ (Nouns) + to (28) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Access to | तक पहुँच | Accession to | में प्रवेश | | Allegiance to | के प्रति निष्ठा | Alternative to | का विकल्प | | Antidote to | का प्रतिकारक | Antipathy to | के प्रति घृणा | | Approach to | तक पहुंच | Assent to | की स्वीकृति | | Attachment to | के प्रति लगाव | Attention to | पर ध्यान | | Concession to | की रियायत | Encouragement to | के लिए प्रोत्साहन | | Exception to | का अपवाद | Incentive to | के लिए प्रोत्साहन | | Indifference to | के प्रति उदासीनता | Invitation to | के लिए निमंत्रण | | Key to | की कुंजी | Likeness to | से समानता | | Limit to | की सीमा | Obedience to | का पालन | | Objection to | का विरोध | Obstruction to | के लिए बाधा | | Opposition to | का विरोध | Reference to | का संदर्भ | | Sequel to | का अनुवर्ती | Submission to | के प्रति समर्पण | | Supplement to | का पूरक | Temptation to | का प्रलोभन | विशेषण (Adjectives) + to (52) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Acceptable to | के लिए स्वीकार्य | Accessible to | के लिए सुलभ | | Accustomed to | का आदी | Addicted to | का लती | | Adequate to | के लिए पर्याप्त | Affectionate to | के प्रति स्नेही | | Agreeable to | के लिए सहमत | Applicable to | के लिए लागू | | Appropriate to | के लिए उपयुक्त | Common to | के लिए सामान्य | | Committed to | के प्रति प्रतिबद्ध | Condemned to | की सजा पाना/अभिशप्त होना | | Comfortable to | के लिए आरामदायक | Deaf to | के प्रति बहरे | | Devoted to | के प्रति समर्पित | Due to | के कारण | | Equal to | के बराबर | Essential to | के लिए आवश्यक | | Exposed to | के लिए उजागर | Faithful to | के प्रति वफादार | | Hostile to | के प्रति शत्रुतापूर्ण | Indebted to | का ऋणी | | Indifferent to | के प्रति उदासीन | Inimical to | के लिए हानिकारक | | Irrelevant to | के लिए अप्रासंगिक | Favourable to | के लिए अनुकूल | | Hurtful to | के लिए पीड़ादायक | Liable to | के प्रति उत्तरदायी; की संभावना वाला | | Limited to | तक सीमित | Natural to | के लिए प्राकृतिक | | Necessary to | के लिए आवश्यक | Obedient to | के प्रति आज्ञाकारी | | Obliged to | के प्रति कृतज्ञ | Opposite to | के विपरीत | | Painful to | के लिए पीड़ादायक | Peculiar to | की ही विशेषता, विशिष्ट | | Pertinent to | के लिए प्रासंगिक | Preferable to | के लिए बेहतर | | Prior to | के पहले | Profitable to | के लिए लाभकारी | | Prone to | के लिए झुकाव | Related to | से संबंधित | | Relevant to | के लिए प्रासंगिक | Responsible to | के प्रति जिम्मेदार | | Restricted to | तक सीमित | Sacred to | के लिए पवित्र | | Sensitive to | के प्रति संवेदनशील | Subject (कर्ता) to | के अधीन | | Suitable to | के लिए उपयुक्त | Suited to | के लिए अनुकूल | | Supplementary to | के पूरक | True to | के प्रति सत्य | क्रियाएँ (Verbs) + to (22) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Accede to | को स्वीकार करना | Adapt to | के अनुसार अनुकूलित करना | | Adhere to | का पालन करना | Apologize to | से माफी मांगना | | Appoint to | के लिए नियुक्त करना | Attain to | प्राप्त करना | | Attend to | पर ध्यान देना | Attribute to | के लिए जिम्मेदार ठहराना | | Belong to | का हिस्सा होना | Conform to | के अनुरूप होना/का पालन करना | | Consent to | को सहमति देना | Contribute to | में योगदान देना | | Lead to | की ओर ले जाना | Listen to | को सुनना | | Object (कर्म) to | का विरोध करना | Occur to | के ध्यान में आना | | Prefer to | को प्राथमिकता देना | Refer to | का उल्लेख करना | | Succumb to | के सामने झुकना | Surrender to | के सामने आत्मसमर्पण करना | | Testify to | के लिए गवाही देना | Yield to | के आगे झुकना |

The full list: from

Nouns + from (5) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Abstinence from | Deliverance from | Descent from | Exemption from | | Inference from | | | | Adjectives + from (5) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Absent from | Different from | Free from | Made from | | Safe from | | | | Verbs + from (19) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Abstain from | Alight from | Cease from | Debar from | | Derive from | Detract from | Deviate from | Differ from | | Elicit from | Emerge from | Escape from | Exclude from | | Preserve from | Prevent from | Prohibit from | Protect from | | Recoil from | Recover from | Refrain from | |संज्ञाएँ (Nouns) + from (5) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Abstinence from | से परहेज | Deliverance from | से मुक्ति | | Descent from | वंश, उत्पत्ति; नीचे उतरना | Exemption from | से छूट | | Inference from | से निष्कर्ष | | | विशेषण (Adjectives) + from (5) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Absent from | से अनुपस्थित | Different from | से अलग | | Free from | से मुक्त | Made from | से बना | | Safe from | से सुरक्षित | | | क्रियाएँ (Verbs) + from (19) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Abstain from | से परहेज करना | Alight from | से उतरना | | Cease from | से रुकना, बाज़ आना | Debar from | से वंचित करना | | Derive from | से व्युत्पन्न होना | Detract from | से कम करना | | Deviate from | से विचलित होना | Differ from | से भिन्न होना | | Elicit from | से निकालना | Emerge from | से उभरना | | Escape from | से भागना | Exclude from | से बाहर करना | | Preserve from | से बचाना | Prevent from | से रोकना | | Prohibit from | से रोकना | Protect from | से बचाना | | Recoil from | से पीछे हटना | Recover from | से उबरना | | Refrain from | से बचना | | |

The full list: in

Nouns + in (9) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Belief in | Change in | Delay in | Difference in | | Experience in | Fall in | Growth in | Increase in | | Decrease in | | | | Adjectives + in (18) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Engulfed in | Accomplished in | Accurate in | Backward in | | Bigoted in | Current in | Defective in | Deficient in | | Experienced in | Diligent in | Fertile in | Honest in | | Implicated in | Interested in | Involved in | Proficient in | | Temperate in | Versed in | | | Verbs + in (15) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Believe in | Delight in | Employ in | Enlist in | | Excel in | Fail in | Glory in | Involve in | | Indulge in | Participate in | Preserve in | Persist in | | Succeed in | Specialize in | Trust in | |संज्ञाएँ (Nouns) + in (9) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Belief in | में विश्वास | Change in | में परिवर्तन | | Delay in | में विलंब | Difference in | में अंतर | | Experience in | में अनुभव | Fall in | में गिरावट | | Growth in | में वृद्धि | Increase in | में वृद्धि | | Decrease in | में कमी | | | विशेषण (Adjectives) + in (18) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Engulfed in | किसी चीज से घिरा हुआ | Accomplished in | में निपुण | | Accurate in | में सटीक | Backward in | में पिछड़ा | | Bigoted in | में कट्टर | Current in | में वर्तमान | | Defective in | में दोषपूर्ण | Deficient in | में कमी | | Experienced in | में अनुभवी | Diligent in | में परिश्रमी | | Fertile in | में उपजाऊ | Honest in | में ईमानदार | | Implicated in | में फंसा हुआ | Interested in | में रुचि | | Involved in | में शामिल | Proficient in | में दक्ष | | Temperate in | में संयमी | Versed in | में पारंगत | क्रियाएँ (Verbs) + in (15) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Believe in | में विश्वास करना | Delight in | में आनंद लेना | | Employ in | में नियोजित करना | Enlist in | में भर्ती होना | | Excel in | में उत्कृष्ट होना | Fail in | में असफल होना | | Glory in | में गौरव लेना | Involve in | में शामिल करना | | Indulge in | में लिप्त होना | Participate in | में भाग लेना | | Preserve in | में संरक्षित रखना | Persist in | में दृढ़ रहना | | Succeed in | में सफल होना | Specialize in | में विशेषज्ञता प्राप्त करना | | Trust in | में भरोसा करना | | |

The full list: on

Nouns + on (8) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Agreement on | Ban on | Congratulations on | Debate on | | Decision on | Hold on | Information on | Report on | Adjectives + on (2) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Keen on | Based on | | | Verbs + on (14) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Comment on | Decide on | Deliberate on | Depend on | | Determine on | Dwell on | Embark on | Encroach on | | Enlarge on | Impose on | Insist on | Intrude on | | Resolve on | Subsist on | | |संज्ञाएँ (Nouns) + on (8) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Agreement (सामंजस्य) on | के साथ/पर समझौता | Ban on | पर प्रतिबंध | | Congratulations on | पर बधाई | Debate on | पर बहस | | Decision on | पर निर्णय | Hold on | पर पकड़ | | Information on | पर/के बारे में जानकारी | Report on | पर रिपोर्ट | विशेषण (Adjectives) + on (2) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Keen on | के प्रति उत्सुक | Based on | पर आधारित | क्रियाएँ (Verbs) + on (14) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Comment on | पर टिप्पणी करना | Decide on | पर निर्णय लेना | | Deliberate on | पर विचार करना | Depend on | पर निर्भर करना | | Determine on | पर निर्णय लेना | Dwell on | पर देर तक सोचना, ज़ोर देना | | Embark on | किसी काम पर निकलना, शुरू करना | Encroach on | पर अतिक्रमण करना | | Enlarge on | पर विस्तार करना | Impose on | पर थोपना | | Insist on | पर जोर देना | Intrude on | पर हस्तक्षेप करना | | Resolve on | पर निर्णय लेना | Subsist on | पर निर्भर रहना |

The full list: for

Nouns + for (11) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Admiration for | Cure for | Desire for | Hope for | | Need for | Passion for | Reason for | Respect for | | Room for | Sympathy for | Talent for | | Adjectives + for (20) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Anxious for | Celebrated for | Conspicuous for | Customary for | | Designed for | Eager for | Eligible for | Eminent for | | Fit for | Good for | Grateful for | Notorious for | | Prepared for | Proper for | Qualified for | Ready for | | Sorry for | Sufficient for | Useful for | Zealous for | Verbs + for (6) | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | Phrase | |---|---|---|---| | Feel for | Pine for | Start for | Wish for | | Wait for | Yearn for | | |संज्ञाएँ (Nouns) + for (11) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Admiration for | के लिए प्रशंसा | Cure for | का इलाज | | Desire for | के लिए इच्छा | Hope for | के लिए आशा | | Need for | की आवश्यकता | Passion for | के लिए जुनून | | Reason for | के कारण | Respect for | के लिए सम्मान | | Room for | के लिए जगह | Sympathy for | के लिए सहानुभूति | | Talent for | के लिए प्रतिभा | | | विशेषण (Adjectives) + for (20) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Anxious for | के लिए उत्सुक | Celebrated for | के लिए प्रसिद्ध | | Conspicuous for | के लिए विशिष्ट, प्रसिद्ध | Customary for | के लिए प्रचलित, प्रथागत | | Designed for | के लिए डिजाइन किया गया | Eager for | के लिए उत्सुक | | Eligible for | के लिए योग्य | Eminent for | के लिए प्रसिद्ध | | Fit for | के लिए उपयुक्त | Good for | के लिए अच्छा | | Grateful for | के लिए आभारी | Notorious for | के लिए बदनाम | | Prepared for | के लिए तैयार | Proper for | के लिए उचित | | Qualified for | के लिए योग्य | Ready for | के लिए तैयार | | Sorry for | के लिए खेद | Sufficient for | के लिए पर्याप्त | | Useful for | के लिए उपयोगी | Zealous for | के लिए उत्साही | क्रियाएँ (Verbs) + for (6) | पदबंध | अर्थ | पदबंध | अर्थ | |---|---|---|---| | Feel for | के प्रति सहानुभूति रखना | Pine for | के लिए तड़पना | | Start for | के लिए रवाना होना | Wish for | के लिए इच्छा | | Wait for | के लिए प्रतीक्षा करना | Yearn for | के लिए तरसना |

17. Subjunctive Mood Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

The subjunctive is for what is not a fact: a need, or something unreal.सब्जंक्टिव उसके लिए है जो तथ्य नहीं है: कोई आवश्यकता, या कोई अवास्तविक बात।
Direct order is imperative; indirect order in a that-clause is present subjunctive.सीधा आदेश imperative (आज्ञार्थक) है; that-clause (संज्ञा उपवाक्य) में अप्रत्यक्ष आदेश वर्तमान सब्जंक्टिव है।
Demand, advise, recommend, insist, urge, require + that, and It is essential / vital / necessary that: subject + V1.Demand, advise, recommend, insist, urge, require + that, और It is essential / vital / necessary that: कर्ता + V1।
In the present subjunctive the verb never changes with the subject, and be stays be.वर्तमान सब्जंक्टिव में क्रिया कर्ता के साथ कभी नहीं बदलती, और be हमेशा be रहती है।
should + V1 is also correct; when both are in the options, choose should + V1.should + V1 भी सही है; दोनों विकल्प हों तो should + V1 चुनिए।
Negative is not + V1; passive is be + V3.निषेध not + V1 है; कर्मवाच्य be + V3 है।
Insist, suggest, agree give V1 only for a demand. A fact or a claim keeps the normal tense.Insist, suggest, agree में V1 केवल माँग के लिए आता है। तथ्य या दावे में सामान्य काल रहता है।
Lest = for fear that it may happen: no may, no extra not, no will / shall; use V1 or should + V1.Lest = for fear that it may happen: may नहीं, अतिरिक्त not नहीं, will / shall नहीं; V1 या should + V1 लगाइए।
After I wish / if only / would that: unreal present = V2 / were; unreal past = had + V3.I wish / if only / would that के बाद: अवास्तविक वर्तमान = V2 / were; अवास्तविक अतीत = had + V3।
Were is used with every subject for an unreal idea: If I were you, not If I was you (informal; the exam key is were).अवास्तविक विचार में हर कर्ता के साथ were आता है: If I were you, If I was you नहीं (अनौपचारिक; परीक्षा की उत्तर-कुंजी were है)।
As if / as though: unreal = past subjunctive; possibility = normal tense.As if / as though: अवास्तविक = भूतकालीन सब्जंक्टिव; संभावना = सामान्य काल।
It is (high) time + subject + V2; It is time + to + V1 is a plain suggestion.It is (high) time + कर्ता + V2; It is time + to + V1 सीधा सुझाव है।
Would rather + new subject takes V2; with one subject, it takes V1 + than + V1.Would rather + नया कर्ता V2 लेता है; एक कर्ता हो तो V1 + than + V1।
Would you mind takes V-ing, or if + subject + V2.Would you mind के बाद V-ing, या if + कर्ता + V2 आता है।
Ensure, make sure, hope, say are not words of demand. Their that-clause keeps the normal tense: ensure that every participant is heard.Ensure, make sure, hope, say माँग वाले शब्द नहीं हैं। इनके that-उपवाक्य में सामान्य काल रहता है: ensure that every participant is heard।
Wish + would is for someone else's behaviour; wish + could is for my own ability. Never wish + can / will.Wish + would किसी और के व्यवहार के लिए है; wish + could अपनी क्षमता के लिए। wish + can / will कभी नहीं।
Fixed expressions keep the base form: God bless you, Long live the King, Come what may, So be it, Far be it from me.स्थिर अभिव्यक्तियाँ base form (मूल रूप) में रहती हैं: God bless you, Long live the King, Come what may, So be it, Far be it from me।

Present subjunctive (need)

Need, requirement or indirect order / advice / suggestion / request in a that-clause: that + subject + V1. ✔ I insisted that the council reconsider its decision.that-clause (संज्ञा उपवाक्य) में आवश्यकता, अपेक्षा या अप्रत्यक्ष आदेश / सलाह / सुझाव / अनुरोध: that + कर्ता + V1। ✔ I insisted that the council reconsider its decision.
Verbs: demand, advise, recommend, allow, desire, move, request, arrange, determine, order, require, ask, pledge, resolve, beg, pray, stipulate, command, grant, prefer, suggest, concede, insist, pronounce, urge, decide, instruct, propose, vote.क्रियाएँ: demand, advise, recommend, allow, desire, move, request, arrange, determine, order, require, ask, pledge, resolve, beg, pray, stipulate, command, grant, prefer, suggest, concede, insist, pronounce, urge, decide, instruct, propose, vote।
Adjectives (It is + adjective + that): essential, compulsory, imperative, impossible, (im)proper, (in)appropriate, crucial, important, necessary, obligatory, mandatory, vital. Nouns and adjectives made from the verbs above also work.विशेषण (It is + adjective + that): essential, compulsory, imperative (आज्ञार्थक), impossible, (im)proper, (in)appropriate, crucial, important, necessary, obligatory, mandatory, vital। ऊपर की क्रियाओं से बने संज्ञा और विशेषण भी चलते हैं।
Subject-verb agreement and tense do not work in this clause.इस उपवाक्य में कर्ता-क्रिया सहमति और काल काम नहीं करते।
The tense of the main verb makes no difference to the that-clause: suggested that he leave, never suggested that he left.मुख्य क्रिया के काल का that-उपवाक्य पर कोई प्रभाव नहीं: suggested that he leave, suggested that he left कभी नहीं।

Form of the present subjunctive

Only V1, whatever the subject. ✔ I recommend that he stop the work.केवल V1, कर्ता कोई भी हो। ✔ I recommend that he stop the work.
should + V1 can replace V1. If both are given, choose should + V1. Other modals (will, shall, could, must) are wrong. ✔ It is imperative that he should attend the class.should + V1 V1 की जगह ले सकता है। दोनों दिए हों तो should + V1 चुनिए। दूसरे modals (will, shall, could, must) गलत हैं। ✔ It is imperative that he should attend the class.
For be: only be. Never is / am / are / was / were. ✔ It is essential that the report be ready by Monday.Be के लिए: केवल be। is / am / are / was / were कभी नहीं। ✔ It is essential that the report be ready by Monday.
Negative: not + V1 (never do not / does not / did not). With be: not be / be not. ✔ It is vital that we not miss our flight.निषेध: not + V1 (do not / does not / did not कभी नहीं)। Be के साथ: not be / be not। ✔ It is vital that we not miss our flight.
Passive: be + V3. ✔ I demand that I be allowed to answer these questions.कर्मवाच्य: be + V3। ✔ I demand that I be allowed to answer these questions.

Need or fact?

Insist / suggest / agree as a demand or suggestion: V1. As a fact or claim: normal tense. ✔ Kavya insisted that she be allowed to go. ✔ Deepak insisted that he is innocent.Insist / suggest / agree माँग या सुझाव के रूप में: V1। तथ्य या दावे के रूप में: सामान्य काल। ✔ Kavya insisted that she be allowed to go. ✔ Deepak insisted that he is innocent.
Suggest = indicate takes the normal tense. ✔ The evidence suggests that he is the killer.Suggest = indicate हो तो सामान्य काल। ✔ The evidence suggests that he is the killer.
Suggest takes to + person; advise takes the person directly. ✔ He suggested to me that I take rest. ✔ The doctor advised him to take rest.Suggest में to + व्यक्ति; advise में व्यक्ति सीधे। ✔ He suggested to me that I take rest. ✔ The doctor advised him to take rest.

Optative sentences and lest

Optative without may / might: plain V1. ✔ God bless you!May / might के बिना इच्छासूचक वाक्य: केवल V1। ✔ God bless you!
Lest = for fear that it may happen. After lest: V1 or should + V1 (both correct); no may, no extra not, no will / shall, no past tense. ✔ Work hard lest you fail. ✔ He got up early lest he should miss the train.Lest = for fear that it may happen। Lest के बाद: V1 या should + V1 (दोनों सही); may नहीं, अतिरिक्त not नहीं, will / shall नहीं, भूतकाल नहीं। ✔ Work hard lest you fail. ✔ He got up early lest he should miss the train.

Past subjunctive (unreal)

Triggers: I wish, as if, as though, if only, would that.संकेत शब्द: I wish, as if, as though, if only, would that।
Unreal present: V2 / were (were for every subject). ✔ I wish he were here now. In SSC exams were is the expected form (If I were you, I wish he were here). In informal English was is also heard in the singular (If I was you); do not use was in a formal answer.अवास्तविक वर्तमान: V2 / were (हर कर्ता के लिए were)। ✔ I wish he were here now. SSC परीक्षाओं में were ही अपेक्षित रूप है (If I were you, I wish he were here)। अनौपचारिक अंग्रेज़ी में एकवचन के साथ was भी सुनाई देता है (If I was you); औपचारिक उत्तर में was मत लिखिए।
Unreal past: had + V3. ✔ I wish I had completed the work last week.अवास्तविक अतीत: had + V3। ✔ I wish I had completed the work last week.
Wished: V2 / were = unreality at that time; had + V3 = before that time. ✔ I wished I knew / had known everything.Wished: V2 / were = उसी समय की अवास्तविकता; had + V3 = उससे पहले की। ✔ I wished I knew / had known everything.
If only and would that = I wish. Only if = if (a condition, with inversion in the main clause). ✔ If only I were a bird. ✔ Only if you study hard, can you pass.If only और would that = I wish। Only if = if (शर्त, मुख्य उपवाक्य में inversion)। ✔ If only I were a bird. ✔ Only if you study hard, can you pass.
If the situation is imaginary: If I were you (If I was you is informal and is not the exam form). Without if: Were I ....स्थिति काल्पनिक हो तो: If I were you (If I was you अनौपचारिक है और परीक्षा का रूप नहीं है)। If के बिना: Were I ...।
As if / as though + unreal = were / V2 / had + V3; + possibility = normal tense. ✔ He looks as if he is rich. ✔ He looks as if he were a girl.As if / as though + अवास्तविक = were / V2 / had + V3; + संभावना = सामान्य काल। ✔ He looks as if he is rich. ✔ He looks as if he were a girl.
A wish about someone else's behaviour: wish + would + V1; about my own ability: wish + could + V1. ✔ I wish you would stop talking. ✔ I wish I could help you.किसी और के व्यवहार की इच्छा: wish + would + V1; अपनी क्षमता की इच्छा: wish + could + V1। ✔ I wish you would stop talking. ✔ I wish I could help you.

Time, would rather, mind

It is time + to + V1 (suggestion); It is (high / about) time + subject + V2 (regret). 'That' may be used or left out. ✔ It is high time we started preparations.It is time + to + V1 (सुझाव); It is (high / about) time + कर्ता + V2 (पछतावा)। 'That' का प्रयोग करना आपकी इच्छा है। ✔ It is high time we started preparations.
Would rather + V1 + than + V1 (one subject); would rather + new subject + V2 (a wish about someone). ✔ I would rather you studied hard. ✔ I would rather you had stayed. ✔ I would rather have stayed home.Would rather + V1 + than + V1 (एक कर्ता); would rather + नया कर्ता + V2 (किसी के कार्य की इच्छा)। ✔ I would rather you studied hard. ✔ I would rather you had stayed. ✔ I would rather have stayed home.
Do you mind if + sub + V1; Would you mind if + sub + V2; Would / Do you mind + V-ing. ✔ Would you mind opening the window, please?Do you mind if + sub + V1; Would you mind if + sub + V2; Would / Do you mind + V-ing। ✔ Would you mind opening the window, please?

Ensure, hope, say (normal tense)

ensure / make sure / see that / hope / think / believe / say / know + that = normal tense and normal agreement (every participant is heard).ensure / make sure / see that / hope / think / believe / say / know + that = सामान्य काल और सामान्य अनुरूपता (every participant is heard)।
The base form comes only when the main clause itself demands, requests or advises: demand, insist, request, advise, essential.Base form (मूल रूप) तभी आती है जब मुख्य उपवाक्य स्वयं माँगे, अनुरोध करे या सलाह दे: demand, insist, request, advise, essential।
After ensure / make sure the tense follows the main verb: made sure that every child had lunch.Ensure / make sure के बाद काल मुख्य क्रिया के अनुसार चलता है: made sure that every child had lunch।

Fixed expressions

Fixed expressions keep the plain base form: *Long live the King, God bless you, Come what may, Be that as it may, So be it, Suffice it to say, Heaven forbid, If need be*.स्थिर अभिव्यक्तियाँ सादे base form (मूल रूप) में रहती हैं: *Long live the King, God bless you, Come what may, Be that as it may, So be it, Suffice it to say, Heaven forbid, If need be*।
The right preposition is Far be it from me (never for me), followed by to + V1.सही preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) Far be it from me है (for me कभी नहीं), उसके बाद to + V1।

18. Conditionals Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A conditional sentence has a condition and a result: a real condition gives a real result, an unreal one gives an unreal result.शर्त वाले वाक्य में शर्त और परिणाम होते हैं: वास्तविक शर्त का परिणाम वास्तविक, अवास्तविक का अवास्तविक।
Always ask: when is the condition, when is the result?हमेशा पूछें: शर्त कब की है, परिणाम कब का है?
Zero conditional: present + present for a fact or a habit; if can become when / whenever / every time.Zero conditional (शून्य शर्तवाचक): तथ्य या आदत के लिए present + present; if की जगह when / whenever / every time आ सकता है।
First conditional: if + present, will + V1; never will in the if clause.First conditional: if + present, will + V1; if उपवाक्य में will कभी नहीं।
Second conditional: if + V2 / were, would + V1; use were with every subject (If I were you).Second conditional (द्वितीय शर्तवाचक): if + V2 / were, would + V1; हर कर्ता के साथ were (If I were you)।
Third conditional: if + had + V3, would have + V3; a past condition never takes would tell or will be.Third conditional (तृतीय शर्तवाचक): if + had + V3, would have + V3; भूतकाल की शर्त के साथ would tell या will be कभी नहीं।
Mixed conditional: past condition, present result (hadn't ... would be) or always-unreal condition, past result (were ... would have + V3).Mixed conditional (मिश्र शर्तवाचक): भूतकाल की शर्त, वर्तमान का परिणाम (hadn't ... would be) या सदा-अवास्तविक शर्त, भूतकाल का परिणाम (were ... would have + V3)।
Would never sits in the if clause of a plain condition; could / might can, for ability or possibility.Would साधारण शर्त के if उपवाक्य में कभी प्रयोग नहीं होता; could / might योग्यता या संभावना के लिए प्रयोग हो सकते हैं।
Inversion only with Should / Were / Had, and if is dropped: Had I known, ...Inversion (व्युत्क्रम) केवल Should / Were / Had से, और if हट जाता है: Had I known, ...
Unless = if ... not, so no extra not after it; until normally takes none either (check the logic first).Unless = if ... not, इसलिए उसके बाद अतिरिक्त not नहीं; until के साथ भी सामान्यतः नहीं (पहले तर्क जाँचें)।
Unless / until clauses also take no will / shall / would.Unless / until वाले उपवाक्यों में will / shall / would भी नहीं आते।
If = usually a condition whose event comes first (some if sentences give inference); in case = a precaution for something that may come later.If = सामान्यतः पहले आने वाली घटना की शर्त (कुछ if वाक्य अनुमान देते हैं); in case = बाद में आ सकने वाली बात की सावधानी।
But for + noun = without = if it had not been for.But for + noun (संज्ञा) = without = if it had not been for।
Would like is a request, not an unreal result: If you have finished your book, I would like to borrow it.Would like निवेदन है, अवास्तविक परिणाम नहीं: If you have finished your book, I would like to borrow it.
Provided, as long as, even if work like if: no will in their clause. Whether ... or not (no matter whether) also takes the present.Provided, as long as, even if if की तरह चलते हैं: इनके उपवाक्य में will नहीं। Whether ... or not (no matter whether) में भी वर्तमान आता है।
When, as soon as, before, after, until, by the time open time clauses: no will or would inside. By the time + present, will have + V3.When, as soon as, before, after, until, by the time समय-उपवाक्य शुरू करते हैं: भीतर will या would नहीं। By the time + present, will have + V3.
Were he to + V1 is for an unlikely future; a past result needs Had he + V3. Stative verbs: Had he known, never Had he been knowing.Were he to + V1 भविष्य की कम संभावना के लिए है; भूतकाल के परिणाम के लिए Had he + V3 चाहिए। अवस्था-बोधक क्रियाएँ: Had he known, Had he been knowing कभी नहीं।

The five conditionals: structures

Zero: If + present indefinite, present indefinite (fact, habit). ✔ If we freeze water, it expands.Zero: If + present indefinite (सामान्य वर्तमान काल), present indefinite (तथ्य, आदत)। ✔ If we freeze water, it expands.
First: If + present indefinite, sub + will / shall / can / may + V1 (prediction). ✔ If it rains, we will go to school by bus.First: If + present indefinite, sub + will / shall / can / may + V1 (भविष्यवाणी)। ✔ If it rains, we will go to school by bus.
Second: If + sub + V2 / were, sub + would / could / might + V1 (unreal present). ✔ If I went to Mumbai, I would meet Mr. Amitabh Bachchan.Second: If + sub + V2 / were, sub + would / could / might + V1 (अवास्तविक वर्तमान)। ✔ If I went to Mumbai, I would meet Mr. Amitabh Bachchan.
Third: If + sub + had + V3, sub + would / could / might + have + V3 (unreal past). ✔ If she had come yesterday, we would have gone to watch a movie.Third: If + sub + had + V3, sub + would / could / might + have + V3 (अवास्तविक भूतकाल)। ✔ If she had come yesterday, we would have gone to watch a movie.
Mixed: had + V3 ... would + V1 (past condition, present result) and V2 / were ... would have + V3 (always-unreal condition, past result).Mixed: had + V3 ... would + V1 (भूतकाल की शर्त, वर्तमान का परिणाम) और V2 / were ... would have + V3 (सदा अवास्तविक शर्त, भूतकाल का परिणाम)।
Order of the clauses: If clause, main clause (with a comma) or main clause if clause (without a comma).उपवाक्यों का क्रम: If clause, main clause (अल्पविराम के साथ) या main clause if clause (अल्पविराम के बिना)।

Zero conditional

Zero conditional: If + present indefinite, present indefinite. ✔ If we freeze water, it expands.Zero conditional (शून्य शर्तवाचक): If + present indefinite, present indefinite। ✔ If we freeze water, it expands.
It shows a fact, universal truth or habit, so both clauses stay in the present.यह तथ्य, सार्वभौमिक सत्य या आदत दिखाता है, इसलिए दोनों उपवाक्य वर्तमान में रहते हैं।
If can be replaced by when / whenever / every time without a change in meaning.If की जगह when / whenever / every time लग सकता है, अर्थ नहीं बदलता।
No will in the if clause. A prediction (not a fact) goes to the first conditional.If उपवाक्य में will नहीं। भविष्यवाणी (तथ्य नहीं) first conditional (प्रथम शर्तवाचक) में जाती है।

First conditional

First conditional: If + present indefinite, sub + will / shall / can / may + V1. ✔ If it rains, we will go by bus.First conditional (प्रथम शर्तवाचक): If + present indefinite, sub + will / shall / can / may + V1। ✔ If it rains, we will go by bus.
It shows a prediction or possibility, not a fact.यह भविष्यवाणी या संभावना दिखाता है, तथ्य नहीं।
Will / shall belong to the main clause, never to the if clause. ✘ If it will rain, we will go. (use rains)Will / shall मुख्य उपवाक्य के हैं, if उपवाक्य के कभी नहीं। ✘ If it will rain, we will go. (use rains)
The main clause can be an imperative. ✔ If you see him, tell him about me.मुख्य उपवाक्य आज्ञार्थक (imperative) भी हो सकता है। ✔ If you see him, tell him about me.
The if clause can also take the present continuous, present perfect or present perfect continuous.If उपवाक्य में present continuous (अपूर्ण वर्तमान काल), present perfect (पूर्ण वर्तमान काल) या present perfect continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण वर्तमान काल) भी आ सकता है।

Second conditional

Second conditional: If + sub + V2 / were, sub + would / could / might + V1. ✔ If I were a bird, I would fly in the sky.Second conditional (द्वितीय शर्तवाचक): If + sub + V2 / were, sub + would / could / might + V1। ✔ If I were a bird, I would fly in the sky.
It shows imagination, unreality or improbability in the present or future.यह वर्तमान या भविष्य की कल्पना, अवास्तविकता या असंभावना दिखाता है।
Would is not used in the if clause of a plain condition. Could and might can appear there when they mean ability or possibility. ✘ If you would study, you could pass. ✔ If I could swim, I would join you. (could = ability)Would साधारण शर्त के if उपवाक्य में नहीं आता। Could और might वहाँ आ सकते हैं जब वे योग्यता या संभावना का अर्थ दें। ✘ If you would study, you could pass. ✔ If I could swim, I would join you. (could = योग्यता)
In an unreal condition use were with every subject. ✘ If I was you ... ✔ If I were you ...अवास्तविक शर्त में हर कर्ता के साथ were लगाएँ। ✘ If I was you ... ✔ If I were you ...
Inversion works only for should, were, had.Inversion (व्युत्क्रम) केवल should, were, had का होता है।

Third conditional

Third conditional: If + sub + had + V3, sub + would / could / might + have + V3. ✔ If I had been there, I would have told you everything.Third conditional (तृतीय शर्तवाचक): If + sub + had + V3, sub + would / could / might + have + V3। ✔ If I had been there, I would have told you everything.
It shows an unreal past condition or a regret; the facts were the opposite.यह भूतकाल की अवास्तविक शर्त या पछतावा दिखाता है; तथ्य इसके उलट थे।
A past unreal condition (had + V3) normally needs a result with would / could / might + have + V3; a result with will or had + V3 does not fit. When the result is about now, the mixed pattern (would + V1) is correct (see the next concept).भूतकाल की अवास्तविक शर्त (had + V3) का परिणाम सामान्यतः would / could / might + have + V3 में होगा; will या had + V3 वाला परिणाम उचित नहीं है। जब परिणाम अभी का हो, तो मिश्रित ढाँचा (would + V1) सही है (अगला concept देखें)।
The if clause of an unreal past never takes did / went / have + V3 / would have; it takes had + V3.अवास्तविक भूतकाल के if उपवाक्य में did / went / have + V3 / would have नहीं आते; उसमें had + V3 आता है।

Mixed conditionals

Past condition, present result: If + sub + had + V3, sub + would / could / might + V1. ✔ If he hadn't helped me, I wouldn't be here today.भूतकाल की शर्त, वर्तमान का परिणाम: If + sub + had + V3, sub + would / could / might + V1। ✔ If he hadn't helped me, I wouldn't be here today.
Always-unreal condition, past result: If + sub + V2 / were, sub + would / could / might + have + V3. ✔ If she were my sister, she would have helped me yesterday.सदा अवास्तविक शर्त, भूतकाल का परिणाम: If + sub + V2 / were, sub + would / could / might + have + V3। ✔ If she were my sister, she would have helped me yesterday.
Check the two halves separately: when is the condition, when is the result?दोनों भागों को अलग-अलग जाँचें: शर्त कब की है, परिणाम कब का है?
Now, today, still point to would + V1; yesterday, that day, last year point to would have + V3.Now, today, still का अर्थ would + V1; yesterday, that day, last year का अर्थ would have + V3।

Inverted conditional

First: If + sub + V1 = Should + sub + V1. ✔ Should I meet her, I will tell her about you.First: If + sub + V1 = Should + sub + V1। ✔ Should I meet her, I will tell her about you.
Second: If + sub + were = Were + sub. ✔ Were I a bird, I would fly in the sky.Second: If + sub + were = Were + sub। ✔ Were I a bird, I would fly in the sky.
Third: If + sub + had + V3 = Had + sub + V3. ✔ Had I been there, I would have told you everything.Third: If + sub + had + V3 = Had + sub + V3। ✔ Had I been there, I would have told you everything.
Inversion is done in only these three cases; if is dropped, never kept along with the inversion.Inversion (व्युत्क्रम) केवल इन तीन स्थितियों में होता है; if हटाया जाता है, inversion के साथ कभी नहीं रखा जाता।
In a formal first conditional If + sub + should + V1 is also correct.औपचारिक first conditional (प्रथम शर्तवाचक) में If + sub + should + V1 भी सही है।
Formal first conditional: If I should meet her, I will tell her about you.औपचारिक first conditional: If I should meet her, I will tell her about you.
Were + sub + to + V1 imagines an unlikely future and goes with would + V1. A result in the past needs Had + sub + V3.Were + कर्ता + to + V1 भविष्य की कम संभावना वाली बात दिखाता है और would + V1 के साथ आता है। भूतकाल के परिणाम के लिए Had + कर्ता + V3 चाहिए।
Stative verbs (know, believe, want, like) take no *-ing*: Had he known, never Had he been knowing.अवस्था-बोधक क्रियाओं (know, believe, want, like) में *-ing* नहीं लगता: Had he known, Had he been knowing कभी नहीं।
In the inverted negative, not follows the subject: Had he not helped, not Hadn't he helped.उलटे निषेध में not कर्ता के बाद आता है: Had he not helped, Hadn't he helped नहीं।

Unless and until

Unless = if ... not. It is a negative condition and a conjunction. ✔ Unless you prepare well, you will fail.Unless = if ... not। यह नकारात्मक शर्त है और conjunction (संयोजक) है। ✔ Unless you prepare well, you will fail.
Until = as long as ... not. It is a negative deadline of time, and it can be a preposition or a conjunction.Until = as long as ... not। यह समय की नकारात्मक सीमा है, और preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) या conjunction (संयोजक) हो सकता है।
After unless do not add not (unless you do not run repeats the negative). Until normally takes no not either, but a genuine negated endpoint is possible (Wait until it is not raining). In SSC exams the error is the unnecessary not. Check the logic before deleting it. ✘ Unless you do not run fast ...Unless के बाद not न लगाएँ (unless you do not run निषेध को दोहराता है)। Until के साथ भी सामान्यतः not नहीं आता, पर सचमुच नकारात्मक अंतिम बिंदु हो तो आ सकता है (Wait until it is not raining)। SSC परीक्षाओं में त्रुटि फ़ालतू not होती है। हटाने से पहले तर्क जाँच लें। ✘ Unless you do not run fast ...
The clause with unless / until takes no will / shall / would; the present indefinite shows the future. ✘ unless you will invite himUnless / until वाले उपवाक्य में will / shall / would नहीं आता; भविष्य present indefinite से दिखता है। ✘ unless you will invite him

If and in case

If usually shows a condition whose event comes first (Open the umbrella if it rains). Some if sentences give inference rather than order (If he is home, the lights will be on).If सामान्यतः ऐसी शर्त दिखाता है जिसकी घटना पहले आती है (Open the umbrella if it rains)। कुछ if वाक्य क्रम नहीं, अनुमान (inference) देते हैं (If he is home, the lights will be on)।
In case shows a precaution: its event may come after the main action. ✔ Take an umbrella in case it rains.In case सावधानी दिखाता है: उसकी घटना मुख्य क्रिया के बाद हो सकती है। ✔ Take an umbrella in case it rains.
Neither clause takes will; the present indefinite shows the future.दोनों में से किसी उपवाक्य में will नहीं आता; भविष्य present indefinite से दिखता है।

But for, implied conditions, reduced clauses

But for + noun = without = if it had not been for. It can refer to the past or to the present. ✔ But for your help, I would not have got any job. (past) ✔ But for your help, I would be lost. (present)But for + noun (संज्ञा) = without = if it had not been for। यह भूतकाल के लिए भी आ सकता है और वर्तमान के लिए भी। ✔ But for your help, I would not have got any job. (भूतकाल) ✔ But for your help, I would be lost. (वर्तमान)
A word like otherwise / or can carry the condition; no if is needed.Otherwise / or जैसा शब्द शर्त को व्यक्त कर सकता है; if की आवश्यकता नहीं।
A clear if clause can be reduced: if necessary, if in doubt.स्पष्ट अर्थ वाला if उपवाक्य छोटा किया जा सकता है: if necessary, if in doubt।
A repeated clause is replaced by if so (positive) or if not (negative).दोहराए जा रहे उपवाक्य की जगह if so (सकारात्मक) या if not (नकारात्मक) लगता है।

Matching condition and result

Ask first: When is the condition? When is the result? Their times can differ.पहले पूछें: शर्त कब की है? परिणाम कब का है? दोनों के समय अलग हो सकते हैं।
Would like is a request, not an unreal result; the if clause stays real. ✔ If you have finished your book, I would like to borrow it.Would like निवेदन है, अवास्तविक परिणाम नहीं; if उपवाक्य वास्तविक रहता है। ✔ If you have finished your book, I would like to borrow it.
An unreal condition keeps its tense in reported speech; a real condition moves back.अप्रत्यक्ष कथन में अवास्तविक शर्त का काल नहीं बदलता; वास्तविक शर्त पीछे जाती है।
Unreal condition = unreal result; real condition = real result.अवास्तविक शर्त = अवास्तविक परिणाम; वास्तविक शर्त = वास्तविक परिणाम।

Provided, even if, supposing, whether

provided / providing / as long as / on condition that = only if. No will / would in their clause: provided you return it.provided / providing / as long as / on condition that = only if। इनके उपवाक्य में will / would नहीं: provided you return it।
Supposing / suppose / imagine: an unreal picture takes V2 (with would in the main clause); a real possibility takes the present.Supposing / suppose / imagine: अवास्तविक चित्र में V2 (और मुख्य उपवाक्य में would); वास्तविक संभावना में वर्तमान।
Even if takes the same forms as if (no will). Even though introduces a fact.Even if if जैसे ही रूप लेता है (will नहीं)। Even though तथ्य बताता है।
Whether ... or not (no matter whether) takes the present. Whether in an indirect question after tell / know / ask may take will.Whether ... or not (no matter whether) में वर्तमान आता है। Tell / know / ask के बाद अप्रत्यक्ष प्रश्न वाले whether के साथ will आ सकता है।

Time clauses

when / as soon as / before / after / until / by the time + present for a future meaning. will sits only in the main clause.when / as soon as / before / after / until / by the time + present भविष्य के अर्थ के लिए। will केवल मुख्य उपवाक्य में प्रयोग होता है।
By the time + present, will have + V3: By the time we reach the station, the train will have left.
A future main clause needs a present time clause: ✘ When I saw him, I will ask; ✔ When I see him, I will ask.भविष्य वाले मुख्य उपवाक्य के साथ वर्तमान time clause (समय उपवाक्य) चाहिए: ✘ When I saw him, I will ask; ✔ When I see him, I will ask।
In the past: main clause would, time clause V2. Never would inside the time clause.भूतकाल में: मुख्य उपवाक्य में would, time clause (समय उपवाक्य) में V2। Time clause के भीतर would कभी नहीं।

19. Non-Finite Verbs Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A non-finite verb does not change with the subject or the tense, and it works as a noun, an adjective or an adverb.Non-finite क्रिया कर्ता या काल के साथ नहीं बदलती, और संज्ञा, विशेषण या क्रिया-विशेषण का काम करती है।
The purpose infinitive answers why: to + V1, never for + V1 and never to + V-ing.उद्देश्य वाला Infinitive why का उत्तर देता है: to + V1, for + V1 या to + V-ing कभी नहीं।
Adjective + to + V1 (ready to, unable to, afraid to, advisable to); never a preposition in front of the infinitive.विशेषण + to + V1 (ready to, unable to, afraid to, advisable to); Infinitive के आगे Preposition कभी नहीं।
Negative infinitive: not to + V1 (decided not to go). To not and to never are split negatives; avoid them in the exam. A split infinitive is used only for clarity.निषेधात्मक Infinitive: not to + V1 (decided not to go)। to not और to never Split निषेध हैं, परीक्षा में इनसे बचिए। Split infinitive केवल स्पष्टता के लिए।
Bare infinitive after let, make, have, why, had better, would rather; help takes V1 or to + V1; in the passive of make / see / hear, to returns.Bare infinitive let, make, have, why, had better, would rather के बाद; help के बाद V1 या to + V1 दोनों चलते हैं; make / see / hear के Passive में to लौट आता है।
A gerund is always a noun. After a preposition only a gerund can stand.Gerund सदा संज्ञा है। Preposition के बाद केवल Gerund आ सकता है।
Before a gerund the formal choice is a possessive (my, his, their, Ram's); SSC keys it when an object pronoun (me, him, them) is also offered.Gerund से पहले औपचारिक चुनाव अधिकारसूचक शब्द है (my, his, their, Ram's); कर्म-कारक सर्वनाम (me, him, them) भी विकल्प में हो तो SSC में Possessive ही सही माना जाता है।
In look forward to, be used to, object to, due to the word to is a preposition, so the gerund follows.look forward to, be used to, object (कर्म) to, due to में to Preposition है, इसलिए Gerund आता है।
Infinitive looks ahead (hope, plan, decide, expect, want, tell); gerund goes with the action or looks back (enjoy, finish, deny, suggest, avoid).Infinitive आगे देखता है (hope, plan, decide, expect, want, tell); Gerund क्रिया के साथ चलता है या पीछे देखता है (enjoy, finish, deny, suggest, avoid)।
Forget, remember, regret, stop, try, go on: -ing looks back or means the same activity; to + V1 looks ahead or shows a purpose.Forget, remember, regret, stop, try, go on: -ing पीछे देखता है या वही गतिविधि है; to + V1 आगे देखता है या उद्देश्य दिखाता है।
Know / show need a wh-word before the infinitive: know how to swim, not know to swim.Know / show के Infinitive से पहले Wh-शब्द आवश्यक है: know how to swim, know to swim नहीं।
Present participle (-ing) goes with the doer (a boring movie); past participle (V3) goes with the receiver (a bored man).Present participle (वर्तमान कृदंत) (-ing) Doer के साथ (a boring movie); Past participle (V3) पाने वाले के साथ (a bored man)।
An opening participle needs its doer to be the subject of the main clause; otherwise it is dangling.आरंभ के Participle का Doer मुख्य उपवाक्य का कर्ता होना चाहिए; नहीं तो वह Dangling है।
Having + V3 for an earlier completed action; being + V3 for a passive action going on together; see / hear / watch + object takes a bare infinitive or *-ing*, never to.पहले पूरी हुई क्रिया के लिए having + V3; साथ-साथ चलती Passive क्रिया के लिए being + V3; see / hear / watch + कर्म के बाद Bare infinitive या *-ing*, to कभी नहीं।
A clause as the subject (That ... / What ... / Whether ... / How ...) is one idea, so the verb is singular. The fact that ... takes the verb of fact.कर्ता के रूप में उपवाक्य (That ... / What ... / Whether ... / How ...) एक विचार है, इसलिए क्रिया एकवचन। The fact that ... में क्रिया fact से मिलती है।
Two clauses joined by and take a plural verb; a plural noun inside the clause or after the verb does not change a singular verb.and से जुड़े दो उपवाक्यों के साथ बहुवचन क्रिया; उपवाक्य के भीतर या क्रिया के बाद की बहुवचन संज्ञा एकवचन क्रिया को नहीं बदलती।
A gerund or infinitive phrase as the subject takes a singular verb (Reading novels improves ...). Two gerunds joined by and take a plural verb; one gerund with two objects stays singular.कर्ता के रूप में Gerund या Infinitive वाक्यांश के साथ एकवचन क्रिया (Reading novels improves ...)। and से जुड़े दो Gerund के साथ बहुवचन क्रिया; एक Gerund के दो कर्म हों तो एकवचन।
To have + V3 shows an action finished before the main verb (is said to have gone). The passive form is to have been + V3, and in the active voice it becomes to have + V3.To have + V3 मुख्य क्रिया से पहले पूरा हुआ कार्य दिखाता है (is said to have gone)। Passive रूप to have been + V3 है, और कर्तृवाच्य में वह to have + V3 हो जाता है।
A wish or plan that failed: would like to have seen, meant to have called. Put the perfect in one place only, and after a modal always write have, never had.जो इच्छा या योजना पूरी नहीं हुई: would like to have seen, meant to have called। Perfect केवल एक स्थान पर रखिए, और Modal (रूपात्मक क्रिया) के बाद सदा have लिखिए, had कभी नहीं।

The big picture

A finite verb changes with the subject and the tense. A non-finite verb does not, and it works as a noun, an adjective or an adverb.Finite क्रिया कर्ता और काल के साथ बदलती है। Non-finite (अपरिमित) क्रिया नहीं बदलती, और संज्ञा, विशेषण या क्रिया-विशेषण का काम करती है।
Infinitive: noun, adjective or adverb. Gerund: always a noun. Participle: an adjective (sometimes an adverb).Infinitive: संज्ञा, विशेषण या क्रिया-विशेषण। Gerund: सदा संज्ञा। Participle: विशेषण (कभी-कभी क्रिया-विशेषण)।
A non-finite verb takes its own object and adverb, and it needs a doer somewhere in the sentence.Non-finite (अपरिमित) क्रिया का अपना कर्म और क्रिया-विशेषण आ सकता है, और वाक्य में कहीं एक Doer चाहिए।
Time logic: after the main verb ➜ to + V1; together or in progress ➜ V1+ing; finished earlier ➜ perfect form.समय का तर्क: मुख्य क्रिया के बाद ➜ to + V1; साथ-साथ या चलती हुई ➜ V1+ing; पहले पूरी ➜ Perfect रूप।

Infinitive: noun uses and purpose

An infinitive (to + V1) can be a subject, an object or a complement.Infinitive (to + V1) कर्ता, कर्म या पूरक बन सकता है।
The infinitive of purpose answers why: Subject + verb + to + V1. ✔ I went there to meet Radhika.उद्देश्य वाला Infinitive why का उत्तर देता है: Subject (कर्ता) + verb (क्रिया) + to + V1। ✔ I went there to meet Radhika.
After the infinitive to the verb is always V1: not V2, not V3, not -ing. (A preposition to is different: look forward to meeting; see the gerund concepts.) ✘ to sold, to made, to guardingInfinitive to के बाद क्रिया सदा V1 में: V2, V3 या -ing नहीं। (Preposition to अलग है: look forward to meeting; Gerund वाले Concepts देखिए।) ✘ to sold, to made, to guarding
for + V1 never shows purpose. An infinitive is never the object of a preposition.for + V1 कभी उद्देश्य नहीं दिखाता। Infinitive किसी Preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) का कर्म नहीं बनता।
The introductory it is preferred: It + be + adjective/noun + to + V1.प्रारंभिक it बेहतर माना जाता है: It + be + adjective (विशेषण)/noun (संज्ञा) + to + V1।

Infinitive after a noun or an adjective

Noun + to + V1 tells the purpose or use of the noun. ✔ I have a house to rent.Noun (संज्ञा) + to + V1 संज्ञा का उद्देश्य या उपयोग बताता है। ✔ I have a house to rent.
If the noun cannot be the object of the verb, the preposition stays: Noun + to + V1 + preposition. ✔ I need a house to live in.संज्ञा उस क्रिया का कर्म न बन सके तो Preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) लगती है: Noun (संज्ञा) + to + V1 + preposition। ✔ I need a house to live in.
Adjective + to + V1 (ready, eager, willing, afraid, unable, advisable, imperative).Adjective (विशेषण) + to + V1 (ready, eager, willing, afraid, unable, advisable, imperative)।
No preposition comes in front of the infinitive: ✘ imperative in understanding, ✘ ready leaving.Infinitive के आगे कोई Preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) नहीं: ✘ imperative (आज्ञार्थक) in understanding, ✘ ready leaving।

Forms, negative and split infinitive

Simple to + V1; continuous to be + V1+ing; perfect to have + V3; perfect continuous to have been + V1+ing.Simple to + V1; Continuous to be + V1+ing; Perfect to have + V3; Perfect Continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण) to have been + V1+ing।
Passive infinitive: to be + V3; perfect passive: to have been + V3. ✔ This work needs to be done.Passive Infinitive (कर्मवाच्य मूल क्रिया-रूप): to be + V3; Perfect Passive (पूर्ण कर्मवाच्य): to have been + V3। ✔ This work needs to be done.
Action finished before the main verb: perfect infinitive (to have + V3). ✔ She seems to have left.मुख्य क्रिया से पहले पूरी हुई क्रिया: Perfect Infinitive (पूर्ण मूल क्रिया-रूप) (to have + V3)। ✔ She seems to have left.
Negative: not + to + V1 (decided not to go). This is the neutral form and the one SSC keys. A split negative (to not go, to never touch) is found in good writing, but avoid it in exam answers. ✔ He decided not to reduce his expenses.निषेध: not + to + V1 (decided not to go)। यह सामान्य रूप है और SSC इसी को सही मानता है। Split निषेध (to not go, to never touch) अच्छे लेखन में भी मिल जाता है, पर परीक्षा के उत्तरों में इससे बचिए। ✔ He decided not to reduce his expenses.
Split infinitive is to + adverb + V1. Avoid it, and split only when the meaning is clearer.Split Infinitive है to + adverb (क्रियाविशेषण) + V1। इससे बचिए, और split तभी कीजिए जब अर्थ अधिक स्पष्ट हो।
If the verb is already written, repeat only to. ✔ I don't want to.क्रिया पहले लिखी हो तो केवल to दोहराओ। ✔ I don't want to.

Bare infinitive

let / bid / make / have + object + V1: no to. Help + object takes either V1 or to + V1 (help me do it, help me to do it). ✔ Let him go.let / bid / make / have + कर्म + V1: to नहीं। Help + कर्म के बाद V1 या to + V1 दोनों चलते हैं (help me do it, help me to do it)। ✔ Let him go.
The object after these verbs is in the object form: let her, make him.इन क्रियाओं के बाद कर्म, कर्म-रूप में आता है: let her, make him।
Why + V1; and after and / or / but / than / as / except the second infinitive has no to.Why + V1; और and / or / but / than / as / except के बाद दूसरे Infinitive में to नहीं।
Passive of make / see / hear / help: be + made / seen / heard / helped + to + V1. Let becomes allow.make / see / hear / help का Passive (कर्मवाच्य): be + made / seen / heard / helped + to + V1। Let की जगह allow।
had better + V1, would rather + V1. Negative: had better not.had better + V1, would rather + V1। निषेध: had better not।

Gerund: the verbal noun

A gerund (V1 + ing) always works as a noun: subject, object, complement or object of a preposition.Gerund (V1 + ing) सदा संज्ञा का काम करता है: कर्ता, कर्म, पूरक या Preposition का कर्म।
Preposition + gerund. Never a bare verb or an infinitive after a preposition. ✔ after killing, before starting, besides writingPreposition + gerund। Preposition के बाद Bare verb (मूल क्रिया) या Infinitive कभी नहीं। ✔ after killing, before starting, besides writing
the / this + gerund + of + noun: no direct object after it. ✔ the opening of the restaurantthe / this + gerund + of + noun: इसके बाद सीधा कर्म नहीं। ✔ the opening of the restaurant
Before a gerund the formal choice is the possessive (my, your, his, their, Ram's): Excuse my interrupting. An object pronoun is common in everyday English (Excuse me interrupting); in SSC exams choose the possessive when both are offered. Leave it out when the doer is already clear.Gerund से पहले औपचारिक चुनाव अधिकारसूचक शब्द (Possessive) है (my, your, his, their, Ram's): Excuse my interrupting। रोज़मर्रा की अंग्रेज़ी में कर्म-कारक सर्वनाम भी चलता है (Excuse me interrupting); SSC परीक्षा में दोनों दिए हों तो Possessive चुनिए। कर्ता पहले से स्पष्ट हो तो इसे छोड़ भी सकते हैं।
A gerund as a subject takes a singular verb. ✔ Reading leads to a habit.कर्ता के रूप में Gerund के साथ एकवचन क्रिया आती है। ✔ Reading leads to a habit.
Passive gerund being + V3; perfect having + V3; negative not + V1+ing.Passive (कर्मवाच्य) Gerund being + V3; Perfect having + V3; निषेध not + V1+ing।

Gerund in fixed phrases

In these phrases to is a preposition, so a gerund follows: look forward to, be used to, be accustomed to, object to, devoted to, addicted to, due to, owing to, with a view to, in addition to, prefer ... to.इन वाक्यांशों में to Preposition है, इसलिए Gerund आता है: look forward to, be used to, be accustomed to, object (कर्म) to, devoted to, addicted to, due to, owing to, with a view to, in addition to, prefer ... to।
worth / no use / no good / no point in + V1+ing. ✔ The book is worth reading.worth / no use / no good / no point in + V1+ing। ✔ The book is worth reading.
have difficulty / a hard time / fun + V1+ing (difficulty solving); difficulty in solving is also correct. Spend / waste time + V1+ing. The error is difficulty to solve or no point to call.have difficulty / a hard time / fun + V1+ing (difficulty solving); difficulty in solving भी सही है। Spend / waste time + V1+ing। त्रुटि तब है जब difficulty to solve या no point to call लिखा हो।
Go + V1+ing for activities: go walking, go shopping, go fishing.गतिविधियों के लिए Go + V1+ing: go walking, go shopping, go fishing।
need / require / deserve / merit / warrant + V1+ing has a passive meaning (= to be + V3).need / require / deserve / merit / warrant + V1+ing का अर्थ Passive होता है (= to be + V3)।

Time logic, and verbs that take an infinitive

As a rough guide: a future or intended action often takes to + V1; the same time or a completed action often takes V1 + ing. The verb decides first: each verb has its own pattern.मोटे तौर पर: भावी या इच्छित क्रिया प्रायः to + V1 लेती है; साथ-साथ चलने वाली या पूरी हो चुकी क्रिया प्रायः V1 + ing लेती है। पहले क्रिया स्वयं तय करती है: हर क्रिया का अपना ढाँचा होता है।
hope, plan, decide, promise, refuse, fail, manage, afford, agree, seem, pretend, threaten, offer, wish + to + V1
invite, request, urge, expect, force, compel, persuade, order, tell, remind, encourage + object + to + V1invite, request, urge, expect, force, compel, persuade, order, tell, remind, encourage + कर्म + to + V1
Never for + -ing or verb + -ing after these verbs. ✘ persuaded me for doing, ✘ hopes gettingइन क्रियाओं के बाद for + -ing या verb + -ing कभी नहीं। ✘ persuaded me for doing, ✘ hopes getting

Verbs that take a gerund

These verbs take a gerund: enjoy, suggest, avoid, finish, deny, admit, mind, consider, postpone, delay, practise, recall, miss, quit, risk, resist, imagine, appreciate, keep on, prevent.इन क्रियाओं के बाद Gerund आता है: enjoy, suggest, avoid, finish, deny, admit, mind, consider, postpone, delay, practise, recall, miss, quit, risk, resist, imagine, appreciate, keep on, prevent।
suggest + V1+ing, never to + V1.suggest + V1+ing, to + V1 कभी नहीं।
insist on + V1+ing; prevent / stop somebody from + V1+ing.insist on + V1+ing; prevent / stop somebody from + V1+ing।
cannot help + V1+ing; cannot help but + V1; cannot stand / bear + V1+ing.cannot help + V1+ing; cannot help but + V1; cannot stand / bear + V1+ing।
An earlier completed action: having + V3. ✔ He denied having stolen the money.पहले पूरी हुई क्रिया: having + V3। ✔ He denied having stolen the money.

Verbs that take both; know / show + wh-word

advise / allow / permit / forbid + object + to + V1; with no object: + V1+ing; passive: be advised + to + V1.advise / allow / permit / forbid + कर्म + to + V1; कर्म न हो: + V1+ing; Passive: be advised + to + V1।
like / love / prefer / hate / begin / start / continue take both. After would (would like / love / prefer / hate): only to + V1.like / love / prefer / hate / begin / start / continue दोनों लेती हैं। would के बाद (would like / love / prefer / hate): केवल to + V1।
No *-ing* after *-ing*: is beginning / starting + to + V1. With understand / realise / know: began to understand.*-ing* के बाद *-ing* नहीं: is beginning / starting + to + V1। understand / realise / know के साथ: began to understand।
stop / remember / forget / regret / go on / try + V1+ing looks back or means the same activity; + to + V1 looks ahead or means a purpose. Try doing means to experiment (it need not be a past event); try to do means to make an effort.stop / remember / forget / regret / go on / try + V1+ing पीछे देखता है या वही गतिविधि है; + to + V1 आगे देखता है या उद्देश्य दिखाता है। Try doing का अर्थ है आज़माकर देखना (यह बीती घटना होना आवश्यक नहीं); try to do का अर्थ है प्रयास करना।
help + object + to V1 / V1 / in + gerund / with + noun: all four are correct.help + कर्म + to V1 / V1 / in + gerund / with + संज्ञा: चारों सही हैं।
know / show + wh-word + to + V1. teach / learn / decide / ask / explain / forget / understand / tell + (wh-word) + to + V1.know / show + wh-word (प्रश्नवाचक शब्द) + to + V1। teach / learn / decide / ask / explain / forget / understand / tell + (wh-word) + to + V1।

Participle as an adjective

Present participle V1 + ing modifies the doer: a boring movie, a crying baby.Present participle (वर्तमान कृदंत) V1 + ing करने वाली संज्ञा की विशेषता बताता है: a boring movie, a crying baby।
Past participle V3 usually modifies the one that receives the action or feeling (a bored man, a broken chair). A few V3 forms from intransitive verbs describe a completed state of the doer (fallen leaves, a retired teacher, an escaped prisoner).Past participle (भूत कृदंत) V3 प्रायः उसकी विशेषता बताता है जो क्रिया या भाव को पाता है (a bored man, a broken chair)। अकर्मक क्रियाओं के कुछ V3 रूप कर्ता की पूरी हो चुकी स्थिति बताते हैं (fallen leaves, a retired teacher, an escaped prisoner)।
Test: a story that frightens = frightening; a boy who is frightened = frightened.जाँच: a story that frightens = frightening; a boy who is frightened = frightened।
After is / am / are (main verb) an adjective comes; after has / have / had V3 comes. ✔ The mango is rotten. ✔ The mango has rotted.is / am / are (मुख्य क्रिया) के बाद विशेषण आता है; has / have / had के बाद V3। ✔ The mango is rotten. ✔ The mango has rotted.

Participle replacing a relative clause

Active relative clause ➜ present participle: who helps ➜ helping.Active (कर्तृवाच्य) Relative clause (संबंधवाचक उपवाक्य) ➜ Present participle (वर्तमान कृदंत): who helps ➜ helping।
Passive relative clause ➜ past participle: which was written ➜ written.Passive Relative clause (संबंधवाचक उपवाक्य) ➜ Past participle (भूत कृदंत): which was written ➜ written।
Past, one-time, sudden action: keep the full clause (a lion that frightened me).भूतकाल की एक बार की, अचानक क्रिया: पूरा Clause (उपवाक्य) रखिए (a lion that frightened me)।
Intransitive verb: the past participle is rare as a reduced relative (the problem that arose, not the problem arisen), though some are fixed adjectives (fallen leaves).अकर्मक क्रिया: संक्षिप्त Relative clause के रूप में Past participle (भूत कृदंत) कम मिलता है (the problem that arose, the problem arisen नहीं), हालाँकि कुछ स्थायी Adjective (विशेषण) हैं (fallen leaves)।

Participle replacing an adverb clause; perfect and passive

Time, reason, contrast, result, manner or a second action: a participle phrase can replace the adverb clause.समय, कारण, विरोध, परिणाम, ढंग या दूसरी क्रिया: क्रिया-विशेषण उपवाक्य की जगह Participle वाक्यांश आ सकता है।
Same time: V1 + ing (Playing cricket, he injured his finger). Completed earlier: having + V3.साथ-साथ: V1 + ing (Playing cricket, he injured his finger)। पहले पूरा हो चुका: having + V3।
Passive and going on together: being + V3. Passive and completed earlier: having been + V3.Passive और साथ-साथ: being + V3। Passive और पहले पूरा: having been + V3।
In the perfect participle, having is followed by V3 (having taken), not having taking, not have taken. Having as an ordinary verb is a different thing: having a good time, having lunch.Perfect participle (पूर्ण कृदंत) में having के बाद V3 आता है (having taken), having taking नहीं, have taken नहीं। Having जब साधारण क्रिया हो तो बात अलग है: having a good time, having lunch।
Two finite verbs joined by and ➜ the second can become , V1+ing: roared ..., leaving behind ....and से जुड़ी दो Finite verb ➜ दूसरी , V1+ing बन सकती है: roared ..., leaving behind ...।

The doer of a participle

The doer of an opening participle is the subject of the main clause.आरंभ में आए Participle का Doer मुख्य उपवाक्य का कर्ता होता है।
If that subject cannot do the action, the participle is dangling. Change the main clause (often to the passive), or open the participle into a full clause.कर्ता वह कार्य नहीं कर सकता, तो Participle Dangling है। मुख्य उपवाक्य बदलिए (अक्सर Passive में), या Participle को पूरे उपवाक्य में खोलिए।
Own subject (absolute): noun / pronoun + participle. ✔ It being a rainy day, ...अपना कर्ता (Absolute): संज्ञा / सर्वनाम + participle। ✔ It being a rainy day, ...
Fixed participles need no doer: generally speaking, considering, supposing, taking ... into consideration, judging from.निश्चित Participle को Doer नहीं चाहिए: generally speaking, considering, supposing, taking ... into consideration, judging from।

Gerund or participle; find, catch, see, hear

Participle: the noun is the doer (who / which + verb). Gerund: the -ing names a purpose (for + V1+ing).Participle: संज्ञा Doer है (who / which + verb)। Gerund: -ing उद्देश्य बताता है (for + V1+ing)।
find / spot / discover / smell / catch / leave / keep + object + V1+ing. For a purpose: + to + V1. Find + object + to be also exists for an opinion: I found him to be reliable. Do not mark it wrong.find / spot / discover / smell / catch / leave / keep + कर्म + V1+ing। उद्देश्य हो तो: + to + V1। राय बताने के लिए find + कर्म + to be भी चलता है: I found him to be reliable। इसे गलत मत चिह्नित कीजिए।
see / watch / hear / feel / notice + object + V1 (complete action) or + V1+ing (in progress). Never to + V1 (unless it is a purpose, or the verb is in the passive).see / watch / hear / feel / notice + कर्म + V1 (पूरी क्रिया) या + V1+ing (चलती क्रिया)। to + V1 कभी नहीं (उद्देश्य हो या क्रिया Passive में हो तभी)।

Clause, gerund and infinitive as the subject

That / What / Whether / How / Why + clause at the start: one idea, singular verb (What he said is true).आरंभ में That / What / Whether / How / Why + उपवाक्य: एक विचार, एकवचन क्रिया (What he said is true)।
The fact that ...: the verb agrees with fact, so it is singular.The fact that ...: क्रिया fact से मिलती है, इसलिए एकवचन।
Two clauses with and are plural. A plural noun inside the clause or after the verb does not change the verb.and से जुड़े दो उपवाक्य बहुवचन हैं। उपवाक्य के भीतर या क्रिया के बाद की बहुवचन संज्ञा क्रिया को नहीं बदलती।
Gerund or infinitive phrase as subject: singular (Reading novels improves ..., To build these bridges takes ...).कर्ता के रूप में Gerund या Infinitive वाक्यांश: एकवचन (Reading novels improves ..., To build these bridges takes ...)।
Count gerunds: two gerunds + and = plural; one gerund + two objects = singular.Gerund गिनिए: दो Gerund + and = बहुवचन; एक Gerund + दो कर्म = एकवचन।

Perfect infinitive and the plan that did not happen

Earlier action after seem / appear / is said / is reported: to have + V3 (never V1 or V2).seem / appear / is said / is reported के बाद पहले हुआ कार्य: to have + V3 (V1 या V2 कभी नहीं)।
Voice: to have been + V3 becomes to have + V3; the main verb keeps its tense.वाच्य: to have been + V3 का to have + V3 होता है; मुख्य क्रिया का काल वही रहता है।
Failed plan or hope: meant / hoped / intended + to have + V3.पूरी न हुई योजना या आशा: meant / hoped / intended + to have + V3।
Wish about the past: would like to have seen or would have liked to see. Never both perfects.भूतकाल की इच्छा: would like to have seen या would have liked to see। दोनों Perfect कभी नहीं।
Modal + have + V3, never modal + had.Modal (रूपात्मक क्रिया) + have + V3, कभी modal + had नहीं।

Quick checklist

After a preposition: always a gerund (after killing, besides writing, pride in serving).Preposition के बाद: सदा Gerund (after killing, besides writing, pride in serving)।
Not / never stand before to: not to go, never to indulge.Not / never to से पहले आते हैं: not to go, never to indulge।
Opening participle: its doer is the subject of the main clause.आरंभ का Participle: उसका Doer मुख्य उपवाक्य का कर्ता होता है।
Doer of the noun ➜ V1+ing; receiver ➜ V3.संज्ञा करने वाली है ➜ V1+ing; पाने वाली है ➜ V3।
Mark the error only after you have tried to justify the sentence.वाक्य को सही ठहराने का प्रयास करने के बाद ही त्रुटि चुनिए।

17. Parallelism Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

Parallelism means the two sides of a joint have the same grammatical form.समानान्तरता का अर्थ है कि जोड़ की दोनों ओर का व्याकरणिक रूप एक-सा हो।
In a list, compare the word after and with the first item: noun with noun, gerund with gerund, adjective with adjective.सूची में and के बाद वाले शब्द को पहले पद से मिलाइए: संज्ञा के साथ संज्ञा, Gerund (क्रियावाचक संज्ञा) के साथ Gerund, विशेषण के साथ विशेषण।
Slow with quick, slowly with quickly. An adverb is not joined to an adjective.slow के साथ quick, slowly के साथ quickly। क्रियाविशेषण को विशेषण के साथ नहीं जोड़ते।
After a preposition every joined verb is a gerund: accused of accepting … and lying ….संबंधबोधक के बाद जुड़ी हुई सभी क्रियाएँ Gerund होती हैं: accused of accepting … and lying …।
A shared to may stand once for all verbs, but to + V1 is never mixed with V1 + ing.साझा to सब क्रियाओं के लिए एक बार आ सकता है, पर to + V1 को V1 + ing के साथ कभी नहीं मिलाते।
Not only to streamline … but also to address …: the same form after both halves.Not only to streamline … but also to address …: दोनों भागों के बाद एक-सा रूप।
A preposition belongs to both sides or to neither: surprised not only the staff but also the stakeholders.संबंधबोधक या तो दोनों ओर का होता है या किसी का नहीं: surprised not only the staff but also the stakeholders।
Neither goes with nor, either with or, both with and; never cross them.Neither के साथ nor, either के साथ or, both के साथ and; इन्हें कभी आपस में मत मिलाइए।
Place the first half just before its own item: penalise neither X nor Y, not neither penalise X nor Y.पहला भाग अपने पद से ठीक पहले रखिए: penalise neither X nor Y, neither penalise X nor Y नहीं।
Not by logic but by emotion: the little word is repeated on the second side.Not by logic but by emotion: छोटा शब्द दूसरी ओर दोहराया जाता है।
A noun phrase takes a noun phrase: not the length of the report but the fact that its data was wrong.संज्ञा-पदबंध के साथ संज्ञा-पदबंध: not the length of the report but the fact that its data was wrong।
Whether … or whether, never or if; partly to … partly to, never partly to … partly due to.Whether … or whether, or if कभी नहीं; partly to … partly to, partly to … partly due to कभी नहीं।
Prefer X to Y, never than; would rather + V1 + than + V1.Prefer X to Y, than कभी नहीं; would rather + V1 + than + V1।

The method

Find the joint (and, or, but, nor, than, a comma in a list, or a correlative pair). Mark the two sides. Compare the first word of each side.जोड़ ढूँढिए (and, or, but, nor, than, सूची का अल्पविराम, या सहसंबंधी जोड़ी)। दोनों ओर के भाग चिह्नित कीजिए। प्रत्येक भाग का पहला शब्द मिलाइए।
Same part of speech, same verb form, same little word. Noun with noun, V1 with V1, to + V1 with to + V1, gerund with gerund. ✔ Radhika likes reading, writing and swimming. ✘ Radhika likes reading, writing and to swim.एक-सा शब्द-भेद, एक-सा क्रिया-रूप, एक-सा छोटा शब्द। संज्ञा के साथ संज्ञा, V1 के साथ V1, to + V1 के साथ to + V1, Gerund (क्रियावाचक संज्ञा) के साथ Gerund। ✔ Radhika likes reading, writing and swimming. ✘ Radhika likes reading, writing and to swim.
In a list, jump to the word after and and compare it with the first item.सूची में सीधे and के बाद वाले शब्द पर जाइए और उसे पहले पद से मिलाइए।

Pairs and their partners

| First half | Partner | Example | |---|---|---| | not only | but also | not only to streamline but also to address | | either | or | either now or later | | neither | nor | neither accurate nor exhaustive | | both | and | both the piano and the violin | | not by / for / because | but by / for / because | not by logic but by emotion | | whether | or whether | whether he agrees or whether he refuses | | partly to | partly to | due partly to rain and partly to strikes | | prefer X | to Y | prefer walking to driving || पहला भाग | साथी | उदाहरण | |---|---|---| | not only | but also | not only to streamline but also to address | | either | or | either now or later | | neither | nor | neither accurate nor exhaustive | | both | and | both the piano and the violin | | not by / for / because | but by / for / because | not by logic but by emotion | | whether | or whether | whether he agrees or whether he refuses | | partly to | partly to | due partly to rain and partly to strikes | | prefer X | to Y | prefer walking to driving |
Never cross the pairs: neither … or, either … nor, both … as well as, prefer … than and or if after whether are all wrong.जोड़ियों को कभी आपस में मत मिलाइए: neither … or, either … nor, both … as well as, prefer … than और whether के बाद or if सब गलत हैं।

Place and little words

The first half of a pair stands just before the item it joins, so the words after the two halves match. ✔ The law aims to penalise neither small traders nor large firms. ✘ The law aims to neither penalise small traders nor large firms.जोड़ी का पहला भाग उस पद से ठीक पहले खड़ा होता है जिसे वह जोड़ता है, ताकि दोनों भागों के बाद के शब्द मेल खाएँ। ✔ The law aims to penalise neither small traders nor large firms. ✘ The law aims to neither penalise small traders nor large firms.
A little word on one side (by, for, to, because, of) is repeated on the other. ✔ not by logic but by emotion ✘ not by logic but emotionएक ओर का छोटा शब्द (by, for, to, because, of) दूसरी ओर दोहराया जाता है। ✔ not by logic but by emotion ✘ not by logic but emotion
A shared to may be written once for all verbs, or with every verb; it is never mixed with V1 + ing.साझा to सब क्रियाओं के लिए एक बार लिखा जा सकता है, या प्रत्येक क्रिया के साथ; V1 + ing के साथ कभी नहीं मिलाया जाता।

Noun phrase beside a clause

A noun phrase takes a noun phrase; a clause takes a clause. Bridge a clause with the fact that. ✔ not the length of the report but the fact that its data was wrong ✘ not the length of the report but that its data was wrongसंज्ञा-पदबंध के साथ संज्ञा-पदबंध; उपवाक्य के साथ उपवाक्य। उपवाक्य को the fact that से जोड़िए। ✔ not the length of the report but the fact that its data was wrong ✘ not the length of the report but that its data was wrong
After not only X or not merely X with a noun phrase X, a bare but also that … needs but also the fact that ….संज्ञा-पदबंध X वाले not only X या not merely X के बाद केवल but also that … आए, तो but also the fact that … चाहिए।

20. Voice (Active & Passive) Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

Voice shows whether the subject does the action (active) or receives it (passive).Voice (वाच्य) बताता है कि कर्ता क्रिया करता है (Active) या उसे पाता है (Passive)।
The passive is always be + V3; the be form copies the tense of the active verb.Passive हमेशा be + V3 होता है; be का रूप Active क्रिया का काल दोहराता है।
Make the object the subject (me→I, him→he), and put the old subject after by.कर्म को कर्ता बनाएँ (me→I, him→he), और पुराने कर्ता को by के बाद लिखें।
Continuous takes being, perfect takes been, perfect continuous takes been being; never being been.Continuous में being, Perfect में been, Perfect continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण) में been being; being been कभी नहीं।
No object, no passive: intransitive, linking, reflexive and reciprocal objects have none.No object, no passive: अकर्मक, संयोजक, स्ववाचक और परस्परवाचक कर्म का Passive नहीं बनता।
A verb with its preposition keeps it: laughed at, looked after. With know use known to.Preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) वाली क्रिया उसे साथ रखती है: laughed at, looked after। Know के साथ known to लगाएँ।
Two objects give two passives, and both are correct; with no opening word given, SSC keys usually take the direct object as subject.दो कर्मों के दो Passive बनते हैं और दोनों सही हैं; शुरुआती शब्द न दिया हो तो SSC की keys सामान्यतः Direct object (प्रत्यक्ष कर्म) को कर्ता बनाती हैं।
Infinitive: to be + V3, to have been + V3; *-ing*: being + V3.Infinitive: to be + V3, to have been + V3; *-ing*: being + V3।
Imperative with object: Let + object + be + V3; advice: should be + V3; request: requested.कर्म वाला आज्ञार्थक: Let + object + be + V3; सलाह: should be + V3; अनुरोध: requested।
In questions the question word stays first; did / does vanish; Who → By whom.प्रश्नों में प्रश्नवाचक शब्द पहले रहता है; did / does गायब; Who → By whom।
Drop by + doer for a general, obvious or unknown doer; keep it when it is the news.सामान्य, स्पष्ट या अज्ञात करने वाला हो तो by + doer हटाएँ; जब वही मुख्य सूचना हो तो रखें।
A clause as object starts with It: It is believed that...; or use is believed to.उपवाक्य कर्म हो तो Passive It से शुरू होता है: It is believed that...; या is believed to लगाएँ।
With two clauses, change the one(s) that can take a passive, and the main clause by default; an intransitive clause stays active.दो उपवाक्य हों तो जिनका Passive बन सकता है उन्हें बदलें, और निर्देश न हो तो मुख्य उपवाक्य को; अकर्मक उपवाक्य Active ही रहता है।
Nobody replaces not … by anybody; use only one negative (Nobody was helped). Make gets back its to: was made to go.Nobody, not … by anybody की जगह आता है; केवल एक निषेध रखें (Nobody was helped)। Make का to वापस आता है: was made to go।
In a passage question, convert each sentence on its own and keep its tense; then hunt slips: read option A fully and only the differences in B, C, D.अनुच्छेद वाले प्रश्न में हर वाक्य को अलग से बदलें और उसका काल रखें; फिर चूकें खोजें: विकल्प A पूरा पढ़ें और B, C, D में सिर्फ़ अंतर।
To have been + V3 in the passive is to have + V3 in the active; the main verb keeps its tense.Passive का to have been + V3 Active में to have + V3 है; मुख्य क्रिया का काल वही रहता है।
After a modal it is have, never had: should have been, must have been, ought to have been.Modal के बाद have आता है, had कभी नहीं: should have been, must have been, ought to have been।
Hates being questioned: the main verb stays, only the *-ing* word becomes being + V3.Hates being questioned: मुख्य क्रिया वैसी ही रहती है, सिर्फ़ *-ing* शब्द being + V3 बनता है।
Saw him carry becomes He was seen to carry: the to comes back in the passive.Saw him carry बनता है He was seen to carry: Passive में to वापस आता है।

Basics

Passive = be + V3. No form of be before V3 means the sentence is not passive.Passive = be + V3। V3 से पहले be का रूप नहीं है, तो वाक्य Passive नहीं है।
Three steps: object becomes subject, be takes the tense of the old verb, main verb goes to V3; the old subject follows by (or is dropped).तीन चरण: कर्म कर्ता बनता है, be पुरानी क्रिया का काल लेती है, मुख्य क्रिया V3 में जाती है; पुराना कर्ता by के बाद आता है (या हट जाता है)।
Pronouns: me→I, us→we, him→he, her→she, them→they. Helping verbs and adverbs stay in place.सर्वनाम: me→I, us→we, him→he, her→she, them→they। सहायक क्रियाएँ और क्रिया-विशेषण अपनी जगह रहते हैं।
No object, no passive.No object (कर्म), no passive।

Verb groups

Present is/am/are + V3; past was/were + V3; future will/shall + be + V3; modal modal + be + V3.Present is/am/are + V3; past was/were + V3; future (भविष्य) will/shall + be + V3; modal (रूपात्मक क्रिया) modal + be + V3।
Continuous: is/am/are/was/were + being + V3; will/shall + be + being + V3; modal + be + being + V3.Continuous: is/am/are/was/were + being + V3; will/shall + be + being + V3; modal (रूपात्मक क्रिया) + be + being + V3।
Perfect: has/have/had + been + V3; will/shall + have + been + V3; modal + have + been + V3.Perfect: has/have/had + been + V3; will/shall + have + been + V3; modal + have + been + V3।
Perfect continuous: has/have/had + been + being + V3; will/shall + have + been + being + V3. Order: been + being.Perfect continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण): has/have/had + been + being + V3; will/shall + have + been + being + V3। क्रम: been + being।
Do / does / did disappear; not follows the be form.Do / does / did हट जाते हैं; not, be के रूप के बाद आता है।

Verbs that need care

Intransitive and linking verbs (seem, appear, go, come, look): no passive.अकर्मक और संयोजक क्रियाएँ (seem, appear, go, come, look): Passive नहीं।
Reflexive or reciprocal object (themselves, each other): no passive.स्ववाचक या परस्परवाचक कर्म (themselves, each other): Passive नहीं।
Verb + preposition keeps the preposition: laughed at, looked after, operated on, relied on, heard of, written to.क्रिया + Preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) में Preposition साथ रहता है: laughed at, looked after, operated on, relied on, heard of, written to।
Fixed prepositions: known to; surprised, shocked, astonished, amazed, amused at; pleased, filled, satisfied with; interested, included in.निश्चित Prepositions (पूर्वसर्ग): known to; surprised, shocked, astonished, amazed, amused at; pleased, filled, satisfied with; interested, included in।
Two objects: direct object + V3 + to/for + indirect object (usual in SSC keys), or indirect object + V3 + direct object.दो कर्म: Direct object (प्रत्यक्ष कर्म) + V3 + to/for + Indirect object (अप्रत्यक्ष कर्म) (SSC keys में सामान्य), या Indirect object + V3 + Direct object।

Infinitives, -ing forms and clauses

to + V1 → to be + V3; to have + V3 → to have been + V3; continuous and perfect continuous infinitives are rare and awkward: rephrase.to + V1 → to be + V3; to have + V3 → to have been + V3; continuous और perfect continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण) Infinitive (मूल क्रिया-रूप) बहुत कम आते हैं और अटपटे हैं: वाक्य बदलकर लिखें।
has/have/had + to + V1 → has/have/had + to + be + V3; is going to + V1 → is going to be + V3; It is time for + noun + to be + V3.has/have/had + to + V1 → has/have/had + to + be + V3; is going to + V1 → is going to be + V3; It is time for + noun (संज्ञा) + to be + V3।
V1+ing → being + V3, when the main verb (like remember) cannot change.V1+ing → being + V3, जब मुख्य क्रिया (जैसे remember) न बदल सके।
Clause as object: It + be + V3 + that-clause; with think, believe, say: Subject + be + V3 + to + V1 / to have + V3.उपवाक्य कर्म हो: It + be + V3 + that-उपवाक्य; think, believe, say के साथ: Subject (कर्ता) + be + V3 + to + V1 / to have + V3।
Two verbs: by + doer goes with the verb it belongs to. Two clauses: change the clause(s) that can take a passive; if the question does not say which, the main clause is the default; intransitive clauses never change.दो क्रियाएँ: by + doer उसी क्रिया के साथ जिसकी वह है। दो उपवाक्य: जिनका Passive बन सकता है उन्हें बदलें; प्रश्न न बताए तो मुख्य उपवाक्य को बदलें; अकर्मक उपवाक्य कभी नहीं बदलता।
Adjectival phrase goes with its noun; adverbial phrase stays.Adjectival phrase (पदबंध) संज्ञा के साथ जाता है; adverbial phrase (क्रियाविशेषण पदबंध) अपनी जगह रहता है।

Sentence types

Conventional paraphrases: imperative, no object: You are ordered / requested / advised + to + V1. With object: Let + object + be + V3. Advice: object + should + be + V3.प्रचलित paraphrases: आज्ञार्थक, कर्म नहीं: You are ordered / requested / advised + to + V1। कर्म के साथ: Let + object (कर्म) + be + V3। सलाह: object + should + be + V3।
Negative imperative: Let + object + not + be + V3 or advised + not + to + V1; Don’t go → You are forbidden to go.निषेधात्मक आज्ञा: Let + object + not + be + V3 या advised + not + to + V1; Don’t go → You are forbidden to go।
Let him go → He should be allowed to go; Let’s + V1 → It is suggested that we should + V1. No to after Let.Let him go → He should be allowed to go; Let’s + V1 → It is suggested that we should + V1। Let के बाद to नहीं।
Optative: (May) + object + be + V3 + (by doer). Exclamatory: What a... / How + adverb stays in front.Optative (इच्छार्थक): (May) + object + be + V3 + (by doer)। Exclamatory (विस्मयबोधक): What a... / How + adverb (क्रियाविशेषण) आगे ही रहता है।
Yes/no question: helping verb + new subject + (be) + V3 + by...?. Wh-question: the question word stays first.Yes/no प्रश्न: सहायक क्रिया + नया कर्ता + (be) + V3 + by...?। Wh-प्रश्न: प्रश्नवाचक शब्द पहले ही रहता है।
Who → By whom + be + object + V3; Whom → Who + be + V3 + by + subject. In the active, By whom becomes Who (no did/does).Who → By whom + be + object + V3; Whom → Who + be + V3 + by + subject (कर्ता)। Active में By whom, Who बन जाता है (did/does नहीं)।

By + doer

Drop it when the doer is obvious, unknown, irrelevant, indefinite (someone) or general (people, we, they, you, one), and in legal or official style.इसे तब हटाएँ जब करने वाला स्पष्ट, अज्ञात, अप्रासंगिक, अनिश्चित (someone) या सामान्य (people, we, they, you, one) हो, और कानूनी या सरकारी शैली में।
Before by: complement, object, fixed phrase, adverb of manner. After by: place, time, purpose, reason and loosely attached phrases.by से पहले: पूरक, कर्म, निश्चित phrase (पदबंध), रीति का क्रिया-विशेषण। by के बाद: स्थान, समय, उद्देश्य, कारण और ढीले ढंग से जुड़े phrases।

Negatives and special verbs

Nobody / no one / none + verb + obj → obj + be + not + V3 + by anyone / any. Not... anybody → Nobody as subject. Do not use two negatives together.Nobody / no one / none + verb (क्रिया) + obj → obj + be + not + V3 + by anyone / any। Not... anybody → Nobody कर्ता में। दो निषेध एक साथ न लगाएँ।
Sense verbs as linking verbs have no true passive; the exam paraphrase is Subject + be + adjective + when + it + be + tasted / felt / smelt.इंद्रिय-क्रियाएँ जब linking हों तो असली Passive नहीं बनता; परीक्षा का paraphrase है Subject (कर्ता) + be + adjective (विशेषण) + when + it + be + tasted / felt / smelt।
Make + obj + V1 → obj + be made + to + V1; bid → be bidden to; get / have + obj1 + V1 + obj2 → get / have + obj2 + V3 + by obj1.Make + obj + V1 → obj + be made + to + V1; bid → be bidden to; get / have + obj1 + V1 + obj2 → get / have + obj2 + V3 + by obj1।
See / hear + obj + V-ing → obj + be seen / heard + V-ing.See / hear + obj + V-ing → obj + be seen / heard + V-ing।

Passages, perfect infinitives and special structures

Passage: convert each sentence on its own and keep its tense. Slip-hunting: read A fully, then only the differences in B, C, D.अनुच्छेद: हर वाक्य को अलग से बदलें और उसका काल रखें। Slip-hunting: A पूरा पढ़ें, फिर B, C, D में सिर्फ़ अंतर।
Perfect infinitive: to have been + V3 (passive) ↔ to have + V3 (active). The main verb keeps its tense.Perfect infinitive (पूर्ण मूल क्रिया-रूप): to have been + V3 (Passive) ↔ to have + V3 (Active)। मुख्य क्रिया का काल वही रहता है।
Modal perfect: modal + have + V3 (active), modal + have been + V3 (passive). Never had.Modal perfect (पूर्ण रूपात्मक क्रिया): modal + have + V3 (Active), modal + have been + V3 (Passive)। Had कभी नहीं।
would like to have + V3 or would have liked to + V1: not both.would like to have + V3 या would have liked to + V1: दोनों साथ नहीं।
Gerund passive being + V3 (hates being questioned); infinitive passive want + object + to be + V3.Gerund (क्रियावाचक संज्ञा) passive being + V3 (hates being questioned); Infinitive (मूल क्रिया-रूप) passive want + कर्म + to be + V3।
saw him carry → He was seen to carry. is going to demolish → is going to be demolished. Let-passive: Let + object + be + V3.saw him carry → He was seen to carry। is going to demolish → is going to be demolished। Let-passive: Let + कर्म + be + V3।

21. Narration (Direct & Indirect Speech) Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

The words inside the inverted commas are the reported speech; the part outside is the reporting verb part.उद्धरण-चिह्नों के अंदर के शब्द reported speech (अप्रत्यक्ष कथन) हैं; बाहर का हिस्सा reporting verb वाला भाग है।
Pronouns follow the SON concept: first person goes by the Subject, second by the Object, third does not change.सर्वनामों में SON तरकीब: First person (उत्तम पुरुष) कर्ता (Subject) के अनुसार, second person (मध्यम पुरुष) कर्म (Object) के अनुसार, third person (अन्य पुरुष) नहीं बदलता।
When the reporting verb is in the past, the verb in the quote goes one step back.Reporting verb भूतकाल में हो तो उद्धरण की क्रिया एक step पीछे जाती है।
Will, can, may, shall become would, could, might, should; must stays or becomes had to.Will, can, may, shall बनते हैं would, could, might, should; must वैसा रहता है या had to बनता है।
Near words turn far: now to then, today to that day, tomorrow to the next day, here to there.निकट के शब्द दूर के हो जाते हैं: now से then, today से that day, tomorrow से the next day, here से there।
A present or future reporting verb, a universal truth or a proverb changes nothing in the quote.Reporting verb वर्तमान या भविष्य में हो, या उद्धरण सार्वभौमिक सत्य / कहावत हो, तो कुछ नहीं बदलता।
Assertive: said / told + that; use told when a listener is named.Assertive (विधानवाचक): said / told + that; श्रोता का नाम हो तो told।
Interrogative: asked, then if / whether (or the same wh-word), and the order becomes subject + verb.प्रश्नवाचक: asked, फिर if / whether (या वही wh-शब्द), और क्रम बनता है कर्ता + क्रिया।
Exclamatory: exclaimed with joy / sorrow / surprise and the sentence is reported as a statement.विस्मयादिबोधक: exclaimed with joy / sorrow / surprise और वाक्य कथन की तरह report होता है।
Imperative: the reporting verb becomes ordered, requested, advised, forbade and the verb takes to + V1.आज्ञार्थक: reporting verb बनती है ordered, requested, advised, forbade और क्रिया में to + V1 लगता है।
Optative: wished / prayed, and the wish is reported with that + would / might.इच्छासूचक: wished / prayed, और इच्छा that + would / might से report होती है।
The vocative name is dropped from the quote and becomes the object of the reporting verb.संबोधन का नाम उद्धरण से हटकर reporting verb का कर्म बन जाता है।
Of two past actions, had + V3 goes on the earlier one only; the later one stays in the past indefinite.भूतकाल की दो क्रियाओं में had + V3 केवल पहली क्रिया पर लगता है; बाद वाली past indefinite (सामान्य भूत काल) में रहती है।
Indirect to direct is the reverse: bring back the inverted commas, the near words and the original tense.Indirect (अप्रत्यक्ष) से direct उल्टा काम है: उद्धरण-चिह्न, निकट के शब्द और मूल काल वापस लाओ।
In a mixed quote every sentence gets its own reporting verb: exclaimed that…, asked if… and requested to….मिले-जुले उद्धरण में हर वाक्य को अपनी Reporting verb मिलती है: exclaimed that…, asked if… and requested to…।
Read the context line first; it shows who is reporting, and whether here, today and this change.संदर्भ-पंक्ति सबसे पहले पढ़िए; वह बताती है कि रिपोर्ट कौन कर रहा है, और here, today, this बदलेंगे या नहीं।
Suggested that … should for Let's; never suggested me to go. Requested her to, never requested to her.Let's के लिए suggested that … should; suggested me to go कभी नहीं। Requested her to, requested to her कभी नहीं।
Negative advice or order is not to + V1: advised him not to skip, never to not skip.निषेधात्मक सलाह या आदेश not to + V1 है: advised him not to skip, to not skip कभी नहीं।

Pronouns

SON: 1st person follows the Subject of the reporting verb, 2nd person follows the Object, 3rd person has No change. SON is the exam shortcut. In real reporting, first ask who spoke, to whom, and who is reporting now. A third-person pronoun changes if it refers to the present reporter or listener (Ravi said to me, “He is late” becomes Ravi told me that I was late if he means the listener).SON: उत्तम पुरुष Reporting verb के Subject के अनुसार, मध्यम पुरुष Object के अनुसार बदलता है, और अन्य पुरुष में No change। SON परीक्षा का शॉर्टकट है। वास्तविक रिपोर्टिंग में पहले पूछिए कि किसने बोला, किससे बोला और अब रिपोर्ट कौन कर रहा है। अन्य पुरुष सर्वनाम तब बदलता है जब वह अभी के रिपोर्ट करने वाले या श्रोता के लिए आया हो (Ravi said to me, “He is late” में यदि he का अर्थ आप हैं, तो रिपोर्ट होगी Ravi told me that I was late)।
Only the pronouns inside the inverted commas change. The reporting part is left alone.केवल उद्धरण-चिह्नों के अंदर के सर्वनाम बदलते हैं। Reporting वाले भाग को छुआ नहीं जाता।
Change the person, keep the case: I → he, me → him, my → his, mine → his.पुरुष बदलिए, कारक वही रखिए: I → he, me → him, my → his, mine → his।
No object with the reporting verb: exam questions treat the listener as me only when a you in the quote has to be placed. If the sentence gives no listener, do not invent one unless an option forces it; Radhika said that she would help is a safe report.Reporting verb के साथ कर्म न हो तो: परीक्षा में श्रोता को me तभी माना जाता है जब उद्धरण के you को कोई स्थान देना हो। यदि वाक्य में श्रोता दिया ही नहीं है, तो विकल्प मजबूर न करे तब तक श्रोता न गढ़िए; Radhika said that she would help एक सुरक्षित रिपोर्ट है।
We for all human beings: no change. We with the listener: keep we (listener me), you (listener you) or they (both 3rd). We of the speaker's group only: follow the subject.सभी मनुष्यों वाला we: परिवर्तन नहीं। श्रोता शामिल हो तो we रहता है (श्रोता me), you बनता है (श्रोता you) या they बनता है (दोनों अन्य पुरुष)। केवल वक्ता के समूह वाला we: कर्ता के अनुसार।

Tense

The tense steps back only if the reporting verb is past.काल तभी पीछे जाता है जब Reporting verb भूतकाल में हो।
Present → past; past → past perfect. Present perfect → past perfect; continuous forms keep their -ing and step back.वर्तमान → भूत; भूत → Past perfect (पूर्ण भूत काल)। Present perfect (पूर्ण वर्तमान काल) → past perfect; continuous रूप अपना -ing रखकर पीछे जाते हैं।
will → would, can → could, may → might, shall → would (or should for permission).will → would, can → could, may → might, shall → would (अनुमति में should)।
Past perfect, past perfect continuous, would, could, should, might: no change.Past perfect (पूर्ण भूत काल), past perfect continuous (पूर्ण अपूर्ण भूत काल), would, could, should, might: कोई परिवर्तन नहीं।
Must of duty → had to. Must of guess → must.कर्तव्य वाला must → had to। अनुमान वाला must → must।

Time and place words

this → that, these → those, here → there, now → then, ago → before, yet → till then.this → that, these → those, here → there, now → then, ago → before, yet → till then।
today → that day, tonight → that night, yesterday → the previous day, tomorrow → the next day.today → that day, tonight → that night, yesterday → the previous day, tomorrow → the next day।
last week → the previous week; next week → the following week; this morning → that morning.last week → the previous week; next week → the following week; this morning → that morning।
Here usually becomes there. There stays there in exam frames; it can become here only if the reporter is now at that place.Here सामान्यतः there बनता है। परीक्षा के ढाँचों में there, there ही रहता है; वह here तभी बन सकता है जब रिपोर्ट करने वाला अब उसी स्थान पर हो।
Time and place words change when the reporting time or place differs from the original; in exam frames that means when the reporting verb is past. A same-day report can keep today (She said that she was busy today). Fixed dates (on Friday, in 1947, at 3 p.m.) stay.समय और स्थान के शब्द तब बदलते हैं जब रिपोर्ट का समय या स्थान मूल से अलग हो; परीक्षा के ढाँचों में इसका अर्थ है कि Reporting verb भूतकाल में हो। उसी दिन की रिपोर्ट में today रह सकता है (She said that she was busy today)। निश्चित तिथियाँ (on Friday, in 1947, at 3 p.m.) वैसी ही रहती हैं।

When nothing changes

Reporting verb in the present or future (says, will say, has said): no change in tense or time words. Pronouns still change.Reporting verb वर्तमान या भविष्य में (says, will say, has said): काल और समय-शब्दों में परिवर्तन नहीं। सर्वनाम फिर भी बदलते हैं।
Universal truth, habit, historical fact, proverb, idiom: tense stays even after said.सार्वभौमिक सत्य, आदत, ऐतिहासिक तथ्य, कहावत, मुहावरा: said के बाद भी काल वैसा ही रहता है।
The reporting verb never changes its tense, and me in told me never changes its pronoun.Reporting verb का काल कभी नहीं बदलता, और told me का me कभी सर्वनाम नहीं बदलता।
In the present or future case, says to still becomes tells.वर्तमान या भविष्य वाली स्थिति में भी says to बदलकर tells होता है।

Assertive sentences

said → said; said to + object → told + object. The conjunction is that.said → said; said to + object (कर्म) → told + object। संयोजक that लगता है।
Told always has an object and never takes to: told me, not told to me.Told के साथ हमेशा कर्म आता है और to कभी नहीं: told me, told to me नहीं।
Sir, Madam, Your Honour are dropped; write respectfully.Sir, Madam, Your Honour हट जाते हैं; respectfully लिखा जाता है।
A yes/no answer is reported as answered in the affirmative / negative (or positively / negatively).हाँ/ना का उत्तर answered in the affirmative (सकारात्मक) / negative (नकारात्मक) (या positively / negatively) लिखा जाता है।
No to: told, informed, requested, advised. With to: suggested to, proposed to, explained to, described to. Pleaded takes with (pleaded with the judge).to नहीं: told, informed, requested, advised. to के साथ: suggested to, proposed to, explained to, described to। Pleaded के साथ with आता है (pleaded with the judge)।

Interrogative sentences

Said (to) → asked. Question mark → full stop. The question becomes a statement with normal word order.Said (to) → asked। प्रश्न-चिह्न → पूर्ण विराम। प्रश्न सामान्य शब्द-क्रम वाला कथन बन जाता है।
Yes/no question → if / whether. With or → prefer whether (asked if she was coming or not is also accepted in speech).हाँ/ना प्रश्न → if / whether। or हो तो whether को वरीयता दो (asked if she was coming or not बोलचाल में भी चलता है)।
Wh-question → the same wh-word is the conjunction. Never add if, whether or that.Wh-प्रश्न → वही wh-शब्द संयोजक है। if, whether या that कभी नहीं जोड़ना।
do / does / did fall away. Where do you live? → where I lived.do / does / did हट जाते हैं। Where do you live? → where I lived।
A wh-subject has no did: Who broke…? → who had broken…Wh-कर्ता के साथ did नहीं होता: Who broke…? → who had broken…

Exclamatory sentences

Drop the interjection and the (!). Said → exclaimed (with + feeling). Conjunction that.विस्मयादिबोधक शब्द और (!) हटाइए। Said → exclaimed (with + भावना)। संयोजक that।
Alas → sorrow; Hurrah → joy; Bravo → appreciation; Wow → wonder; Oh → surprise (sense decides); Fie → contempt.Alas → sorrow; Hurrah → joy; Bravo → appreciation; Wow → wonder; Oh → surprise (अर्थ से); Fie → contempt।
In SSC exams prefer: how and what are dropped; add very or great where needed.SSC परीक्षाओं में वरीयता दीजिए: how और what हटाए जाते हैं; आवश्यकता हो तो very या great जोड़िए।
Where in an exclamation → nowhere or not… anywhere.विस्मयादिबोधक वाक्य का where → nowhere या not… anywhere।
A sentence that ends in a full stop is not exclamatory, even with an emotion word.जो वाक्य पूर्ण विराम पर समाप्त हो वह भावना वाला शब्द होने पर भी विस्मयादिबोधक नहीं है।

Imperative sentences and Let

Reporting verb from the sense: requested, ordered, advised, forbade, warned, suggested, invited. No conjunction. Ordered that he should leave is also possible, but ordered him to leave is the SSC form.Reporting verb भाव से: requested, ordered, advised, forbade, warned, suggested, invited। संयोजक नहीं। Ordered that he should leave भी संभव है, परंतु SSC का रूप ordered him to leave है।
Reported part starts with to + V1. Negative: not to + V1 (not before to).Reported भाग to + V1 से शुरू होता है। निषेध: not to + V1 (not, to से पहले)।
Forbade and prohibited never take not.Forbade और prohibited के साथ not कभी नहीं आता।
Please is dropped; the request is shown by requested. Don't forget to… → reminded… to…Please हट जाता है; अनुरोध requested से दिखता है। Don't forget to… → reminded… to…
Let us / Let's → suggested that… should. Suggest never takes to + V1. Let me (permission) → requested that… might be allowed to.Let us / Let's → suggested that… should। Suggest के साथ to + V1 कभी नहीं। Let me (अनुमति) → requested that… might be allowed to।

Optative sentences

Prayer, wish, curse: said → prayed / wished / blessed / cursed. Conjunction that.प्रार्थना, इच्छा, श्राप: said → prayed / wished / blessed / cursed। संयोजक that।
May → might. Long live the king! → prayed that the king might live long.May → might। Long live the king! → prayed that the king might live long।
If only… and O that… → wished that… with the past form kept.If only… और O that… → wished that…, भूतकालिक रूप वैसा ही रहता है।
Hello, Hi, Good morning → greeted. Bye, Good night → bade. Happy Birthday, Merry Christmas → wished.Hello, Hi, Good morning → greeted। Bye, Good night → bade। Happy Birthday, Merry Christmas → wished।
A wish plus a statement in one quote: report the wish with wished, then the statement with said that.एक उद्धरण में इच्छा और कथन: इच्छा को wished से, फिर कथन को said that से बताइए।

The vocative

A noun of address (vocative) becomes the object of the reporting verb.सम्बोधन वाली संज्ञा Reporting verb का कर्म बन जाती है।
Children, drink milk. → tells the children to drink milk. Children drink milk. → says that children drink milk.Children, drink milk। → tells the children to drink milk। Children drink milk। → says that children drink milk।
Test: remove the noun. If what is left still stands alone, it was a vocative.जाँच: संज्ञा हटाइए। जो बचे वह अपने आप में पूरा हो, तो वह सम्बोधन था।
Sir, Madam, Your Honour are dropped.Sir, Madam, Your Honour हट जाते हैं।

Two past actions and conditionals

Both actions at the same time: no change in the quote. One action earlier: the earlier one takes had + V3, the later one stays in the past.दोनों क्रियाएँ एक साथ: उद्धरण में कोई परिवर्तन नहीं। एक क्रिया पहले: पहली में had + V3, बाद वाली भूतकाल में ही रहती है।
Had + V3 belongs only to the earlier action. Never to the later one. Check this only if the order is clear from the sentence.Had + V3 केवल पहली क्रिया का है। बाद वाली का कभी नहीं। यह तभी देखिए जब वाक्य से क्रम स्पष्ट हो।
Exam heuristic when options compete: 1. change neither clause, 2. change only the main clause, 3. change both. This is a ranking of SSC keys, not a grammar law; the real test is chronology: only the earlier action gets had + V3.विकल्पों में टक्कर हो तो परीक्षा की कसौटी: 1. कोई उपवाक्य नहीं बदलिए, 2. केवल मुख्य उपवाक्य, 3. दोनों। यह SSC की keys का क्रम है, व्याकरण की अनिवार्यता नहीं; असली कसौटी घटनाओं का क्रम है: had + V3 केवल पहली क्रिया को मिलता है।
Zero, second and third conditionals: no change. First conditional: if + present → past, will → would. With should in the if-clause: no change.Zero, second और third conditional (तृतीय शर्तवाचक): कोई परिवर्तन नहीं। First conditional (प्रथम शर्तवाचक): if + present → past, will → would। If-वाले उपवाक्य में should हो तो परिवर्तन नहीं।
Inverted conditionals (Had / Were / Should) keep their form. A real condition is not turned into an unreal one.उलटे क्रम वाले Conditionals (Had / Were / Should) अपना रूप रखते हैं। वास्तविक शर्त को अवास्तविक नहीं बनाया जाता।

Indirect to direct

Go back step by step: reporting verb (told → said to), pronouns (he → I, listener → you), tense forward, time words back (then → now).चरण दर चरण वापस चलिए: Reporting verb (told → said to), सर्वनाम (he → I, श्रोता → you), काल आगे, समय-शब्द वापस (then → now)।
Usually: past perfect without a time word → present perfect. With a finished time word → past indefinite.सामान्यतः: समय-शब्द के बिना Past perfect (पूर्ण भूत काल) → Present perfect (पूर्ण वर्तमान काल)। बीते समय-शब्द के साथ → Past indefinite (सामान्य भूत काल)।
would → will, could → can, had to → must, was V1+ing → is / am / are V1+ing.would → will, could → can, had to → must, was V1+ing → is / am / are V1+ing।
Present or future reporting verb, universal truth, second and third conditionals, must: nothing to undo.वर्तमान या भविष्य वाला Reporting verb, सार्वभौमिक सत्य, Second व third conditionals (तृतीय शर्तवाचक), must: वापस करने को कुछ नहीं।
Asked if / whether → the question form with a question mark. Requested / told to → the imperative. Exclaimed with joy → the interjection returns.Asked if / whether → प्रश्न रूप और प्रश्न-चिह्न। Requested / told to → आज्ञार्थक रूप। Exclaimed with joy → विस्मयादिबोधक शब्द वापस आता है।

Mixed quotes and reporting-verb structures

Mixed quote: split it, name each sentence, give each its own reporting verb, join with commas and and; changes apply to every sentence.मिला-जुला उद्धरण: उसे बाँटिए, हर वाक्य का प्रकार पहचानिए, हर एक को अपनी Reporting verb दीजिए, अल्पविराम और and से जोड़िए; बदलाव हर वाक्य में लगते हैं।
Request / order / advice: verb + object + to + V1; negative not to + V1. Never to not.निवेदन / आदेश / सलाह: क्रिया + कर्म + to + V1; निषेध not to + V1। To not कभी नहीं।
Let's…: suggested that + subject + should + V1. No object with to after suggested.Let's…: suggested that + कर्ता + should + V1। Suggested के बाद कर्म और to नहीं।
Exclamation: exclaimed (with sorrow / joy) that + statement. Question: asked + if / wh-word + subject + verb.विस्मयादिबोधक: exclaimed (with sorrow / joy) that + कथन। प्रश्न: asked + if / wh-word (प्रश्नवाचक शब्द) + कर्ता + क्रिया।
A context line (narrator not present, reported on a later day) decides pronouns and words like here, today and this.संदर्भ-पंक्ति (narrator not present, reported on a later day) सर्वनामों और here, today, this जैसे शब्दों का फ़ैसला करती है।

22. Reading Comprehension Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

Question first, then passage. Recognise the type of the question before you read.पहले प्रश्न, फिर गद्यांश। पढ़ने से पहले प्रश्न का प्रकार पहचानिए।
Fact questions need scanning; title, theme, tone and inference need skimming.तथ्य प्रश्नों को स्कैनिंग चाहिए; शीर्षक, विषयवस्तु, लहजा और अनुमान को स्किमिंग।
Read all four options first. The option that looks right at first sight is the favourite trap.पहले चारों विकल्प पढ़िए। जो विकल्प पहली नज़र में सही लगे, वही सबसे प्रिय जाल है।
One word spoils the whole option. Look for it before you mark.एक शब्द पूरे विकल्प को बिगाड़ देता है। चिह्नित करने से पहले उसे ढूँढिए।
Extreme words (all, never, always, only, completely, must) are the first suspects.कड़े शब्द (all, never, always, only, completely, must) सबसे पहले संदेह के घेरे में आते हैं।
An option that is true in life but not in the passage is wrong. Mark only what the passage proves.जो विकल्प वास्तविक जीवन में सही है पर गद्यांश में नहीं, वह गलत है। केवल वही चिह्नित कीजिए जो गद्यांश सिद्ध करे।
For NOT questions, tick three options in the passage; the one left is the answer.NOT प्रश्नों में तीन विकल्पों को टिक कीजिए; जो बचे वही उत्तर है।
An example is proof, not the subject. A title never comes from data, names or examples.उदाहरण प्रमाण होता है, विषय नहीं। शीर्षक कभी आँकड़ों, नामों या उदाहरणों से नहीं बनता।
Title and main idea: does the option cover the whole passage? Too narrow or too broad is wrong.शीर्षक और मुख्य विचार: क्या विकल्प पूरे गद्यांश को ढकता है? बहुत संकीर्ण या बहुत व्यापक गलत है।
Tone is the author's attitude, not the topic. The last line weighs most, and the author's word choice confirms it.लहजा लेखक का दृष्टिकोण है, विषय नहीं। अंतिम पंक्ति का वज़न सबसे अधिक होता है, और लेखक के चुने शब्द उसकी पुष्टि करते हैं।
Inference is a short step, not a long jump. Choose the option the passage supports at the strength it states.अनुमान छोटा कदम है, लंबी छलाँग नहीं। वह विकल्प चुनिए जिसका गद्यांश उतनी ही ताक़त से समर्थन करता है जितनी ताक़त से वह कहता है।
Vocabulary in context: cover the word, put an easy word in its place, and never choose by sound.संदर्भ में शब्दार्थ: शब्द को ढकिए, उसकी जगह आसान शब्द रखिए, और ध्वनि से कभी मत चुनिए।
A paradox always holds two opposing things. A single idea is never a paradox.विरोधाभास में हमेशा दो विपरीत चीज़ें होती हैं। कोई अकेला विचार कभी विरोधाभास नहीं होता।
Do not read the passage five times. If one question holds you for more than two or three minutes, mark it and move on.गद्यांश को पाँच बार मत पढ़िए। अगर कोई प्रश्न दो-तीन मिनट से अधिक रोके, तो उसे चिह्नित करके आगे बढ़िए।

The method

Order: type of question, then reading, then all options, then elimination, then verify.क्रम: प्रश्न का प्रकार, फिर पढ़ना, फिर सारे विकल्प, फिर निरसन, फिर जाँच।
Fact: scanning. Implied (title, theme, tone, inference): skimming.तथ्य: स्कैनिंग। परोक्ष (शीर्षक, विषयवस्तु, लहजा, अनुमान): स्किमिंग।
SETU: Skim, Extract, Target, Uncover.SETU: Skim, Extract, Target, Uncover।
Trust nothing, verify everything. Mark only what the passage proves.भरोसा मत कीजिए, जाँचिए। केवल वही चिह्नित कीजिए जो गद्यांश सिद्ध करे।
Stuck for more than two or three minutes? Mark the question and move on.दो-तीन मिनट से अधिक अटके हैं? प्रश्न को चिह्नित कीजिए और आगे बढ़िए।

Reading

Skimming: first paragraph (3 to 4 lines) and last lines. Short passage: first line, second if needed, and the last line.स्किमिंग: पहला अनुच्छेद (3 से 4 पंक्तियाँ) और अंतिम पंक्तियाँ। छोटा गद्यांश: पहली पंक्ति, आवश्यक हो तो दूसरी, और अंतिम पंक्ति।
Scanning: keywords first, then look for proper nouns, numbers, hyphens, quotes, brackets, abbreviations.स्कैनिंग: पहले मुख्य शब्द, फिर ढूँढिए व्यक्तिवाचक संज्ञाएँ, संख्याएँ, हाइफ़न, उद्धरण-चिह्न, कोष्ठक, संक्षिप्त रूप।
Read in phrases; a comma never shows contradiction; a colon explains; a dash gives the meaning of the word before it.शब्द-समूहों में पढ़िए; अल्पविराम कभी विरोध नहीं दिखाता; कोलन समझाता है; डैश अपने पहले वाले शब्द का अर्थ देता है।
Ignore tough words, extra details and figures until a question asks about them.कठिन शब्द, अतिरिक्त विवरण और आँकड़े छोड़ दो, जब तक प्रश्न उनके बारे में न पूछे।

Elimination checks

Cross out extreme words: all, never, always, only, completely, must, totally (in general passages).कड़े शब्द काटिए: all, never, always, only, completely, must, totally (सामान्य गद्यांशों में)।
Cross out options that are true in life but not in the passage.वे विकल्प काटिए जो वास्तविक जीवन में सही हैं पर गद्यांश में नहीं।
Check the cause-effect reversal and the opposite view (watch however, but, critics argue).कारण-परिणाम का उलटना और विपरीत मत जाँचिए (however, but, critics argue पर नज़र रखिए)।
A change in the weight of one word (cannot / may not, significant / minor) spoils the whole option.एक शब्द का वज़न बदलना (cannot / may not, significant / minor) पूरे विकल्प को बिगाड़ देता है।
When both benefits and problems are in the passage, a one-sided option is usually wrong.जब गद्यांश में लाभ और समस्याएँ दोनों हों, तो एकपक्षीय विकल्प आमतौर पर गलत होता है।

Question types

Fact: keyword, then a few lines around it (usually one or two on each side). NOT / EXCEPT: tick three, the odd one is the answer.तथ्य: मुख्य शब्द, फिर उसके आसपास कुछ पंक्तियाँ (आमतौर पर दोनों ओर एक या दो)। NOT / EXCEPT: तीन को टिक कीजिए, बचा हुआ उत्तर है।
Why mentioned: an example is proof, not the subject.क्यों उल्लेख किया: उदाहरण प्रमाण है, विषय नहीं।
Title, theme, main idea: first and last lines, then check the body; the option must cover the whole passage, not too narrow, not too broad.शीर्षक, विषयवस्तु, मुख्य विचार: पहली और अंतिम पंक्तियाँ, फिर बीच का भाग जाँचिए; विकल्प को पूरा गद्यांश ढकना चाहिए, न बहुत संकीर्ण, न बहुत व्यापक।
Purpose is a verb; the author's suggestion is usually in the last lines, but check the body.उद्देश्य एक क्रिया है; लेखक का सुझाव आमतौर पर अंतिम पंक्तियों में होता है, पर बीच का भाग भी जाँचिए।
Tone is the author's attitude, not the topic. Last line first, then adjectives and verbs.लहजा लेखक का दृष्टिकोण है, विषय नहीं। पहले अंतिम पंक्ति, फिर विशेषण और क्रियाएँ।
Inference is a short step, not a long jump. Modest words are safer; extreme words need the passage's own support.अनुमान छोटा कदम है, लंबी छलाँग नहीं। नरम शब्द अधिक सुरक्षित हैं; कड़े शब्दों को गद्यांश का अपना समर्थन चाहिए।
Vocabulary: cover the word, put an easy word in its place. Never choose by sound.शब्दार्थ: शब्द को ढकिए, उसकी जगह आसान शब्द रखिए। ध्वनि से कभी मत चुनिए।
Paradox needs two opposing things in one option.विरोधाभास के लिए एक विकल्प में दो विपरीत चीज़ें चाहिए।
Grammar in a passage: use the concept, but on the sentence in front of you.गद्यांश में व्याकरण: अवधारणा लगाइए, पर अपने सामने वाले वाक्य पर।

24. Sentence Rearrangement (PQRS) Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

PQRS is solved by links, not by feelings. Ask of every pair: which sentence comes after which, and why?PQRS कड़ियों से हल होता है, अनुभूति से नहीं। हर जोड़ी से पूछिए: कौन सा वाक्य किसके बाद, और क्यों?
The order of work: scan, opening sentence, closing sentence, pairs, then think beyond grammar.काम का क्रम: स्कैन, आरंभिक वाक्य, समापन वाक्य, जोड़ियाँ, फिर व्याकरण से आगे सोचिए।
The opener brings something new: a full name, a / an + noun, a definition or a time-topic phrase.आरंभिक वाक्य कुछ नया लाता है: पूरा नाम, a / an + संज्ञा, परिभाषा या समय-विषय वाला शब्द-समूह।
A connector, an example word or a result word very rarely opens a paragraph. He, she, it, this and these seldom do.संयोजक, उदाहरण-सूचक शब्द या परिणाम-सूचक शब्द अनुच्छेद को बहुत कम खोलते हैं। He, she, it, this और these भी कम ही खोलते हैं।
Noun first, pronoun later. The common chain is a + noun, it, the + noun; the reverse is unlikely.संज्ञा पहले, सर्वनाम बाद में। सामान्य शृंखला है a + noun (संज्ञा), it, the + noun; उलटा असंभावित है।
A strong pair usually stands side by side. An option that puts a sentence between them, or reverses them, is very likely wrong.प्रबल जोड़ी प्रायः साथ-साथ आती है। जो विकल्प उनके बीच कुछ रखे या उन्हें उलटा करे, वह लगभग निश्चित रूप से गलत है।
This / these + noun comes after the sentence it refers to, and full form comes before short form.This / these + संज्ञा अपने संदर्भ वाले वाक्य के बाद आती है, और पूरा रूप छोटे रूप से पहले।
Mark each sentence + or –. The sentence before however / but / yet has the opposite sign.हर वाक्य पर + या – लगाइए। however / but / yet के पहले वाले वाक्य का चिह्न उलटा होता है।
Cause usually before result. A sentence with as a result, therefore, consequently needs its cause earlier, normally right before it.कारण प्रायः परिणाम से पहले। as a result, therefore, consequently वाले वाक्य को अपना कारण पहले चाहिए, सामान्यतः ठीक पहले।
The old before the new. First, initially and at first come early; then, soon and later come in the middle; finally and eventually come last.पुरानी बात पहले। First, initially, at first आरंभ में; then, soon, later मध्य में; finally, eventually अंत में।
Wide before narrow: broad idea, definition, example. An example sentence does not come first.व्यापक पहले, संकीर्ण बाद में: व्यापक विचार, परिभाषा, उदाहरण। उदाहरण वाला वाक्य पहला नहीं आता।
The closing sentence completes the passage: a summary, a result, advice with should / must, or a way forward.समापन वाक्य गद्यांश को पूर्ण करता है: सार, परिणाम, should / must वाली सलाह, या आगे का रास्ता।
Eliminate, do not build. Throw out every option that breaks the opener, the closer or a pair, then read the survivor.काटते चलिए, बनाइए मत। जो विकल्प आरंभिक वाक्य, समापन वाक्य या कोई जोड़ी तोड़े उसे हटाइए, फिर बचे हुए को पढ़िए।
In a sentence jumble, check the ends first: a part ending in an article, a transitive verb without its object or a conjunction cannot normally be last; check a preposition or to against the whole sentence.वाक्य-जुड़ाव (Sentence jumble) में सिरे पहले जाँचिए: उपपद, कर्म के बिना सकर्मक क्रिया या समुच्चयबोधक पर समाप्त होने वाला भाग सामान्यतः अंतिम नहीं हो सकता; संबंधबोधक या to को पूरे वाक्य के साथ परखिए।
Name first, pointer after. The sentence that names a thing comes before the sentence that points back to it with this, these, such, that.पहले नाम, फिर इशारा। जो वाक्य किसी वस्तु का नाम लेता है वह उस वाक्य से पहले आता है जो this, these, such, that से उसकी ओर इशारा करता है।
When the first-placed letter is the same in all four options, that place is settled. Work on the other three.जब चारों विकल्पों में पहली जगह वाला अक्षर एक ही हो, तो वह जगह तय है। बाकी तीन पर काम कीजिए।

The method

Order: scan, opener, closer, pairs, beyond grammar.क्रम: स्कैन, आरंभिक वाक्य, समापन वाक्य, जोड़ियाँ, व्याकरण से आगे।
Eliminate, do not build. Strike off every option that breaks a link.काटते चलिए, बनाइए मत। जो विकल्प कोई कड़ी तोड़े उसे काट दें।
Fallback: mark + / –, then the essence of each sentence. Never translate word by word.वैकल्पिक रास्ता: + / – लगाइए, फिर हर वाक्य का सार। शब्द-दर-शब्द अनुवाद कभी नहीं।
When two options remain, find the tightest pair that differs between them.दो विकल्प बचें तो वह सबसे कसी जोड़ी ढूँढिए जो उनमें अलग है।

Opening sentence

Can open: full name, a / an + noun, definition, time-topic phrase, noun with explanation, story opener.शुरू कर सकते हैं: पूरा नाम, a / an + संज्ञा, परिभाषा, समय-विषय वाला शब्द-समूह, स्पष्टीकरण वाली संज्ञा, कहानी का आरंभ।
In a self-contained exam paragraph, seldom first: he, she, it, they, this, these. Very rarely first: connectors, example words, comparatives, result words.अपने-आप में पूर्ण परीक्षा-अनुच्छेद में प्रायः पहले नहीं: he, she, it, they, this, these। बहुत कम पहले: संयोजक, उदाहरण-सूचक शब्द, तुलनावाचक शब्द, परिणाम-सूचक शब्द।
Full form before short form. A noun in one sentence and only its short form in another: the full noun first.पूरा रूप छोटे रूप से पहले। एक वाक्य में संज्ञा और दूसरे में केवल उसका छोटा रूप: पूरी संज्ञा पहले।

Closing sentence

The closer completes the passage: no new name, no new issue, nothing left open.समापन वाक्य गद्यांश को पूर्ण करता है: कोई नया नाम नहीं, कोई नया मुद्दा नहीं, कुछ खुला नहीं।
Very likely last: therefore, hence, overall, in conclusion and should / must / need to advice.अंत की सबसे अधिक संभावना: therefore, hence, overall, in conclusion और should / must / need to वाली सलाह।
Seldom last: a question, a new name, a new issue, an example. Each can occasionally close a paragraph, so prefer the order in which the other clues also fit.अंत में कम ही: प्रश्न, नया नाम, नया मुद्दा, उदाहरण। हर एक कभी-कभी अनुच्छेद समाप्त भी कर सकता है, इसलिए वह क्रम चुनिए जिसमें बाकी संकेत भी संगत हों।

Pairs and pronouns

Noun first, pronoun later. The common chain is a + noun → it → the + noun; the reverse is unlikely.संज्ञा पहले, सर्वनाम बाद में। सामान्य शृंखला है a + noun (संज्ञा) → it → the + noun; उलटा असंभावित है।
This / these + noun comes after its reference, usually right after it.This / these + संज्ञा अपने संदर्भ के बाद आती है, प्रायः ठीक बाद।
Indefinite before definite, but only for the same noun.अनिश्चित पहले, निश्चित बाद में, पर केवल उसी संज्ञा के लिए।
A strong pair usually stands side by side. An option that splits it is very likely wrong; test the complete order before you reject it.प्रबल जोड़ी प्रायः साथ-साथ होती है। जो विकल्प उसे अलग करे वह लगभग निश्चित रूप से गलत है; अस्वीकार करने से पहले पूरा क्रम परखिए।

Connectors and polarity

Mark every sentence + or –. The sentence before however / but / yet has the opposite sign.हर वाक्य पर + या – लगाइए। however / but / yet के पहले वाले वाक्य का उलटा चिह्न होता है।
A common order: positive points, then however with the negative one, so the however sentence is often third after two positives. The contrast can run the other way, so decide by content.एक सामान्य क्रम: सकारात्मक बिंदु, फिर नकारात्मक के साथ however, इसलिए दो सकारात्मक के बाद however वाला वाक्य प्रायः तीसरा होता है। विरोध उलटा भी चल सकता है, इसलिए विषय-वस्तु से तय कीजिए।
Therefore, as a result, consequently: the cause comes just before. Positive result, positive cause.Therefore, as a result, consequently: कारण ठीक पहले। सकारात्मक परिणाम के लिए सकारात्मक कारण।
For example, such as, a prime example do not open a paragraph, because the broad idea has to come first.For example, such as, a prime example अनुच्छेद नहीं खोलते, क्योंकि व्यापक विचार पहले आना चाहिए।

Time, cause and logic

The old before the new. First / initially early, then / next / soon middle, finally / eventually last.पुरानी बात पहले। First / initially आरंभ में, then / next / soon मध्य में, finally / eventually अंत में।
Having + V3, once, after show that one action is earlier than another; use the two actions to set the order. Place, then there. Time, then then. Years usually run forward.Having + V3, once, after दिखाते हैं कि एक क्रिया दूसरी से पहले हुई; दोनों क्रियाओं से क्रम तय कीजिए। स्थान, फिर there। समय, फिर then। वर्ष प्रायः आगे की ओर चलते हैं।
Wide before narrow: broad idea → definition → types → examples. Research chain: idea → source → process → output → impact → way forward.व्यापक पहले, संकीर्ण बाद में: व्यापक विचार → परिभाषा → प्रकार → उदाहरण। शोध-शृंखला: विचार → स्रोत → प्रक्रिया → परिणाम → प्रभाव → आगे का रास्ता।
Whole, part, remaining: many / all → some → others. Problem, cause, effect, fix. Question before answer.पूरा, हिस्सा, बाकी: many / all → some → others। समस्या, कारण, प्रभाव, उपाय। प्रश्न उत्तर से पहले।
Fact before opinion. Unfortunately / it is unfortunate that marks an opinion. Positive points usually come before negative ones.तथ्य राय से पहले। Unfortunately / it is unfortunate that राय का चिह्न है। सकारात्मक बातें आम तौर पर नकारात्मक से पहले।

Sentence jumble (parts)

Cannot normally start: and, but, or, so, who / which / that (as a relative), a main verb (except an order), an adjective with no noun, however / hence.सामान्यतः शुरू नहीं कर सकते: and, but, or, so, who / which / that (संबंधवाचक के रूप में), मुख्य क्रिया (आदेश को छोड़कर), संज्ञा के बिना विशेषण, however / hence।
Cannot normally end: article, determiner, adjective before a noun, transitive verb without its object, conjunction. A preposition can end a sentence when its object has moved (Who did you speak to?), and to by ellipsis (I do not want to).सामान्यतः समाप्त नहीं कर सकते: उपपद, निर्धारक, संज्ञा के पहले का विशेषण, कर्म के बिना सकर्मक क्रिया, समुच्चयबोधक। संबंधबोधक वाक्य समाप्त कर सकता है जब उसका कर्म आगे चला गया हो (Who did you speak to?), और to लोप से (I do not want to)।
End of one part, start of the next: preposition → object, article → noun, to / modal → V1, has / have / had → V3.एक भाग का अंत, अगले का आरंभ: संबंधबोधक → कर्म, उपपद → संज्ञा, to / सहायक क्रिया → V1, has / have / had → V3।
Fixed pairs: not only ... but also, either ... or, neither ... nor, no sooner ... than, hardly ... when. After so, too, how, as the adjective comes before the article (so honest a man); after quite, such the article comes first (such a good book).निश्चित जोड़े: not only ... but also, either ... or, neither ... nor, no sooner ... than, hardly ... when। so, too, how, as के बाद विशेषण, उपपद से पहले आता है (so honest a man); quite, such के बाद उपपद पहले आता है (such a good book)।

Fixed first sentence + A–D

Look at the options first. If the first-placed letter is the same in all four, that place is settled; the real decision is about the other three.पहले विकल्प देखिए। यदि चारों में पहली जगह वाला अक्षर एक ही है, तो वह जगह तय है; असली निर्णय बाकी तीन जगहों का है।
Name first, pointer after: the sentence that names a thing comes before the sentence that points back to it.पहले नाम, फिर इशारा: जो वाक्य किसी वस्तु का नाम लेता है वह उस वाक्य से पहले आता है जो उसकी ओर इशारा करता है।
Three pointers: this / these / such / that + noun, however / yet / instead, and time markers (Later, Today, By the end of…).तीन इशारे: this / these / such / that + संज्ञा, however / yet / instead, और समय-सूचक शब्द (Later, Today, By the end of…)।
The fixed first sentence is part of the chain: whatever it leaves open (a pronoun, a question, a promise) is answered by the sentence placed next.निश्चित पहला वाक्य भी कड़ी का हिस्सा है: वह जो कुछ खुला छोड़ता है (सर्वनाम, प्रश्न, वचन), उसे अगला वाक्य पूरा करता है।

25. Cleft Sentences Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A cleft sentence splits one sentence in two to stress one part.Cleft वाक्य एक वाक्य को दो भागों में बाँटकर एक भाग पर ज़ोर देता है।
It + is / was + stressed part + that / who + rest.It + is / was + ज़ोर वाला भाग + that / who + शेष।
Place or time stressed: that, not where / when.स्थान या समय पर ज़ोर: that, where / when नहीं।
Delete test: remove It was and that; a complete sentence remains.हटाकर जाँच: It was और that हटाएँ; पूरा वाक्य बचता है।
The city where … is a relative clause, and where is correct there.The city where … सापेक्ष उपवाक्य है, और वहाँ where सही है।
Person doing the action: who / that. Thing: that.क्रिया करने वाला व्यक्ति: who / that। वस्तु: that।
The dummy It takes only is / was, never It were.कृत्रिम It के साथ केवल is / was, It were कभी नहीं।
The verb after who / that agrees with the stressed noun.who / that के बाद की क्रिया ज़ोर वाली संज्ञा से मेल खाती है।
It is I who am; It is he who has; It is you who have.It is I who am; It is he who has; It is you who have।
It was not until … that; It is because of … that: never when / why.It was not until … that; It is because of … that: when / why कभी नहीं।
What + clause is one idea: singular is / was, even before a plural complement (the exam-key line).What + उपवाक्य एक विचार है: बहुवचन पूरक से पहले भी एकवचन is / was (परीक्षा की answer keys यही मानती हैं)।
All I want is …: all = the only thing. All the students were is a different pattern.All I want is …: all = the only thing। All the students were अलग ढाँचा है।
In a long cleft, check the frame first, then every verb in the later parts.लंबे cleft में पहले ढाँचा जाँचें, फिर बाद वाले भागों की हर क्रिया।

The It-cleft frame

It + is / was + stressed part + that / who + rest of the sentence. ✔ It was Ravi who broke the window.It + is / was + ज़ोर वाला भाग + that / who + शेष वाक्य। ✔ It was Ravi who broke the window.
Subject, object, place or time can be stressed. ✔ It was in the library that Ravi broke the window.कर्ता, कर्म, स्थान या समय पर ज़ोर दिया जा सकता है। ✔ It was in the library that Ravi broke the window.
Delete test: remove It was and that; a complete sentence must remain.हटाकर जाँच: It was और that हटाएँ; पूरा वाक्य बचना चाहिए।
A noun before where (the city where) is a relative clause, not a cleft.where से पहले संज्ञा (the city where) हो तो वह सापेक्ष उपवाक्य है, cleft नहीं।

Joining word

Place, time or reason stressed: that, never where / when / why. ✘ It was in 1947 when India became independent. ✔ It was in 1947 that India became independent.स्थान, समय या कारण पर ज़ोर: that, where / when / why कभी नहीं। ✘ It was in 1947 when India became independent. ✔ It was in 1947 that India became independent.
Person doing the action: who / that. Thing: that.क्रिया करने वाला व्यक्ति: who / that। वस्तु: that।
It was not until … that, It was only after / when … that, It is because (of) … that. ✔ It was not until midnight that the results were declared.It was not until … that, It was only after / when … that, It is because (of) … that। ✔ It was not until midnight that the results were declared.

Verb agreement in an It-cleft

After the dummy It: only is / was. Never It are / It were.कृत्रिम It के बाद: केवल is / was। It are / It were कभी नहीं।
After who / that: the verb agrees with the stressed noun. ✔ It is the students who are responsible.who / that के बाद: क्रिया ज़ोर वाली संज्ञा से मेल खाती है। ✔ It is the students who are responsible.
Pronoun stressed: subject form, and the verb copies it. ✔ It is I who am responsible. ✔ It is he who has done this.सर्वनाम पर ज़ोर: कर्ता-रूप, और क्रिया उसकी नक़ल करती है। ✔ It is I who am responsible. ✔ It is he who has done this.
Long stressed piece: agree with its head noun. ✔ It is the uncertainty of how the council intends to proceed that seems …लंबा ज़ोर वाला भाग: उसकी मुख्य संज्ञा से मेल कीजिए। ✔ It is the uncertainty of how the council intends to proceed that seems …

What-cleft and All-cleft

What + clause + is / was + stressed part: the *What*-clause is one idea, so the verb is singular. ✔ What I need is a long holiday.What + उपवाक्य + is / was + ज़ोर वाला भाग: *What*-उपवाक्य एक विचार है, इसलिए क्रिया एकवचन। ✔ What I need is a long holiday.
CGL 2025: ✘ What the committee failed to deliberate on were not … ✔ *… was not …*
Reversed: the verb agrees with the stressed piece in front. ✔ A long holiday is what I need. ✔ Honest friends are what we need.उलटा रूप: क्रिया सामने वाले ज़ोर वाले भाग से मेल खाती है। ✔ A long holiday is what I need. ✔ Honest friends are what we need.
All + clause + is / was: all = the only thing. ✘ All I want are some peace and quiet. ✔ All I want is some peace and quiet.All + उपवाक्य + is / was: all = the only thing। ✘ All I want are some peace and quiet. ✔ All I want is some peace and quiet.
All + plural noun is different: ✔ All the students were present.All + बहुवचन संज्ञा अलग है: ✔ All the students were present.

Long cleft sentences

Step 1: check the frame. Step 2: check every verb and pair in the rest.चरण 1: ढाँचा जाँचिए। चरण 2: शेष भाग की हर क्रिया और जोड़ी जाँचिए।
Fail to + V1; underlie → underlay; a purpose that adds.Fail to + V1; underlie → underlay; a purpose that adds।

26. Ellipsis Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

Ellipsis is leaving out words the reader can supply without effort.Ellipsis का अर्थ है वे शब्द छोड़ना जिन्हें पाठक बिना प्रयास के जोड़ सकता है।
A dropped word must be the same word in the same form.छोड़ा गया शब्द वही शब्द, उसी रूप में होना चाहिए।
has + V3 but will + V1: write both, as in has never lied and will never lie.has + V3 पर will + V1: दोनों लिखें, जैसे has never lied and will never lie।
has not been and can never be: both been and be are written.has not been and can never be: been और be दोनों लिखे जाते हैं।
If the subject changes from plural to singular, write was again.कर्ता बहुवचन से एकवचन हो जाए, तो was दोबारा लिखिए।
So / neither / nor + helping verb + subject: and so do I, nor does she smile.So / neither / nor + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता: and so do I, nor does she smile।
After than / as, bring the clause back to pick the pronoun: than I did, never than me did.than / as के बाद उपवाक्य वापस रखकर सर्वनाम चुनें: than I did, than me did कभी नहीं।
Compare like with like: than that of (singular), than those of (plural), yours / hers.समान वस्तुओं की तुलना: than that of (एकवचन), than those of (बहुवचन), yours / hers।
as tall as, if not taller than: the second as stays; never as … than.as tall as, if not taller than: दूसरा as रहता है; as … than कभी नहीं।
When the verb after to is dropped, to stays: was not allowed to, I have to.to के बाद की क्रिया छूटे, तो to रहता है: was not allowed to, I have to।
if possible, when ready, though honest are elliptical adverb clauses; the joining word gives the kind.if possible, when ready, though honest elliptical adverb clauses (क्रियाविशेषण उपवाक्य) हैं; जोड़ने वाला शब्द उनका प्रकार बताता है।
The hidden subject is the main subject: While in Delhi, I lost my purse.छिपा कर्ता मुख्य कर्ता है: While in Delhi, I lost my purse।
If possible, if necessary, if so, if not are fixed phrases with the general it; they suit any main clause.If possible, if necessary, if so, if not सामान्य it वाले निश्चित पद हैं; ये किसी भी मुख्य उपवाक्य के साथ चलते हैं।

The master test

A dropped word must be the same word, in exactly the same form, as the one that has already appeared.छोड़ा गया शब्द वही होना चाहिए जो पहले आ चुका है, ठीक उसी रूप में।
Put the dropped word back in the gap. If it does not fit, write it out.छोड़ा हुआ शब्द रिक्त स्थान में वापस रखिए। उपयुक्त न हो, तो उसे लिख दीजिए।

Verbs

Different helpers, different forms: ✘ has never and will never lie ✔ has never lied and will never lie.अलग सहायक, अलग रूप: ✘ has never and will never lie ✔ has never lied and will never lie.
has not been and can never be: been and be are both written.has not been and can never be: been और be दोनों लिखे जाते हैं।
Number changes, write the verb again: ✔ The chairs were broken and the table was repaired.वचन बदले तो क्रिया दोबारा लिखें: ✔ The chairs were broken and the table was repaired.
So / neither / nor + helping verb + subject: ✔ and so do I; ✔ nor does she smile.So / neither / nor + सहायक क्रिया + कर्ता: ✔ and so do I; ✔ nor does she smile.
Dropped verb after to, but to stays: ✔ was not allowed to; ✔ I have to; ✔ he used to. Modals never take to.to के बाद क्रिया छोड़ी, पर to रहता है: ✔ was not allowed to; ✔ I have to; ✔ he used to। Modal (रूपात्मक क्रिया) के साथ to कभी नहीं।

Comparisons

Bring back the clause after than / as: ✔ taller than I (am); ✔ better than I do; ✘ than me did.than / as के बाद का उपवाक्य वापस रखें: ✔ taller than I (am); ✔ better than I do; ✘ than me did.
Meaning chooses: ✔ more than he (likes you); ✔ more than (I like) him.अर्थ तय करता है: ✔ more than he (likes you); ✔ more than (I like) him.
Compare like with like: ✔ the climate of Delhi … than that of Shimla; ✔ the people of Japan … than those of America; ✔ smaller than yours.समान वस्तुओं की तुलना: ✔ the climate of Delhi … than that of Shimla; ✔ the people of Japan … than those of America; ✔ smaller than yours.
as tall as, if not taller than, his father: the second as is never dropped. Never as … than.as tall as, if not taller than, his father: दूसरा as कभी नहीं हटता। as … than कभी नहीं।

Short (elliptical) clauses

Joining word + hidden subject + be = elliptical (reduced) adverb clause.जोड़ने वाला शब्द + छिपा कर्ता + be = elliptical (reduced) adverb clause (क्रियाविशेषण उपवाक्य)।
if possible / if necessary = condition; when ready / while in Delhi = time; though honest = concession; as expected / than usual = manner / comparison.if possible / if necessary = शर्त; when ready / while in Delhi = समय; though honest = विरोध; as expected / than usual = रीति / तुलना।
The hidden subject is the main clause's subject: ✔ While in Delhi, I lost my purse. ✘ While in Delhi, my purse was stolen.छिपा कर्ता मुख्य उपवाक्य का कर्ता है: ✔ While in Delhi, I lost my purse. ✘ While in Delhi, my purse was stolen.
Fixed phrases (if possible, if necessary, if so, if not) have the general it as subject and are free.निश्चित पद (if possible, if necessary, if so, if not) का कर्ता सामान्य it है और इन पर शर्त नहीं।

22. Unusual Structures Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

An absolute phrase has its own subject: there being no bus service, it being a holiday.निरपेक्ष वाक्यांश का अपना कर्ता होता है: there being no bus service, it being a holiday।
Their being is wrong when the meaning is existence; use there being.विद्यमानता का अर्थ हो तो their being गलत है; there being लगाइए।
Lest is already negative: use lest you should fall, never lest you should not or lest you will.Lest पहले से निषेधात्मक है: lest you should fall लिखिए, lest you should not या lest you will कभी नहीं।
After had better and would rather use the plain verb with no to.Had better और would rather के बाद बिना to की सादी क्रिया लगाइए।
With a new subject after would rather, the verb is V2: I would rather you went.Would rather के बाद नया कर्ता हो, तो क्रिया V2 होती है: I would rather you went।
The more … the more has one comparative in each part; the more harder is wrong.The more … the more के प्रत्येक भाग में एक Comparative (तुलनात्मक) होता है; the more harder गलत है।
One of takes a plural noun and a singular verb; one of those who takes a plural verb.One of के साथ बहुवचन संज्ञा और एकवचन क्रिया; one of those who के साथ बहुवचन क्रिया।
Enough comes after the adjective (tall enough); too takes the adjective directly (no much).Enough विशेषण के बाद आता है (tall enough); too सीधे विशेषण लेता है (much नहीं)।
Used to takes V1; be used to, look forward to and accustomed to take V-ing.Used to के साथ V1; be used to, look forward to और accustomed to के साथ V-ing।
Hardly already means almost not; for effort use hard.Hardly का अर्थ पहले से लगभग नहीं है; परिश्रम के लिए hard लगाइए।
Not so … as: the partner is as, not like or that.Not so … as: साथी as है, like या that नहीं।
Senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior and prefer take to, never than.Senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior और prefer के साथ to आता है, than कभी नहीं।
It is high time is followed by the past form: It is high time you went home.It is high time के बाद भूतकालिक रूप आता है: It is high time you went home।

Patterns and their one check

There being (existence); never their being. It being for time and weather.There being (विद्यमानता); their being कभी नहीं। समय और मौसम के लिए It being।
Lest + subject + should + V1; no not, will, may.Lest + कर्ता + should + V1; not, will, may नहीं।
Had better / would rather + V1; with a new subject would rather you went.Had better / would rather + V1; नए कर्ता के साथ would rather you went।
The more … the more: one comparative each side; verbs agree with their subjects.The more … the more: प्रत्येक ओर एक Comparative (तुलनात्मक); क्रियाएँ अपने कर्ताओं से मेल खाती हैं।
One of + plural noun + singular verb; one of those who + plural verb.One of + बहुवचन संज्ञा + एकवचन क्रिया; one of those who + बहुवचन क्रिया।
Adjective + enough; too + adjective + to (no much); so … that; such + noun.Adjective (विशेषण) + enough; too + adjective + to (much नहीं); so … that; such + संज्ञा।

More patterns

Used to + V1; be / get used to + V-ing; look forward to + V-ing.Used to + V1; be / get used to + V-ing; look forward to + V-ing।
Hardly / scarcely take no second negative; effort is hard; time pattern is hardly … when.Hardly / scarcely के साथ दूसरा निषेध नहीं; परिश्रम hard है; समय-प्रतिरूप hardly … when।
Not so / not as … as; not such … as.Not so / not as … as; not such … as।
Senior / junior / superior / inferior / prior + to; prefer X to Y.Senior / junior / superior / inferior / prior + to; prefer X to Y।
Need not + V1 (modal); needs to + V1 (ordinary verb, singular subject).Need not + V1 (Modal); needs to + V1 (साधारण क्रिया, एकवचन कर्ता)।
It is high time + subject + V2.It is high time + कर्ता + V2।

Quick table of fixes

their being → there being; lest … not → lest … should; had better to → had better; more harder → harder.their being → there being; lest … not → lest … should; had better to → had better; more harder → harder।
one of the channel → channels; enough tall → tall enough; too much clear → very clear; look forward to meet → meeting.one of the channel → channels; enough tall → tall enough; too much clear → very clear; look forward to meet → meeting।
work hardly → work hard; not so … like → as; senior than → senior to; prefer … than → to; you must go → you went.work hardly → work hard; not so … like → as; senior than → senior to; prefer … than → to; you must go → you went।

99. Superfluous & Wrong Expressions Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A superfluous expression repeats an idea; a wrong expression is not English. Look for the wrong one first, then the superfluous one.Superfluous अभिव्यक्ति कोई विचार दोहराती है; wrong अभिव्यक्ति अंग्रेज़ी है ही नहीं। पहले गलत ढूँढिए, फिर अनावश्यक।
Verbs with re- already hold ‘back’ or ‘again’: return, revert, repeat, rebuild take no back / again.re- वाली क्रियाओं में ‘back’ या ‘again’ पहले से है: return, revert, repeat, rebuild के साथ back / again नहीं।
flee, approach, exceed already mean run away, come near, go beyond: no away / near / more than.flee, approach, exceed का अर्थ पहले से run away, come near, go beyond है: away / near / more than नहीं।
A word that holds its own idea needs no helper: twins, fact, conclusion, consensus, spouse, agreement.जिस शब्द में अपना विचार पहले से है, उसे सहायक नहीं चाहिए: twins, fact, conclusion, consensus, spouse, agreement (सामंजस्य)।
Noun + noun is superfluous (a coward man, cousin sister); adjective + noun is fine (a cowardly man).संज्ञा + संज्ञा अनावश्यक है (a coward man, cousin sister); विशेषण + संज्ञा ठीक है (a cowardly man)।
angry mob, mutual friend, common friend, bad dream are correct. Do not over-correct.angry mob, mutual friend, common friend, bad dream सही हैं। अति-सुधार न कीजिए।
9 am or 9 o'clock in the morning, never both; during the war, not during the period of war.9 am या 9 o'clock in the morning, दोनों नहीं; during the war, during the period of war नहीं।
last, next, this, every + time word take no on / in / at; say this morning, tonight, last night.last, next, this, every + समय-सूचक शब्द के साथ on / in / at नहीं; this morning, tonight, last night कहिए।
more or most never go with a comparative or a superlative: ✘ more better, ✘ most best. relatively goes with the positive: relatively cold.more या most comparative (तुलनात्मक) या superlative (उत्तमावस्था) के साथ कभी नहीं जाते: ✘ more better, ✘ most best। relatively सामान्य रूप के साथ जाता है: relatively cold।
unique, perfect, universal, supreme, senior, junior, superior take no very / more / most.unique, perfect, universal, supreme, senior, junior, superior के साथ very / more / most नहीं।
senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior and prefer take to, never than; different takes from.senior, junior, superior, inferior, prior और prefer के साथ to आता है, than कभी नहीं; different के साथ from आता है।
hardly, scarcely, barely, seldom, rarely take any / anything / anybody, not no / nothing / nobody. Hardly is not hard.hardly, scarcely, barely, seldom, rarely के साथ any / anything / anybody आता है, no / nothing / nobody नहीं। Hardly का अर्थ hard नहीं है।
discuss, investigate, await, comprise, resemble, reach take the object directly; propose to, compare with, married to need the preposition; despite, never despite of.discuss, investigate, await, comprise, resemble, reach का कर्म सीधे आता है; propose to, compare with, married to को पूर्वसर्ग चाहिए; despite, despite of कभी नहीं।
Idioms come as one block: tooth and nail, body and soul, bag and baggage, rain cats and dogs. fond of, addicted to, made of / from.मुहावरे एक खंड में आते हैं: tooth and nail, body and soul, bag and baggage, rain cats and dogs। fond of, addicted to, made of / from।

The A to Z list: 9 to C

| ✘ Wrong / superfluous | ✔ Right | |---|---| | 7 pm in the evening | 7 pm / 7 o'clock in the evening | | 9 am in the morning | 9 am / 9 o'clock in the morning | | a coward man | a coward / a cowardly man | | a scissors / a scissor | a pair of scissors | | accompany with | accompany | | addicted of / addicted in | addicted to | | all day since / all day for | all day | | all night since / all night for | all night | | all what | all that | | although ... but | although ... / ... but | | ambiguous and vague | ambiguous / vague | | an English teacher (who teaches English) | a teacher of English | | an other | another | | approach near | approach | | await for | await | | back side | back | | bag and baggage with | bag and baggage | | because ... so | because ... / ... so | | blunder and mistake | blunder / mistake | | both ... as well as | both ... and | | but ... on the contrary | but / on the contrary | | can be able to | can / be able to | | come across with | come across | | compare off | compare with | | comprises of | comprises / consists of | | consensus opinion | consensus | | cope up with | cope with | | could be able to | could / was able to | | cousin sister / cousin brother | cousin / female cousin / male cousin || ✘ गलत / अनावश्यक | ✔ सही | |---|---| | 7 pm in the evening | 7 pm / 7 o'clock in the evening | | 9 am in the morning | 9 am / 9 o'clock in the morning | | a coward man | a coward / a cowardly man | | a scissors / a scissor | a pair of scissors | | accompany with | accompany | | addicted of / addicted in | addicted to | | all day since / all day for | all day | | all night since / all night for | all night | | all what | all that | | although ... but | although ... / ... but | | ambiguous and vague | ambiguous / vague | | an English teacher (who teaches English) | a teacher of English | | an other | another | | approach near | approach | | await for | await | | back side | back | | bag and baggage with | bag and baggage | | because ... so | because ... / ... so | | blunder and mistake | blunder / mistake | | both ... as well as | both ... and | | but ... on the contrary | but / on the contrary | | can be able to | can / be able to | | come across with | come across | | compare off | compare with | | comprises of | comprises / consists of | | consensus opinion | consensus | | cope up with | cope with | | could be able to | could / was able to | | cousin sister / cousin brother | cousin / female cousin / male cousin |

The A to Z list: D to M

| ✘ Wrong / superfluous | ✔ Right | |---|---| | despite of / inspite of | despite / in spite of | | different than | different from | | discuss about | discuss | | dressing sense | dress sense | | during the period of war | during the war | | enter into a room | enter a room | | exceed more than | exceed | | fake rumours | rumours | | female compartment | ladies compartment | | final conclusion | conclusion | | flee away | flee | | fond to / fond with | fond of | | front side | front | | funeral service | funeral | | hammer and tongs with | hammer and tongs | | hardly no one / hardly nothing | hardly anyone / hardly anything | | heart and soul with | heart and soul | | in next week / on next week | next week | | investigate into | investigate | | junior than / more junior | junior to | | just and exactly | just / exactly | | lecturership | lectureship | | lest ... not | lest ... (no not) | | linking road | link road | | made from silver (material visible) | made of silver | | made of wood (paper) | made from wood | | married with | married to | | may possibly | may | | might likely | might || ✘ गलत / अनावश्यक | ✔ सही | |---|---| | despite of / inspite of | despite / in spite of | | different than | different from | | discuss about | discuss | | dressing sense | dress sense | | during the period of war | during the war | | enter into a room | enter a room | | exceed more than | exceed | | fake rumours | rumours | | female compartment | ladies compartment | | final conclusion | conclusion | | flee away | flee | | fond to / fond with | fond of | | front side | front | | funeral service | funeral | | hammer and tongs with | hammer and tongs | | hardly no one / hardly nothing | hardly anyone / hardly anything | | heart and soul with | heart and soul | | in next week / on next week | next week | | investigate into | investigate | | junior than / more junior | junior to | | just and exactly | just / exactly | | lecturership | lectureship | | lest ... not | lest ... (no not) | | linking road | link road | | made from silver (material visible) | made of silver | | made of wood (paper) | made from wood | | married with | married to | | may possibly | may | | might likely | might |

The A to Z list: M to R

| ✘ Wrong / superfluous | ✔ Right | |---|---| | more better / more taller | better / taller | | most best / most beautifullest | best / most beautiful | | mutual agreement | agreement | | my family member | a member of my family | | omnivore animal | omnivorous animal | | on every Tuesday | every Tuesday | | on last Sunday | last Sunday | | order for tea | order tea | | other alternative | other option / alternative | | passing marks | pass marks | | please requested | requested | | prefer tea than coffee | prefer tea to coffee | | propose her | propose to her | | quite all | all / quite | | quite almost | quite / almost | | quite alright | alright | | rain like cats and dogs | rain cats and dogs | | reach to | reach | | reason ... because | reason ... that / ... because | | rebuild again | rebuild | | recall back | recall | | recap back | recap | | relatively colder / comparatively better | relatively cold / colder | | repeat again | repeat | | resemble to | resemble | | rest of my remaining life | the rest of my life / my remaining life | | retreat back / retreat again | retreat | | return back | return | | reverse back | reverse || ✘ गलत / अनावश्यक | ✔ सही | |---|---| | more better / more taller | better / taller | | most best / most beautifullest | best / most beautiful | | mutual agreement (सामंजस्य) | agreement | | my family member | a member of my family | | omnivore animal | omnivorous animal | | on every Tuesday | every Tuesday | | on last Sunday | last Sunday | | order for tea | order tea | | other alternative | other option / alternative | | passing marks | pass marks | | please requested | requested | | prefer tea than coffee | prefer tea to coffee | | propose her | propose to her | | quite all | all / quite | | quite almost | quite / almost | | quite alright | alright | | rain like cats and dogs | rain cats and dogs | | reach to | reach | | reason ... because | reason ... that / ... because | | rebuild again | rebuild | | recall back | recall | | recap back | recap | | relatively colder / comparatively better | relatively cold / colder | | repeat again | repeat | | resemble to | resemble | | rest of my remaining life | the rest of my life / my remaining life | | retreat back / retreat again | retreat | | return back | return | | reverse back | reverse |

The A to Z list: R to Y

| ✘ Wrong / superfluous | ✔ Right | |---|---| | revert back | revert | | rewrite again | rewrite | | see dreams | have dreams | | senior than / more senior | senior to | | spouse husband / spouse wife | spouse | | superior than / more superior | superior to | | supposing ... if | supposing ... / if ... | | through the whole country | through the country | | today morning / today evening | this morning / this evening | | today night | tonight | | tooth and nail with | tooth and nail | | true fact | fact | | twins two / two twins | twins | | universally and everywhere | universally / everywhere | | unless ... not | unless ... (no not) | | until ... not | until ... (no not) | | verbal orders | oral orders | | very enough / sufficiently enough | enough | | very too / very so / very quite | too / so / quite | | very unique / more perfect / very universal | unique / perfect / universal | | where ... go to | where ... go | | who he / which it (extra pronoun) | who / which alone | | with body and soul | body and soul | | without not | without | | worked hardly | worked hard | | yearly annual | annual / yearly | | yesterday night | last night || ✘ गलत / अनावश्यक | ✔ सही | |---|---| | revert back | revert | | rewrite again | rewrite | | see dreams | have dreams | | senior than / more senior | senior to | | spouse husband / spouse wife | spouse | | superior than / more superior | superior to | | supposing ... if | supposing ... / if ... | | through the whole country | through the country | | today morning / today evening | this morning / this evening | | today night | tonight | | tooth and nail with | tooth and nail | | true fact | fact | | twins two / two twins | twins | | universally and everywhere | universally / everywhere | | unless ... not | unless ... (no not) | | until ... not | until ... (no not) | | verbal orders | oral orders | | very enough / sufficiently enough | enough | | very too / very so / very quite | too / so / quite | | very unique / more perfect / very universal | unique / perfect / universal | | where ... go to | where ... go | | who he / which it (extra pronoun) | who / which alone | | with body and soul | body and soul | | without not | without | | worked hardly | worked hard | | yearly annual | annual / yearly | | yesterday night | last night |

Correct as they are: do not over-correct

angry mob, mutual friend, common friend, bad dream, bosom friend, sworn enemy, though ... yet are correct. ✔ The angry mob gathered outside the office. ✔ Aman is a mutual friend of Radhika and Neha. ✔ Though he was tired, yet he finished the work.angry mob, mutual friend, common friend, bad dream, bosom friend, sworn enemy, though ... yet सही हैं। ✔ The angry mob gathered outside the office. ✔ Aman is a mutual friend of Radhika and Neha. ✔ Though he was tired, yet he finished the work.
this morning, last night, tonight, every Tuesday, next week are the right time forms. Come back, go back, give back, take back are right, because those verbs do not hold ‘back’.this morning, last night, tonight, every Tuesday, next week समय के सही रूप हैं। Come back, go back, give back, take back सही हैं, क्योंकि इन क्रियाओं में ‘back’ नहीं है।

The seven groups at a glance

Inner meaning: twins, fact, conclusion, cousin, spouse, consensus need no extra word.भीतरी अर्थ: twins, fact, conclusion, cousin, spouse, consensus के साथ अतिरिक्त शब्द नहीं।
Time: last, next, this, every + time word → no on / in / at.समय: last, next, this, every + समय-सूचक शब्द → on / in / at नहीं।
Comparison: more / most / relatively / very never double a comparative, a superlative or a non-gradable adjective.तुलना: more / most / relatively / very comparative (तुलनात्मक), superlative (उत्तमावस्था) या अतुलनीय विशेषण को कभी नहीं दोहराते।
Negative: hardly, scarcely, barely, seldom, rarely, without, until, unless, lest take no second negative.निषेध: hardly, scarcely, barely, seldom, rarely, without, until, unless, lest के साथ दूसरा निषेध नहीं।
Verb + preposition: return, repeat, discuss, investigate, await, comprise, resemble, reach take no extra word; propose to, compare with, married to, addicted to need the preposition.क्रिया + पूर्वसर्ग: return, repeat, discuss, investigate, await, comprise, resemble, reach के साथ अतिरिक्त शब्द नहीं; propose to, compare with, married to, addicted to को पूर्वसर्ग चाहिए।

28. Figures of Speech Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

Simile uses like / as; metaphor says one thing is another.Simile (उपमा) में like / as होता है; metaphor (रूपक) कहता है कि एक वस्तु दूसरी है।
Personification gives a human act to a non-human thing (the wind whispered).Personification अमानवीय वस्तु को मानवीय कार्य देता है (the wind whispered)।
Apostrophe means speaking directly to someone absent or lifeless.Apostrophe का अर्थ है किसी अनुपस्थित या निर्जीव से सीधे बात करना।
Hyperbole is deliberate exaggeration; understatement plays a big thing down.Hyperbole जान-बूझकर बढ़ाकर कहना है; understatement बड़ी बात को छोटा करता है।
Oxymoron is two opposite words in one phrase; paradox is a statement that seems false but is true.Oxymoron एक वाक्यांश में दो विपरीत शब्द हैं; paradox ऐसा कथन है जो झूठा लगे पर सत्य हो।
Antithesis sets two opposite ideas in balanced clauses (Man proposes, God disposes).Antithesis संतुलित उपवाक्यों में दो विपरीत विचार रखता है (Man proposes, God disposes)।
Irony says the reverse of what is meant; sarcasm is irony used to hurt.Irony आशय का उलटा कहती है; sarcasm चोट पहुँचाने वाली irony है।
Euphemism replaces a harsh word with a soft one (passed away).Euphemism कठोर शब्द की जगह कोमल शब्द रखती है (passed away)।
Metonymy names a thing by a connected thing (crown for king); synecdoche uses a part for the whole (hands).Metonymy किसी वस्तु को जुड़ी वस्तु के नाम से पुकारती है (crown = राजा); synecdoche अंश से पूर्ण को (hands)।
Alliteration repeats a starting sound; onomatopoeia imitates a sound (buzz).Alliteration (अनुप्रास) आरंभिक ध्वनि दोहराता है; onomatopoeia ध्वनि का अनुकरण करता है (buzz)।
For a passage metaphor, match the author's central idea and reject the over-simple, extreme picture.गद्यांश के रूपक में लेखक के केंद्रीय विचार से मिलाएँ और बहुत सरल, अतिवादी चित्र हटाइए।
For the meaning of a phrase, give the plain idea behind the picture and cross out the literal option.वाक्यांश के अर्थ में चित्र के पीछे का सीधा विचार दें और शाब्दिक विकल्प काट दीजिए।

The figures at a glance

Simile uses like / as: He ran like the wind.Simile (उपमा) में like / as होता है: He ran like the wind.
Metaphor says A is B: Time is money.Metaphor (रूपक) कहता है A is B: Time is money.
Personification gives a human act to a non-human thing: The wind whispered.Personification अमानवीय वस्तु को मानवीय कार्य देता है: The wind whispered.
Apostrophe speaks to the absent or lifeless: O Death, where is thy sting?Apostrophe अनुपस्थित या निर्जीव से बात करता है: O Death, where is thy sting?
Hyperbole exaggerates: I have told you a million times.Hyperbole (अतिशयोक्ति) बढ़ा-चढ़ाकर कहता है: I have told you a million times.
Understatement plays a big thing down: It was a bit of a shock.Understatement बड़ी बात को छोटा करता है: It was a bit of a shock.
Irony means the reverse of the words: What pleasant weather! (in a storm).Irony शब्दों का उलटा अर्थ रखती है: What pleasant weather! (तूफ़ान में)।
Euphemism softens a harsh word: He passed away.Euphemism (शिष्टोक्ति) कठोर शब्द को कोमल करती है: He passed away.

Figures that look alike

Oxymoron = two opposite words (deafening silence); paradox = a statement that seems false but is true; antithesis = two opposite ideas in balance.Oxymoron = दो विपरीत शब्द (deafening silence); paradox = कथन जो झूठा लगे पर सत्य हो; antithesis = संतुलन में दो विपरीत विचार।
Metonymy = a connected thing (crown for king); synecdoche = a part for the whole (hands for sailors); transferred epithet = adjective moved to a nearby noun (sleepless night).Metonymy = जुड़ी वस्तु (crown = राजा); synecdoche = अंश पूर्ण के लिए (hands = नाविक); transferred epithet = विशेषण पास की संज्ञा पर (sleepless night)।
Alliteration repeats the starting sound; onomatopoeia is a word that imitates a sound.Alliteration (अनुप्रास) आरंभिक ध्वनि दोहराता है; onomatopoeia ऐसा शब्द है जो ध्वनि का अनुकरण करता है।
Hyperbole says too much of what is meant; irony says the opposite.Hyperbole (अतिशयोक्ति) आशय को आवश्यकता से अधिक कहती है; irony उलटा कहती है।

Figures in comprehension

Metaphor that fits the passage: say the passage in one line, translate each picture, match to the central idea, reject the extreme or over-simple picture.गद्यांश में उपयुक्त रूपक: गद्यांश को एक पंक्ति में कहें, प्रत्येक चित्र का अनुवाद करें, केंद्रीय विचार से मिलाएँ, अतिवादी या बहुत सरल चित्र हटाइए।
Meaning of a phrase: give the plain idea behind the picture; cross out the literal option and the option with outside facts.वाक्यांश का अर्थ: चित्र के पीछे का सीधा विचार दें; शाब्दिक विकल्प और बाहर के तथ्यों वाला विकल्प काटिए।
Device or tone of a quoted line: ask whether the writer means it literally; if not, think irony or hyperbole.उद्धृत पंक्ति का अलंकार या tone: पूछें कि लेखक सचमुच यह मानता है या नहीं; नहीं, तो irony या hyperbole (अतिशयोक्ति) सोचिए।

23. Cloze Test Chapter पढ़ें →Read chapter →

Quick revision

A cloze is a pattern game before it is a meaning game: read the options first.क्लोज़ पहले ढाँचे का खेल है, अर्थ का बाद में: विकल्प पहले पढ़िए।
Same word in four forms means a grammar blank; four different words close in meaning means a vocabulary blank.एक शब्द के चार रूप हों तो व्याकरण का रिक्त स्थान; अर्थ में पास-पास चार अलग शब्द हों तो शब्दावली का रिक्त स्थान।
Hard passage: use the window method, the sentence with the blank and a line either side, after a quick look at the opening line.कठिन गद्यांश: खिड़की विधि लगाइए, रिक्त स्थान वाला वाक्य और आगे-पीछे की एक पंक्ति, और उससे पहले शुरू की पंक्ति पर एक तेज़ नज़र डालना।
The word touching the blank decides most grammar blanks: than, to, of, with.रिक्त स्थान को छूने वाला शब्द अधिकतर व्याकरण के रिक्त स्थान तय करता है: than, to, of, with।
For a verb blank find the real subject: after who / which / that, the noun before it; two subjects with and are plural.क्रिया वाले रिक्त स्थान में वास्तविक कर्ता ढूँढिए: who / which / that के बाद उससे पहले वाली संज्ञा; and से जुड़े दो कर्ता बहुवचन।
Name the slot (noun, adjective, adverb) and delete the options of other kinds.स्थान का नाम तय कीजिए (संज्ञा, विशेषण, क्रिया-विशेषण) और अन्य प्रकार के विकल्प हटाइए।
Conjunctions carry logic: whereas for two equal groups, although for concession, therefore for result.संयोजक तर्क ले जाते हैं: बराबर के दो समूहों के लिए whereas, छूट के लिए although, परिणाम के लिए therefore।
Rather than and not … but put the blank against the word on the other side.Rather than और not … but रिक्त स्थान को दूसरी ओर वाले शब्द के सामने खड़ा करते हैं।
Close synonyms are a warning: two or three options with one meaning are usually distractors, but test them in the sentence.निकट पर्यायवाची एक चेतावनी हैं: एक अर्थ वाले दो-तीन विकल्प प्रायः भ्रामक होते हैं, पर उन्हें वाक्य में परखिए।
Exact antonyms in the options: the answer is often one of the two, and the sentence must confirm the side.विकल्पों में ठीक विपरीतार्थक हों तो उत्तर प्रायः दोनों में से एक होता है, और कौन-सी ओर सही है, इसकी पुष्टि वाक्य को करनी चाहिए।
Three options of one tone and one apart: the odd one is often the answer, when the tone is clear and the sentence confirms it.तीन विकल्प एक स्वर के और एक अलग: स्वर स्पष्ट हो और वाक्य पुष्टि करे, तो अलग वाला प्रायः उत्तर है।
Collocation first, meaning second: put the option in the blank and say it aloud.पहले सहप्रयोग, फिर अर्थ: विकल्प को रिक्त स्थान में रखकर ज़ोर से बोलिए।
Target four out of five in every passage, and leave the heavy blank for last.हर गद्यांश में पाँच में से चार का लक्ष्य रखिए, और भारी रिक्त स्थान अंत में छोड़िए।
Look-alike options (abet / attest / accelerate / arrest): say the meaning of the blank first, then test each word against its partner.मिलते-जुलते विकल्प (abet / attest / accelerate / arrest): पहले रिक्त स्थान का अर्थ बोलिए, फिर हर शब्द को उसके साथी शब्द से परखिए।
Connector set: although = in spite of the fact that, unless = if not, whether = two possibilities with or (not), if = one condition.संयोजक समूह: although = in spite of the fact that, unless = if not, whether = or (not) के साथ दो संभावनाएँ, if = एक शर्त।
Read an easy passage once for its theme and tone before any option is touched.सरल गद्यांश को किसी भी विकल्प को देखने से पहले विषय और स्वर के लिए एक बार पढ़िए।
Every blank gets a grammar check first and a meaning check second; the final re-read catches a jumping tense or a clashing article.प्रत्येक रिक्त स्थान पर पहले व्याकरण-जाँच और फिर अर्थ-जाँच होती है; अंतिम पुनर्पाठ में बदलता काल या टकराता article पकड़ में आ जाता है।

Reading the passage

First line only: topic, tone and how heavy the words are. Easy: read it all. Hard: window method.केवल पहली पंक्ति: विषय, स्वर और शब्द कितने भारी हैं। सरल: पूरा पढ़िए। कठिन: खिड़की विधि।
Window = the sentence with the blank, plus one line either side if needed. A line with no blank can be read quickly; it may hold the clue.खिड़की = रिक्त स्थान वाला वाक्य, और आवश्यकता हो तो आगे-पीछे की एक पंक्ति। जिस पंक्ति में रिक्त स्थान नहीं, उसे जल्दी पढ़िए; उसमें संकेत हो सकता है।
Options first, meaning later. Do the clearest blank first. Target: four out of five.विकल्प पहले, अर्थ बाद में। सबसे स्पष्ट रिक्त स्थान पहले। लक्ष्य: पाँच में से चार।
Time: easy about 1 min, harder 1.5 to 2 min, hard 4 to 5 min. After removing one or two options, guess and move on.समय: सरल लगभग 1 मिनट, थोड़ा कठिन 1.5 से 2 मिनट, कठिन 4 से 5 मिनट। एक-दो विकल्प हटाकर अनुमान लगाइए और आगे बढ़िए।

Grammar blanks

Four forms of one verb: find the real subject. After who / which / that, the noun before the pronoun; two subjects with and are plural; in an inverted sentence the subject follows the verb.एक क्रिया के चार रूप: वास्तविक कर्ता ढूँढिए। who / which / that के बाद सर्वनाम से पहले वाली संज्ञा; and से जुड़े दो कर्ता बहुवचन; उलटे वाक्य में कर्ता क्रिया के बाद।
Facts and general situations stay in the present simple. The form must match the time of the passage. Modal + V1; has / have + V3.तथ्य और सामान्य स्थितियाँ Present Simple (सामान्य वर्तमान काल) में रहती हैं। रूप गद्यांश के काल से मिले। Modal (रूपात्मक क्रिया) + V1; has / have + V3।
Part of speech: name the slot, then delete options of other kinds. Noun needed: remove the three adjectives.शब्दभेद: स्थान का नाम तय कीजिए, फिर अन्य प्रकार के विकल्प हटाइए। संज्ञा चाहिए: तीनों विशेषण हटाइए।
An -ed participle as adjective is passive in sense (reflected sunlight); an -ing participle is active.विशेषण की तरह आया -ed कृदंत कर्मवाच्य का भाव देता है (reflected sunlight); -ing कर्तृवाच्य का भाव देता है।
no + noun phrase; not needs a verb or an article before it.no + संज्ञा-पदबंध; not के पहले क्रिया या article चाहिए।
Prepositions belong to a partner: listen to, subjected to, antithetical to, a beacon of hope.पूर्वसर्ग अपने साथी के होते हैं: listen to, subjected to, antithetical to, a beacon of hope।
Conjunctions: two equal groups whereas / while; concession although; cause because; condition if / supposing. A comma straight after despite means that option is out.संयोजक: दो बराबर समूह whereas / while; छूट although; कारण because; शर्त if / supposing। Despite के ठीक बाद अल्पविराम हो तो वह विकल्प बाहर।
Parallel structure: the second half copies the first (ends … begins). Possibility takes might.समानांतर संरचना: दूसरा भाग पहले की नकल करता है (ends … begins)। संभावना के लिए might।

Vocabulary blanks

Linking words: but / however / yet = opposite; rather than / not … but = opposite of the other side; therefore = result; because = cause; also / besides = same direction.संयोजक शब्द: but / however / yet = विपरीत; rather than / not … but = दूसरी ओर का विपरीत; therefore = परिणाम; because = कारण; also / besides = वही दिशा।
Close synonyms in the options are likely distractors. If one fits, the other usually fits too, so both should be tested in the sentence before deciding.विकल्पों में निकट पर्यायवाची संभावित भ्रामक विकल्प हैं। एक उचित हो तो दूसरा भी प्रायः उचित होता है, इसलिए निर्णय से पहले दोनों को वाक्य में परखिए।
Exact antonyms in the options: the answer is often one of the two, and the sentence must confirm the side. With two synonyms on one side, the other side is a strong candidate.विकल्पों में ठीक विपरीतार्थक: उत्तर प्रायः दोनों में से एक होता है, और कौन-सी ओर सही है, इसकी पुष्टि वाक्य को करनी चाहिए। एक ओर दो पर्यायवाची हों तो दूसरी ओर वाला मज़बूत उम्मीदवार है।
Three options of one tone and one apart: the odd one is often the answer (needs a clear tone, and the sentence must confirm it).तीन विकल्प एक स्वर के और एक अलग: अलग वाला प्रायः उत्तर है (स्वर स्पष्ट होना चाहिए, और वाक्य को उसकी पुष्टि करनी चाहिए)।
Denotation is the dictionary meaning; connotation is the feeling. A hurtful review is harsh, not honest.Denotation शब्दकोश का अर्थ है; connotation भावना है। आहत करने वाली समीक्षा harsh है, honest नहीं।
Collocation test: put the option in the blank and say it aloud. Idioms are learned whole: at a crossroads, difficult to stomach.सहप्रयोग की जाँच: विकल्प को रिक्त स्थान में रखकर ज़ोर से बोलिए। मुहावरे पूरे सीखे जाते हैं: at a crossroads, difficult to stomach।

Hints and final check

Repetition: a word already in the passage is often not the answer. A clue, not a guarantee.पुनरावृत्ति: जो शब्द गद्यांश में पहले से है वह प्रायः उत्तर नहीं होता। संकेत है, गारंटी नहीं।
Plain passage, plain fillers (a heavy option stands out); heavy passage, heavy fillers (a very simple option is usually wrong). A hint only.सरल गद्यांश में सरल भराव (भारी विकल्प अलग दिखता है); कठिन गद्यांश में कठिन भराव (बहुत सरल विकल्प प्रायः गलत)। केवल संकेत।
Do not decode every hard word. The pattern matters more than the meaning. Finish by reading the full sentence with the answer in.हर कठिन शब्द को समझने में न लग जाइए। अर्थ से अधिक ढाँचा मायने रखता है। अंत में अपना उत्तर रखकर पूरा वाक्य पढ़िए।

Look-alike options and connectors

Look-alike options: test each word against its partner, not against the other options. extort money, exert pressure, extract a tooth, expel a student.मिलते-जुलते विकल्प: हर शब्द को उसके साथी शब्द से परखिए, दूसरे विकल्पों से नहीं। extort money, exert pressure, extract a tooth, expel a student।
abet a crime, attest to honesty, accelerate growth, arrest a thief. impose a ban, oppose a plan, expose a secret.abet a crime, attest to honesty, accelerate growth, arrest a thief। impose a ban, oppose a plan, expose a secret।
Although = in spite of the fact that. Unless = if not. If = plain condition. Whether = two possibilities, with or (not).Although = in spite of the fact that। Unless = if not। If = सीधी शर्त। Whether = दो संभावनाएँ, or (not) के साथ।
Unless never takes a negative after it. Although never takes but in the main clause.Unless के बाद नकारात्मक रूप कभी नहीं आता। Although वाले वाक्य के मुख्य उपवाक्य में but कभी नहीं आता।

Routine and final check

Easy passage: one quick reading for theme and tone. Hard passage: the window method.सरल गद्यांश: विषय और स्वर के लिए एक त्वरित पाठ। कठिन गद्यांश: खिड़की विधि।
Read the option set first: four forms = grammar; small words = partner or logic; four words = friends, enemies and tone.पहले विकल्प-समूह पढ़िए: चार रूप = व्याकरण; छोटे शब्द = साथी या तर्क; चार शब्द = मित्र, शत्रु और स्वर।
Grammar check first, meaning check second. A quick grammar glance at the chosen word at the end.पहले व्याकरण-जाँच, फिर अर्थ-जाँच। अंत में चुने हुए शब्द पर व्याकरण की एक संक्षिप्त दृष्टि।
Clues around the blank, in order: the word touching it, the linking word, the next sentence.रिक्त स्थान के आसपास के संकेत, इसी क्रम में: उसे छूने वाला शब्द, संयोजक शब्द, अगला वाक्य।
Final re-read: a tense that jumps, an article or preposition that clashes, a repeated word, a meaning against the theme.अंतिम पुनर्पाठ: काल का बदलना, article या preposition (पूर्वसर्ग) का टकराना, दोहराया गया शब्द, विषय के विरुद्ध अर्थ।